essential photoshop editing techniques

499
Get the IMAGE YOU WANT: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques By Element K Journals Creative Team ............................................... Publisher: Peachpit Press Pub Date: June 08, 2005 ISBN: 0-321-34896-6 Pages: 288 Table of Contents | Index Creating great photographic images doesn't stop with perfecting your shooting techniques. Once you have your photo in digital form, you can take it to the next level with image editing tools like Photoshop. While other Photoshop books go from feature to feature, explaining every little detail of this expansive program, this book is separated into eight chapters that deal with the main aspects of working with images in Photoshsop. This way, you can keep the book next to your workspace and reach for it whenever you need the perfect solution to an image-editing problem. Readers will start with learning basic image editing concepts, such as importing files, correcting color and tone, cropping images, and using masks and filters. Also included is a problem/solution section at the end of each chapter, containing specific techniques and streamlined fixes that you can apply to the most common image-editing challenges. Along the way, this full-color, gorgeously illustrated book offers practical help and hundreds of creative ideas. Targeted at the serious beginner, this four-color reference book teaches core Photoshop and digital imaging concepts at an affordable price and an accessible page count.

Upload: lewprasim

Post on 08-Dec-2015

233 views

Category:

Documents


5 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

GettheIMAGEYOUWANT:EssentialPhotoshopEditingTechniquesByElementKJournalsCreativeTeam...............................................Publisher:PeachpitPressPubDate:June08,2005ISBN:0-321-34896-6Pages:288

TableofContents|Index

Creatinggreatphotographicimagesdoesn'tstopwithperfectingyourshootingtechniques.Onceyouhaveyourphotoindigitalform,youcantakeittothenextlevelwithimageeditingtoolslikePhotoshop.WhileotherPhotoshopbooksgofromfeaturetofeature,explainingeverylittledetailofthisexpansiveprogram,thisbookisseparatedintoeightchaptersthatdealwiththemainaspectsofworkingwithimagesinPhotoshsop.Thisway,youcankeepthebooknexttoyourworkspaceandreachforitwheneveryouneedtheperfectsolutiontoanimage-editingproblem.Readerswillstartwithlearningbasicimageeditingconcepts,suchasimportingfiles,correctingcolorandtone,croppingimages,andusingmasksandfilters.Alsoincludedisaproblem/solutionsectionattheendofeachchapter,containingspecifictechniquesandstreamlinedfixesthatyoucanapplytothemostcommonimage-editingchallenges.Alongtheway,thisfull-color,gorgeouslyillustratedbookofferspracticalhelpandhundredsofcreativeideas.Targetedattheseriousbeginner,thisfour-colorreferencebookteachescorePhotoshopanddigitalimagingconceptsatanaffordablepriceandanaccessiblepagecount.

Page 2: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

GettheIMAGEYOUWANT:EssentialPhotoshopEditingTechniquesByElementKJournalsCreativeTeam...............................................Publisher:PeachpitPressPubDate:June08,2005ISBN:0-321-34896-6Pages:288

TableofContents|Index

Copyright Foreword Introduction Startbycalibratingyourmonitor OpeningfilesinPhotoshop KeepimagesorganizedandeasytofindwiththeFileBrowser Beconsistentwithcolorcorrectingdigitalimages Part1:ColorandTonalCorrections1 Chapter1.ColorCorrection ImprovethecolorinyourimageswithCurves Adjusthueandsaturationtoselectivelycolorizeanimage CorrectcolorwiththeVariationscommand KeepcolorsconsistentwiththeMatchColorcommand CorrectcolorwiththeColorReplacementtool ChangecolorwithReplaceColor Problem:SolutionUsetheLevelscommandtocorrectcolorcasts Problem:SolutionMellowoversaturatedcolors Chapter2.TonalCorrection Determinetonalqualitybyreadingahistogram UseAutoContrasttoautomaticallycorrectanimage Addmissingdetailtoyourimages ImprovetonalrangewiththeShadow/Highlightcommand Correctexposureproblemswithdodgingandburning Problem:SolutionRestoreunderexposedshadowdetail Problem:SolutionRestoreoverexposedphotos Part2:EssentialImageEditingFixes Chapter3.Noiseandsharpening AddnoisewiththeAddNoisefilter Useblendingmodestofixdigitalnoise Keepyourdigitalimagesnoisefree BoostclaritywiththeUnsharpMaskfilter Problem:SolutionRemovenoisewithLabcolor

Page 3: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Workinthelab Problem:SolutionUseabrushwiththeUnsharpMaskfilter Chapter4.RetouchingTechniques CorrectimperfectionsindigitalphotoswiththeHealingBrush RepairandedityourimageswiththePatchtool CleanupcolorproblemswiththeSpongetool Fixflawedarchitecturalimages Problem:SolutionEliminateskinflaws Problem:SolutionRestorecolortounderexposedareas Problem:SolutionRemovelinesandwrinkles Chapter5.Optimizationandsizing Choosethebestfileformatsfortheweb Optimizeyourimagestogetthebestwebresults AdjustJPEGwebqualitywiththeModifyQualitySettingcommand Makeprecisecroppingselectionsusingguides OptimizeyourimagesforuseinMicrosoftPowerPoint Problem:SolutionImproveblurringincompressedwebimages Problem:SolutionImproveresampledimagesforprint Part3:ImageManipulationandAlteration Chapter6.ArtisticApproaches Burntheedgesofyourphotostoaddmood PaintgradualtoneswiththeAirbrushoption Createconvincingreflections ControlvisualfocuswiththeGradienttool CombineimageswiththeExtractcommand Enhanceyourimageswithwell-placedlight Problem:SolutionRemoveacompleximagefromitsbackground Problem:SolutionRemoveanobjectfromaphoto Chapter7.Filters UsingtheFilterGallery Combiningfilterlayers Filteryourportraits Adjusttheimagefortonalquality Addtexturewithsimulatedfilmgrain Problem:SolutionCorrectcolorcasts Problem:SolutionModifyfacialfeatures Chapter8.Masks UseQuickMaskmodetomakeaselection Createvignetteswithlayermasks Cutoutpartsofimageswithlayermasks Editingwithvectormasks Problem:SolutionFixaccidentalsilhouettes Problem:SolutionRestorelosthighlightdetail Glossary Appendix PhotoshopCSkeyboardshortcuts Index

Page 4: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 5: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 6: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Copyright

PeachpitPress

1249EighthStreetBerkeley,CA94710

510/524-2178800/283-9444510/524-2221(fax)

FindusontheWorldWideWebat:

www.peachpit.com

Toreporterrors,pleasesendanoteto

[email protected]

PeachpitPressisadivisionofPearsonEducation.

PublishedinassociationwithElementKJournals.

Copyright©2005byElementKJournals

ProductionTeam

Publisher:MichelleL.Rogers

Editor:StephenDow

ContributingEditors:A.Cloutier,G.H.Cloutier,GaryDeFranco,StephenDow,RenéeDustman,AmyGebhardt,DianneSloan,T.N.Tumbusch,JimWhitcomb,RonWilder

ProjectEditor:JanMater-Cavagnaro

ProductionEditor:LisaBrazieal

CopyEditors:LeesaIsraelandRebeccaO'Keefe

CoverDesign:AliciaNataleandAmyPalermo

Page 7: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

InteriorDesign:AmyPalermo

GraphicDesignManager:CharlesWilley

SomeimagesinthisbookwereprovidedbyPhotoSpin®.Someoftheseimagesweremodifiedforeducationalpurposes.www.photospin.com

NoticeofRights

Allrightsreserved.Nopartofthisbookmaybereproducedortransmittedinanyformbyanymeans,electronic,mechanical,photocopying,recording,orotherwise,withoutthepriorwrittenpermissionofthepublisher.Forinformationongettingpermissionforreprintsandexcerpts,[email protected].

NoticeofLiability

Theinformationinthisbookisdistributedonan"AsIs"basis,withoutwarranty.Whileeveryprecautionhasbeentakeninthepreparationofthebook,neithertheauthornorPeachpitPressshallhaveanyliabilitytoanypersonorentitywithrespecttoanylossordamagecausedorallegedtobecauseddirectlyorindirectlybytheinstructionscontainedinthisbookorbythecomputersoftwareandhardwareproductsdescribedinit.

Trademarks

Manyofthedesignationsusedbymanufacturersandsellerstodistinguishtheirproductsareclaimedastrademarks.Wherethosedesignationsappearinthisbook,andPeachpitPresswasawareofatrademarkclaim,thedesignationsappearasrequestedbytheownerofthetrademark.Allotherproductnamesandservicesidentifiedthroughoutthisbookareusedineditorialfashiononlyandforthebenefitofsuchcompanieswithnointentionofinfringementofthetrademark.Nosuchuse,ortheuseofanytradename,isintendedtoconveyendorsementorotheraffiliationwiththisbook.

AdobeandPhotoshopareregisteredtrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

987654321

PrintedandboundintheUnitedStatesofAmerica

Page 8: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Dedication

Toourfamilies,

whocontinuetosupportusnomatterhowtiredandcrankyweareattheendoftheday.

Page 9: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 10: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ForewordIntheearlydaysofimageediting,onlyprofessionalshadtheexpertiseandfinancialmeanstorunthecomplexcomputersystemsneededtodigitallyprocessimagefiles.

Nowadays,almostanyonecangetsetupwiththerighttoolsforcreatingprofessionalresultswheneditingimages.So,howaboutyou?Youhavethedigitalcamera,thescanner,thecomputer,andthemonitor.YouevenhaveAdobe®Photoshop®.Withallofthepiecesinplace,youfeelreadytostarteditingyourimage,butwhat'sthebestwaytogoaboutdoingso?Theprocessofadjustingadigitalimageisnotonlyverysubjective,butit'salsoahighlytechnicalexperience.Butpixel-pushingdoesn'thavetoberelegatedtoprofessionalswhochargealotofmoneytoremoveascratchfromyourscanoradjustthecontrastinyourdigitalimage.

Thisbookismeanttodispelthemythsthatimageeditingishard,byhelpingyoubecomeamethodicalandefficientPhotoshopuser.OtherPhotoshopbookssimplygofromfeaturetofeature,explainingeverylittledetailofthisexpansiveprogram.Butwewantedtomakeiteasiertofindtheinformationthatpertainstoyourparticularimage-editingneed,sowe'vedividedthisbookintoeightchaptersthatdealwiththemainaspectsofworkingwithimagesinPhotoshop.Thisway,youcankeepthebooknexttoyourworkspaceandreachforitwheneveryouneedtheperfectsolutiontoanimage-editingproblem.

We'vealsoincludedaProblem/Solutionsectionattheendofeachchapter.Thesearespecifictechniquesyoucanapplytothemostcommonimage-editingchallenges.Ourstreamlinedfixesaresuretobecomeyourmostvaluededitingtechniques.

Inthisbook,we'llassumeyouhavethesoftwareandanunderstandingofhowtodothebasics,suchasopenfilesandnavigatethroughtheuserinterface.Pleasenotethatwe'vedecidedtousetheMicrosoft®Windows®versionofAdobePhotoshopasourleadversion,butwe'veincludedMacintosh®equivalentstoallkeyboardshortcutsandanythingelsethatmightbedifferent.Essentially,Photoshopworksthesameoneitherplatform;itjustlooksabitdifferent.

Imageeditingisbothaskillandanart.Byfollowingalongwiththisbook,you'llbeabletodeveloptechniquesthatwillbridgethesedisciplinesandallowyoutocreateimagesthataretechnicallyperfect,butthatarealsogreattolookat.Takinganimagefromblahtobeautifuldoesn'thavetobehardandwe'llshowyouthebestwaystodoit.

Wishingyoutheperfectimage,TheElementKJournalsCreativeTeam

Page 11: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 12: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 13: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Introduction

Startbycalibratingyourmonitor

OpeningfilesinPhotoshop

KeepimagesorganizedandeasytofindwiththeFileBrowser

Beconsistentwithcolorcorrectingdigitalimages

Page 14: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Startbycalibratingyourmonitor

BeforeyouevenopenanimageinPhotoshop,thefirstthingyoushoulddoistakeamomenttooptimizeyourworkspace.Sinceyourmediuminthedigitalrealmisessentiallypixels,andpixelsaredisplayedonyourmonitor,thismeansyouneedtomakesureyourmonitorisproperlyadjustedtogiveyouaccuratecolorandneededdetail.

Whiletherearenearlyuniversalstandardcolorsettingsforgraphicsandimaging,therearenoneformonitors.Therelationshipbetweenthevoltageappliedtoamonitorandthebrightnessemittedisnon-linear.Inotherwords,ifanRGBpixelisatthemaximumvalueof255,changingthevalueto127(halfoftheoriginal)won'tproduceavisualresultofhalfbrightness.Instead,therelationshipfollowsapowerlawofthevoltagetothepowerofgamma,withthevariablegammarepresentingthevoltageofthemonitor.

Thefunctionofgamma

Mathematicsaside,itcanbesaidthatgammaistherelationshipbetweenthebrightnessofapixelandthenumericalvalueofthatpixel.Simplyput,gammaaffectsthebrightnessandcolorsaturationoftheimageswithwhichyouwork.Theimagesdisplayedonmonitorswithuncorrectedgammawillbetoodark,whereasovercorrectedgammawillcauseimagestoappeartoolight.Eitherway,hueswillchangefromthemonitortotheprintedpage.

Calibrateyourmonitorandmore

Monitorcalibrationshouldbeyourfirstorderofbusiness.Anuncalibratedorincorrectlycalibrateddisplaywillshowdifferentcolorsthanthosethatactuallyprint.Fortunately,thereareseveralspecificapplicationsavailableformonitorcalibration,whichwe'lldiscussinamoment.

Calibration,however,beginsatalevelevenmorebasicthanthat.Beforeyoubootupanapplicationordiveintotheweb,checkthelightinginyourworkspace.Forpropercolorappearance,thescreenshouldbeasglare-freeaspossible.Infact,themonitorsusedbyimagingprofessionalsarefrequentlyhoodedwithaplasticoverhangtofilteroutintrusiveoverheadlighting.Onceyoubootupyourcomputer,givethemonitor30minutestowarmupandstabilizebeforecalibration.It'salsoagoodideatosetthebackgroundcolortogray,asavibrantlycoloreddesktopcanalterthewayyouperceivethecolorswithinyourimages.

Page 15: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Thecalibrationprocess

Mostimagersshootforagammavalueof1.8.PhotoshopcomeswithAdobeGammaforWindows,whichguidesyouthroughthecalibrationprocessandgetsyouclosetogamma1.8.Mac®OSXuserscanusetheDisplayCalibratorAssistant.Thereis,however,astrongsentiment(especiallyamongthephotographicset)thatAdobe'scalibrationmethodsaretooimprecise.Whiletheyworknicelyformostgraphicdesignapplications,afineradjustmentmaybenecessarywhenworkingwithextremelydetailedphoto-realisticimages.

Ifyou'renewtocalibration,tryoutAdobeGamma.Then,ifyou'reunsatisfiedwiththeresultsofcalibrationwithAdobeGammaorifyouaren'tusingit,searchthewebformonitorcalibrationtogetmoredetailedcalibrationinstructions.

Note

MacintoshandWindowscomputersdealwithgammaindifferentwaysandcanproducedrasticallydifferentdisplayresults.AnoverlydarkimageonaMacmaybetoolightortoodarkonanuncorrectedPCdisplay.ThegammaforWindowsmachinesmustfrequentlybetinkeredwithatthevideo-cardlevel.Bottomlineifyourimageiscrossingplatforms,it'svitaltocheckthegammaforbothplatforms.

Page 16: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

OpeningfilesinPhotoshop

Onceyouhaveyourworkspacesetupandyourmonitorcalibrated,youcantakethenextstepofopeningafileinPhotoshop.Photoshophastheabilitytoopendozensofdifferentfileformats.Youcaneasilyopenandeditfiles,suchasJPEGsandGIFs,withPhotoshop'sampleresources,buttherearetimeswhenyouneedtodomorethanmerelyopenthemtomakethemuseful.Sometimes,you'rebringinginafilefromanexternalsource,suchasadigitalcamera,scanner,orevenadigitalvideocamera.Thisprocess,knownasimporting,allowsPhotoshoptobringinimagesfromothersources.

Importingfilesfromyourscanner

WhilemostfilessimplyusetheOpencommand,importingfilesfromexternalsourcesrequiresusingothermenuitems.Inthecaseofscanners,aspecialtechnologyknownasTWAINisused.AlmosteveryscannercomeswithaTWAIN-compliantdriverforPhotoshop.ATWAINdriverallowsthescannerandPhotoshoptospeakthesamelanguageandalsoputsthecontroloverhowthescannerperformsinyourhands.

TWAINdriveruserinterfacesvarybetweenmanufacturers,butyou'llalwaysfindthemonthesamemenuinPhotoshop.ChooseImportfromtheFilemenu.Ifyouhavescannersoftwareinstalled,Photoshoplistsitherebymanufacturerandmodelname,asshowninFigureA.Youmighthavemorethanonescannerlistedifyouhavemultiplescannersinstalledonyoursystem.

FigureA.

Page 17: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Oncelaunched,eachscannerhasdifferentoptionsandmethodsforscanningyourimage.OurscannersoftwareloadsfromwithinPhotoshop.Itgivesustheabilitytosettheresolutionandsizeofthescan,aswellasmakeimageadjustmentsbeforeourimageimports.Mostscannersoftwareallowsyoutodesignatetheareaofthescannerglassthatyou'dlikescanned.It'sagoodideatoonlyscanwhatyouneedoryou'llbewaitinglongerthanyouhavetoforyourscantocomplete.

Onceyou'vemadeyourchoices,clickScantoimporttheimage.OncetheimageisloadedintoPhotoshop,aswithEPSfilesbefore,youcansavetheimagetoanyfileformatyouchoose.

Importingfilesfromadigitalcamera

Importingpicturesfromadigitalcameraisn'tmuchdifferentthanimportingfromascanner.Digitalcamerasstoreimagesintheirinternalmemoryoronremovablestoragedevicessuchascompactflashcards.Youcanimporttheseimagesintwoways:withtheuseofanexternalreaderorbyusingplug-instobringtheinformationdirectlyintoPhotoshop.

Usingcardreadersforimportingdigitalimages

Sincemanydigitalcamerasuseremovablestoragemedia,havingareaderthatcanquicklytransferyourimagestoacomputerisamust-haveformanydigitalcameraenthusiasts.WhilefastUSBandFireWire®connectionshavemadethetransferofimagesdirectlyfromthecameramuchfaster,storagecapacityonmanymemorycardshasalsoincreased.CardreadersworkjustlikeadiskdriveyousimplychooseOpenfromtheFilemenuinPhotoshop,locateyourcardreader,andselecttheimageorimagesyou'dliketoopen.ImportingyourimagesintoPhotoshopusingacardreaderisfastandrelativelyfoolproof,andworksexactlythesameasimportingimagesontoyourharddrive.

Usingplug-insforimportingdigitalimages

Manycameramanufacturersalsoincludeaplug-inthatallowsdirectaccesstothedigitalcamerausingsomesortofconnection.ThisconnectionrangesfromUSB,serial,FireWire,andeveninfrared.Aplug-inisathird-partyapplicationthat'scompliantwithPhotoshop(orwhateverprogramthemanufacturercreatedittoworkwith).Thetwoapplicationsruntogethertoachieveagoal,usuallytocreatespecialeffectsorincreaseproductivity.Forexample,aplug-inallowsusto

Page 18: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

communicatewithadigitalcameraandimportfilesdirectlyintoPhotoshop.

Youcanaccessplug-insfordigitalcameras,similartoscannerTWAINdrivers,byusingtheImportmenu.Forexample,we'reusingawebcamtosnapsomequickimages.ThecameraisconnectedtothecomputerwithaUSBcable,sowecouldusethestand-aloneversionofthesoftwaretosnaptheimage,saveittoourharddrive,andthenopenitinPhotoshop.However,usingtheplug-inoffersamuchmorestreamlinedapproach.

Whenusingourwebcamplug-in,wefirstchooseImportfromtheFilemenuandlocateourcamerafromthedropdownlist.Oncelaunched,thecamerasoftwareopens.Thisplug-inwasmadetoworkinPhotoshopandgivesusalivepreviewfromourcamera,animagesizepicker,andasnapshotbuttonthatinitiatestheimportoftheimage.Itcouldn'tbesimpler!

Whilewedon'tgetalltheimagecontroloptionswenormallygetinthefull-blownapplication,it'snobigdeal;wecanadjustourimageinPhotoshop.Plug-insaren'tmeanttoreplacefunctionalityinPhotoshop,butrathertoenhanceandaddtothepossibilities.

Youmayhaveastilldigitalcamerathatworksinasimilarway.ManycamerashavefeaturesthatallowyoutocontrolyourcamerafromyourcomputerandtransfertheimagesimmediatelytoPhotoshop.Thisisanothergoodexampleofhowusingplug-instoimportimagescanextendthefunctionalityofthisimage-editingapplication.

ImportingEPSfiles

WhileimagefileformatsopeneasilyinPhotoshop,somerequirespecialattention.Forexample,EPS,orEncapsulatedPostScript,isaspeciallydesignedfileformatthatallowsvectorandrasterinformationtobesavedtogether.ThismeansthatasingleEPSfilemaycontainbothimagesmadeupofpixelsandobjectscomprisedofvectorpaths.Theprimaryusersofthisformataregraphicdesigners,whooftenneedtobringtheirartworkintoPhotoshopforfinishingtouchesafterdesigningitinanillustrationprogramsuchasAdobeIllustrator®orMacromedia®FreeHand®.However,sincemostgraphicsapplicationscansaveintheEPSformat,ithasbecomethebridgeintoPhotoshopformanyapplicationsthatcan'tsavefilesasastandardfileformatsuchasTIFForJPEG.

Note

TheprocessforopeninganEPSfileinPhotoshopisfundamentallythesameasforopeningaPDFfile.TheonlybigdifferenceisPhotoshopasksyouwhatpageofyourPDFdocumentsyouwanttoopen,assumingyouhaveamulti-page

Page 19: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

document.

RasterizingyourEPSfile

WhileyoucanopenanEPSfileusingtheOpencommandontheFilemenu,Photoshoptreatsitdifferentlybeforeprocessingitasanimage.WhenyouopenanEPSfileinPhotoshop,Photoshopconvertsthevectorpathstopixels.BecauseEPSfilesdon'tsaveanyspecificresolutionorsizedata,youmusttellPhotoshophowtoopenthisfilebyinputtingyourdesiredsettings.Wecallthisprocessrasterization,atermthatthePhotoshopworldoftenuses.

Note

OnlyEPSfilesnotcreatedinPhotoshopneedtoberasterized.IftheywerecreatedusingPhotoshop,thefilewouldsimplyopen,asPhotoshopembedsallnecessaryimagedatawhenthefileissaved.

TorasterizeanEPSfile,firstlaunchPhotoshopandselectOpenfromtheFilemenu.LocateyourEPSfile(withthe.epsfileextension),clickonthefilename,andthenclickOpen.TheRasterizeGenericEPSFormatdialogboxdisplays,asshowninFigureB.ThisdialogboxallowsyoutoenterthedataPhotoshopneedstorasterizethefile.Youcansetthewidth,height,andresolutionofyourfileusingthetextboxesanddropdownlists.

FigureB.

Page 20: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Resolutionconsiderations

Beforewecontinue,let'shaveaquickwordonresolution.Youdon'tsaveEPSfilesatanyspecificresolution.Thismeansthatyoucanrasterizethevectorelementsinyourfileatanyresolutionwithoutanylossinquality.However,ifyourfilecontainsanyrasterelements(images),youcanonlyrasterizethefileinPhotoshopatthemaximumresolutionoftheimages.Anythingbeyondthatmaximumresolutionresultsinpixelation,whichmeansyou'vestretchedyourimagedatatoofar.

Note

Ifyou'reunsureofwhatthemaximumresolutionofyourplacedimagesis,theeasiestwaytofindoutistoopentheminPhotoshop.Onceopened,selectImageImageSizeandnotethenumberintheResolutiontextbox.That'syourmaximumresolutionforthatimage.Makesureyoucheckalloftheimagescontainedinyourdocument,usingthelowestresolutionasyourrasterizingtargetpoint.

WhenchoosingtheresolutionforyourEPSfile,firstconsidertheexistingresolutionoftherasterimagesinyourfile,andthendecidethetargetresolutionofyourfile.Forexample,ifyou'reprintingwithaninkjetprinter,300or600dpidoesfine.Ifyou'repreppinganimagefortheweb,72dpiisthestandard.Don'taddunnecessaryfilesizethatcanbogdownyourcomputer.Rememberthatyoucanalwaysstartoverifyouaren'tsatisfiedwithyourresults.

MoreEPSoptions

Page 21: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TherearemoreoptionsintheRasterizeGenericEPSFormatdialogboxthatdeservenote.Thefirstisthechancetodesignatethecolorspaceofyourfile.ThisisanimportantchoicebecausePhotoshoprenderscolordifferentlydependingonitscolorspace.ThemaincolorspacesareRGB(Red,Green,Blue),CMYK(Cyan,Magenta,Yellow,Black),Grayscale,andLab(Luminosity,Alpha,Beta).For99percentofyourEPSfiles,you'lluseRGBandCMYK.TheruleofthumbisRGBforonlineuseandCMYKforprint.

Photoshop,tosomeextent,canalsocontroltheamountofpixelationinyourimageswhenrasterizing.IfyouselecttheAnti-aliasedcheckboxintheRasterizeGenericEPSFormatdialogbox,Photoshopsmoothestheroughedgesbetweenpixelstomakethemblendtogether.Thisalmostalwaysresultsinbetterlookingimages,somakesurethischeckboxisselected.

Whenyou'vefinishedmakingyourchoices,clickOKtorasterizeyourfile.PhotoshopusestheinformationyouenteredtoprocesstheEPSinformationanddisplaythefileonscreen.OnceyouopenitinPhotoshop,youcansaveitinanyfileformatyoudesire.

Importwrap-up

Photoshopcanopenalmostanyimagefileformat.Youcanusuallyimportthosethatitcan'topenusingseveraldifferentmethods.Whetheryou'rebringinginafilefromyourharddriveorimportingimagesfromacameraorscanner,understandinghowtoimportimagesintoPhotoshopgivesyoumanyoptionsforusingtheapplicationtoitsfullest.

Page 22: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

KeepimagesorganizedandeasytofindwiththeFileBrowser

Keepingtrackofyourimagesisbynomeansaneasytask.Whenworkingonanimage-editingproject,it'seasytoplaceimagesinnumerousfolderswithoutusingpropernamingconventions,folderstructures,oranyotherorganizationaltactics.However,withalittlehelpfromthenewandimprovedFileBrowserinPhotoshopCS,youcanfindimageswithease,batchprocessthemdirectlytoCDs,renametheminseconds,anddraganddropimageswithinthedisplaypane,andallthewhiletheFileBrowsercanstayopenandreadyevenasyouworktohelpyouorganizeandfindimagesquicklyandeasily.OnceyoustartusingtheFileBrowser,you'llprobablyfindyourselfwonderinghowyouevermanagedwithoutit.

Lookingatthewindow

Toaccessthebrowser,press[Ctrl][Shift]O( [shift]OontheMac)orchooseFileBrowse.WhenyoufirstopentheFileBrowser,you'representedwithafree-floatingwindow.IntheFolderstabontheleftsideoftheFileBrowser,selectafolderordrivetocontaintheimagesdisplayedintheFileBrowser'sThumbnailspaneontheright,asshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 23: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheFileBrowserhasamultitudeoffeaturesandfunctions.ListedbelowarebriefsummariesofthedifferentcomponentswithintheFileBrowser:

DesktopView.TheDesktopViewlistsallthefoldersandsubfoldersonyourcomputer,makingiteasytofindspecificfiles.Onceyouclickonafolder,Photoshopupdatesthethumbnailstodisplaythecontentswithintheselectedfolder.

Thumbnails.TheThumbnailspanedisplaysyourimageswithinaselectedfolder,disk,orCD.Hereyoucanselect,open,rename,move,andcopyfiles.

Preview.ThePreviewpanedisplaysalargerversionoftheimageselectedintheThumbnailspane.YoucanmakethepreviewlargerorsmallerbydraggingtherightsideandbottomedgeofthePreviewpaneitself.

Keywords.TheKeywordspaneisaniceadditiontotheFileBrowser.Hereyoucanassigndescriptivewordstoyourimagestomakesearcheseasy.ClickontheKeywordspalette'spop-upmenutocreatenewkeywordsandnewsetsofwords.

Metadata.ThenewandimprovedMetadatapaneallowsyoutoviewandeditnon-pixelinformationoryouguesseditmetadata.TheMetadatapaneis

Page 24: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

dividedintosections,themostcommonlyusedbeingFileProperties,IPTC,andCameraData(Exif).DigitalcamerastypicallyuseEXIFtostoreinformationaboutaspecificimage,suchaswhenitwastaken,theflashsetting,andthefocallength.

Ifyoureallywanttoknowthenitty-grittyaboutanimage,justclickontheMetadatapane'spop-upmenuintheupper-rightcorner.Then,chooseMetadataDisplayOptionsfromtheresultingdropdownlist.Thisopensadialogboxcontainingdozensoffieldsforinformation,asshowninFigureB.JustclickontheitemsthatyouwantdisplayedintheFileBrowserandclickOK.

FigureB.

Automatingtasks

Page 25: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

InPhotoshopCS,theFileBrowserhasitsownmenubar.ThisisconvenientbecauseyoucanautomatetasksrightfromtheFileBrowser.Forexample,opentheFileBrowser(ifitisn'talready)andchooseAutomatefromthemenubartodisplaythelistoffeatures,asshowninFigureConthenextpage.Youcanmakewebphotogalleriesandcontactsheets,renamemultiplefiles,andmore.

FigureC.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

"Caching"up

OneofthebenefitsoftheFileBrowseristhatyoucanrotateimagepreviews,renamefiles,andrankthem.However,ifyou'resharingtheseimagesonanetwork,allofyourchangesareinvisibletoeveryoneelse.Thisisbecausethere'sacachefileforeachfolderthatcontainsimages,andthisfolderislocatedinasystemfolderonyourcomputer.

Topreserveallofyourhardworkandallowotherstoseewhatyou'vedone,youhavetoexportthecache.Althoughthismaysoundcomplicated,Photoshopmakes

Page 26: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

theprocesseasy.ChooseFile ExportCachefromtheFileBrowser'smenu.Upondoingso,Photoshopexportsthreecachefilestothefolderitselfcontainingthepreviews,thumbnails,andmetadata.

Note

WhenburningimagearchivestoCD,youshouldexportthecacheaswell.Ifyoudon't,you'llloseanymodificationyoumadeintheFileBrowser.

Seeingisbelieving

TheFileBrowserisatimesaving,helpfulfeaturethatwillmakeyourworkflowmoreorganizedandefficient.Don'twastetimechoosingFile Open;instead,usetheFileBrowserandpreviewyourimageswiththeeaseandconvenienceofasophisticatedimage-managementsystem.Nowthatyouknowhowtoorganizeyourimages,let'stakethenextsteptowardbecominganimage-editingmaster.

Page 27: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Beconsistentwithcolorcorrectingdigitalimages

Haveyouevertriedtocolorcorrectanimageandfoundittobeafrustratingexperience?Didyouspendhourstweakingthegreensinyourimageonlytodarkentheoverallimageandlosethatverdantcolor?Howmanytimeshaveyoudecidedtostartoverhalfwaythroughthecolor-correctionprocessbecauseyoucan'tgettheshadowsjustright?Ifthesearetheveryreasonsyouboughtthisbook,thendon'tworrywe'regoingtodemystifytheimage-editingprocess.

Wheneditingyourdigitalimages,aconsistentworkflowcanmakecolorcorrectioneasierandmorepredictable.Eachadjustmentyoumaketoanimagehasramificationslaterdowntheeditingtrail,sofollowingareliableeditingprocesscanmakeahugedifferenceinthefinalqualityofyourimageandmakecolorcorrectionlessofachore.

Perfectbalance

Thinkofitasachecklist;asyoucompleteonetypeofadjustment,simplymoveondownthelistuntilyoumakeallofyourchanges.Sinceimageadjustmentisasubjectiveendeavor,wewon'tgivespecificvaluesandsettingsformodifyingyourimage,butinsteadwe'llprovideyouwithaframeworkformakingyourimageslooktheirbest.We'llbreakitintofourstagesevaluation,tonalrange,colorbalance,andfinaltouches.Byunderstandinghowthesestagesplayoffoneanother,youcansimplifythecolor-correctionprocessandgetbetterresults.

TheZenofimageediting

Theimportantthingtorememberisthateveryoneseesthingsdifferently.Everydigitalcameratakesaslightlydifferentpicture.Everymonitorshowstheimagealittlebitdifferently.Thesedisparitiescoulddriveadigitalphotographercrazy,butrememberthatimageeditingislargelyasubjectiveendeavor.Whatwe'regoingtopresentisalooseworkflowformakingthecolor-correctionprocesseasier,notastrictformulathathastobefollowedtotheletter.Onceyouunderstandthebasics,youcantailortheprocesstomatchyourowneditingstyleandletyoureyesleadyou.

Step1:Evaluateyourimage

Thefirststepistotakeagoodlookatyourimageandevaluateitsquality.Doesit

Page 28: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

haveagoodcolorbalance?Howisthecontrastbetweenthehighlightsandtheshadows?Dothecolorslookflatoraretheyoversaturated?Giveyourimagetheonce-overandgetagoodideaofwhatattributesyouneedtoadjust.

Takealook

Forexample,examinetheimageinFigureA.Onelooktellsyouthatthisimageisabittoodark,butithasgoodoverallcolorbalanceandedgesharpness.There'splentyofdetail,butthecolorscouldbeslightlymoresaturatedandyoucoulddarkentheshadowstoincreasethecontrastintheimage.Howdidwedecidethat?Unfortunately,there'snomagicformula.Wejusttakeagoodlookattheimageanddecidewhatwewanttochange.Youmaythinkitlooksfineormayfindotherattributesyouwanttochange.

FigureA.

Observethetonalrange

Ifyouwantaslightlymoreobjectiveopinion,it'sagoodideatocheckoutyourimage'shistogrambeforemakinganyadjustments,whichyoucanviewbyselectingImage Adjustments Levels.Ahistogramisavisualrepresentationofthetonalrangeofanimage.Thedynamicrangemeasuresthequalityoftheexposureasagraphofbrightness,representedfromwhitetoblackandeverythinginbetween.Agoodhistogramshouldlooklikeacontinuousseriesofmountainpeakswithoutmanyflatspaces.Thismeansthatthere'sagoodrangeofvaluesintheimage,whichtranslatesintoagoodrangeofdetailandimage

Page 29: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

information.Thegreatertherange,themoreflexibilityyou'llhavewhenadjustingtheimage.

FigureBshowsthehistogramforoursampleimage.Fromthegraph,wecantellthattheimagehasagoodtonalrange,butcouldusesomeadjustmentstothehighlights(thusourcontrastproblem).

FigureB.

So,whatifyourimagehasanunsightlyhistogram?PerhapsitlooksasflatastheGreatPlainsorleansheavilytothehighlightortheshadowsideofthegraph.Thisdoesn'tmeanthatyoucan'tworkwiththisimage,butitmightbehardertodo.Bycheckingthehistogram,youcanbereadyforanychallengesbeforeyoubegintheprocess.

Step2:Adjustthetonalrange

Asmentionedearlier,thetonalrangerepresentsthehighlight,midtones,andshadowdetailsinyourimage.It'simportanttoadjusttonalrangefirstasyou'llbechangingthebrightnessofthepixelsaswellasthedifferencebetweenareasoflightanddark.Bymakingtonaladjustmentsfirst,youeliminatetheriskofskewingyourcolorbalancelaterbymakingtheimagebrighterorincreasing/decreasingthecontrast.

Areyouonthelevel?

Page 30: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

YoucanmakethemostaccuratetonalrangeadjustmentsintheLevelsdialogboxbecauseitallowsyoutoadjusteitherthecompositeRGBchanneloranyofthechannelsindividually.Therearealsoavarietyoftoolsforediting,suchastheslidersandtheEyedroppertoolsthatcanmakeprecisecorrections.ButthebigbenefitoftheLevelsdialogboxistheabilitytousethehistogramasavisualguideasyouedit.

Brightnessandcontrast

YoucanalsousetheBrightness/Contrastdialogbox(Image AdjustmentsBrightness/Contrast)tomaketonalchangestoyourimage.Thisdialogboxonlyallowsyoutomakethesameadjustmenttoeverypixelintheimage,notonindividualchannelsliketheLevelsdialogbox.Brightness/Contrastalsohaslesssophisticatedcontrols,whichcanleadtoalossofdetailinyourimageifyouaren'tcareful.Thatbeingsaid,weuseitoftenwithgreatresults,asshowninFigureC.Ifyourgoalishigh-endprinting,stickwithLevels,butotherwiseyoucanmakedecenttonaladjustmentsusingBrightness/Contrast.

FigureC.

Step3:Adjustthecolorbalance

Nowthatwe'veadjustedourtonalrange,wecanmakechangestoourcolorbalance.Therearemanycolor-correctiontoolsavailableinPhotoshop'sAdjustmentsmenusuchasHue/Saturation,SelectiveColor,ColorBalance,and

Page 31: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ReplaceColorthatyoucanuse.There'snorecommendedorderofapplyingsuchcolorcorrections,excepttotrytomakeyourmostdramaticchangesbeforeyourfineradjustments.Forexample,you'llwanttoboostthesaturationintheimagebeforeyouusetheColorBalancecommandbecausethefirstadjustmentwillmakealargerimpactintheimage.FigureDshowsourimageafterweappliedageneroussaturationadjustment,whichbroughtoutthegreenintheleavesandthepinkinthegirl'sshirt.

FigureD.

Step4:Finaltouches

Atthispoint,you'vecorrectedthetonalrangeandbalancedyourcolortomakeagood-lookingimage.NowisthetimetoaddanyspecialeffectstoyourimagesuchasInvert,Posterize,oranyofPhotoshop'smanyfilters.Sinceyouhaveaqualityimagetoworkwith,you'llgetmuchbetterresultsfromanyspecialeffects.Ifyoustartwithanimagethatneedstonalandcolorcorrections,youwon'tgetnearlytheimpact,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Withadjustment

Page 32: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Withoutadjustment

Alwayssharpenlast

Alwayssharpenyourimagelast.Sharpeningearlyinthecolor-correctingprocesscanalterthepixelstoomuchandmakeithardertofine-tunetheimage.Bywaitinguntiltheend,youcanusesharpeningtoputthefinaltouchesonyourimagesjustbeforeitgoestoprintortheweb.

Anoteonadjustmentlayers

WhenmakingimageadjustmentsinPhotoshop,it'sagoodideatouseadjustmentlayers.Usingthemenucommandswillcertainlygetthejobdone,butonceyouclickOKandtheadjustmentisapplied,itisn'teasilyremoved.Byusingindependentadjustmentslayers,youcanturneachadjustmentonandoff,removeadjustments,orchangetheintensityoftheeffectusingtheOpacitysliderintheLayerspalette.Asaruleofthumb,applyadjustmentlayersinthesameorderasthecolor-correctionworkflow:tonaladjustmentsfirst,followedbycolorbalanceandspecialeffects.AsshowninFigureF,theadjustmentslayersareappliedfromthebottomgoingup.Youcanreorderthem,butbeawarethatit

Page 33: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

couldhavedramaticeffectsonyourimage.

FigureF.

Keepitconsistent

Fromcalibratingyourimages,openingtheminPhotoshop,managingyourgrowingarchiveofimages,andmakingthemlookgreat,theprocessofimageeditingcanbeintimidating.Byfollowingaconsistentworkflowwheneditingyourimages,you'llworkmoreefficientlyandproducebetter,moredependableresults.Youdon'thavetofollowourprocedurecompletely,butalwayskeepinmindthatyou'llbemoresuccessfulifyousetyourselfupforsuccess.

Page 34: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 35: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Part1:ColorandTonalCorrections1

Perhapsthemostimportantimageadjustmentyoucanmakeistothecolorsinyourimage.Whilemostviewerscanforgiveanimagethat'sslightlyoutoffocusornotassharpasitcouldbe,colorsthatdon'tmatchuptoourexpectationsstickoutlikeasorethumb.Thankfully,Photoshophasacomprehensivesetofcolorcorrectingtoolsthatarereadytotackleeventhemostoff-colorimage.Inthispart,we'lltakeadetailedlookateachtoolandexplainhowyoucanuseittogettheperfectcolorbalance.

Chapter1:ColorCorrection

ImprovethecolorinyourimageswithCurves

Adjusthueandsaturationtoselectivelycolorizeanimage

Page 36: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CorrectcolorwiththeVariationscommand

KeepcolorsconsistentwiththeMatchColorcommand

CorrectcolorwiththeColorReplacementtool

ChangecolorwithReplaceColor

Problem:SolutionUsetheLevelscommandtocorrectcolorcasts

Problem:SolutionMellowoversaturatedcolors

Chapter2:TonalCorrection

Determinetonalqualitybyreadingahistogram

UseAutoContrasttoautomaticallycorrectanimage

Addmissingdetailtoyourimages

ImprovetonalrangewiththeShadow/Highlightcommand

Correctexposureproblemswithdodgingandburning

Problem:SolutionRestoreunderexposedshadowdetail

Problem:SolutionRestoreoverexposedphotos

Page 37: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 38: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter1.ColorCorrection

Page 39: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ImprovethecolorinyourimageswithCurves

Nomatterhowgoodyourdigitalcameraorscanneris,youcanimproveorenhancenearlyeveryimagebyadjustingitscolorbalance.WhilePhotoshopisknownforreality-bendingeditingtools,colorcorrectionisprobablythemostcommonday-to-daytaskforwhichit'sused.TheimportanceofcolorbalanceisclearlyshownbythenumberoftoolsPhotoshophasformanipulatingit.Whilemanyoftheseseemtobedifferentmethodsforaccomplishingthesamegoal,theCurvescommandstandsoutasthemostversatile.

WhyuseCurvesinsteadofLevels?

Photoshophasavarietyofcolor-correctiontools,buttheLevelsandCurvescommandsaremostprecise.Youcanachievegoodresultswitheithertool,buttheyperformthesametaskindifferentways.

TheLevelsdialogboxdisplaysagraphic,knownasahistogram,ofthepixelsinanimageorcolorchannel.Threeslidersbelowthehistogramallowyoutoadjustthehighlights,midtones,andshadows.Thisintuitivedialogboxiseasytolearn,butitsdesignlimitsyoutojustthreecontrolpoints.

TheCurvesdialogboxisabitmorecomplex,butit'salsomuchmoreprecise.Byplottingpointsonalinegraphrepresentingpixelbrightnessorinkdensity,youcanmodifyupto16variablespercolorchannel.You'llprobablyneverneedthatmuchpower,buthavingitunderthehoodgivestheCurvescommandmorecontroloverthetonalrangeofanimagethanothercolor-correctiontoolsinPhotoshop.

AccesstheCurvesdialogbox

ToopentheCurvesdialogbox,dooneofthefollowing:

OpenanimagefileandthenselectImage Adjustments Curvesfromthemainmenu.

Usethekeyboardshortcut[Ctrl]M( MontheMac).

TheCurvesdialogboxappears,asshowninFigureA.

Page 40: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureA.

Readingacurve

TheCurvesdialogboxgraphsthevaluesofthepixelsinyourimagefile.Thepointsalongthelinerepresentthefulltonalrangeoftheselectedcolorchannelsfromdarktolight.InRGBmode,thegraphrepresentsbrightnessvaluesfrom0to255.InCMYK,itshowsinkdensityvaluesfrom0%to100%.

Theoriginalintensityvalues,knownastheInputlevels,aregraphedalongthehorizontalaxis.Outputlevelstheintensityvaluesthatareappliedwhenyou'redonearegraphedalongtheverticalaxis.WhenyouopentheCurvesdialogbox,theInputandOutputlevelsareidentical,sothedefaultgraphisadiagonalline.Asyoumodifythelevelsbyaddingandmovingcontrolpoints,theshapeofthelinechangestocorrespondtothenewvalues.

Thegradientbarstotheleftofandbelowthegraphindicatethelocationofthehighlightsandshadowsinthegraph.TheexamplesshowninFigureAuseadisplaywiththeshadowtonesinthelower-leftcornerandthehighlightsintheupper-rightcorner.Ifyouprefer,youcanflipthedisplaybyclickingonthedoublearrowiconinthelowergradientbar,asshowninFigureBonthenextpage.InFigureB1,thehighlightsoftheimagearegraphedinthelower-left,whileinFigureB2theyappearintheupper-right.Ourexamplesusetheoptionshownin

Page 41: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureB2.

FigureB1.

FigureB2.

Page 42: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

InputandOutputvaluesarevalidonlyforyourcurrentsessionintheCurvesdialogbox.NochangesareappliedtoyourimagefileuntilyouclickOK.Butonceyoudoso,thedialogboxclosesandendsyoursession.IfyoureturntotheCurvesdialogboxlater,you'llseethedefaultdiagonallineagain.TheUndocommandandtheHistorypalettetreateachsessionintheCurvesdialogboxasasinglecommand.Inotherwords,whileyoucanundoanygivenvisittotheCurvesdialogbox,youcan'tgobackinandtweakapointortwoafteryou'veappliedthechanges.

Surfingchannels

Beforeyoustartmakingchanges,it'simportanttounderstandhowtheCurvesdialogboxinteractswiththechannelsinyourimage.There'saseparatecurveforeachselectedchannelinyourdocument,plusacompositecurvethataffectseverychannelofthecurrentcolormode.

Forexample,ifyou'reworkingwithanRGBdocument,there'sacompositeRGBcurve(visiblebydefault),plusindividualcurvesforred,green,andblue.Changestothecompositecurveaffectthevaluesofallcolorchannelslisted.Thesechangesdon'tappearontheindividualcurves,whichyoucanstilleditindependently.

Note

TheCurvesdialogboxonlydisplayschannelsthatarecurrentlyselectedinthe

Page 43: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Channelspalette.Bydefault,thisincludesallcolorchannelsintheselectedmode(suchasRGBorCMYK),butnotalphachannels.Ifindividualchannelsareselected(by[Shift]-clickingintheChannelspalette),onlythosechannelsappearintheCurvesdialogbox.Forexample,ifyouselecttheCyanandYellowchannelsinaCMYKimage,thecompositechannelintheCurvesdialogboxwillbeCY;curve1willbecyanandcurve2willbeyellow.YoucanalsoeditalphachannelsintheCurvesdialogbox,butonlyifyouselectthemintheChannelspalettefirst.ThechangesyoumaketoRGBorCMYKcompositecurvesdon'taffectalphachannels

TheChanneldropdownlistabovethegraphindicateswhichcurveiscurrentlydisplayed.Youcanalsoswitchbetweencurvesusingkeyboardshortcuts:

[Ctrl][~]( [~]ontheMac)displaysthecomposite.

[Ctrl]andanumbervalue( andanumbervalueontheMac)displaysindividualchannelsinorder.(IntheRGBexample,[Ctrl]1( 1ontheMac)displaystheredcurve,[Ctrl]2( 2ontheMac)displaysthegreen,andsoon.)

Ifyouaren'tsurewhichnumbercorrespondstowhichchannel,clickontheChanneldropdownlisttodisplayacompletelistofthecurrentlyselectedchannels,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Nowthatyouhaveabasicunderstandingofthedisplay,let'sgettowork!

Page 44: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Colorcorrectingwithcurves

Thesimplestwaytomodifyacurveistoclickanddraginthegraph.Thisautomaticallycreatesanewcontrolpointontheline,whichsnapstotheareayou'veclickedon(ifthereisn'tonetherealready).BesuretoselectthePreviewcheckboxinthelower-rightcornerofthedialogboxsoyoucanseetheresultsofyouradjustmentonthefly.

Ingeneral,movingacontrolpointuportotheleftmakespixelsoftheselectedcolorrangelighter,whilemovingthepointdownortotherightdarkensthevalues.Reversethesedirectionsifyouprefertodisplaythehighlightsinthelower-leftcorner,asinFigureB1.Youcanmovetheendpoints,butyoucan'tdeletethem.

Theintensityvaluesbetweencontrolpointsareautomaticallyadjustedtoensureasmoothtransition,whichisrepresentedonthegraphbyacurveintheline.Controlpointsonlyaffecttheareabetweenthetwoadjacentpoints.Addingadditionalpointstothelinelimitstheeffectofanyonepoint,asdemonstratedinFigureDonthenextpage

FigureD.

Original

Page 45: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Singlecontrolpointadjustment

Page 46: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Multiplepointadjustment

Selectedpointsinthecurveappearinblack.Toworkwithpoints,youcan:

Usethearrowkeystomovethem.

EnteraspecificInputorOutputlevelforaselectedpointbytypingthedesiredvalueintheappropriatetextboxbelowthegraph.

Removeacontrolpointbydraggingitoutsidethegridorselectingitandpressingthe[Delete]key.

Selectmultiplepointsatonceby[Shift]-clickingonthem.

Deselectallpointsonthegraphbyclickinganywhereinthegridareaorpressing[Ctrl]D( DontheMac).

Scrollforwardthroughcontrolpointsbypressing[Ctrl][Tab]( [tab]onthe

Page 47: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Mac)orbackwardbypressing[Ctrl][Shift][Tab]( [shift][tab]ontheMac).

Controllingyourpoints?

Knowingexactlywheretoplacecontrolpointsgetseasierwithexperience,butPhotoshopcangiveyouhints.Toplaceacontrolpoint:

Clickyourmousepointerontheareaofyourimagethatyouwanttomodifyandholditdown.Asmallcircleappearsonthecurveyou'recurrentlyviewing(thisonlyworksinindividualchannelsnotcompositecurves).

[Ctrl]-click( -clickontheMac)onanareaoftheimagetocreateacontrolpointatthatpointonthecurrentcurve.

[Ctrl][Shift]-click( [shift]-clickontheMac)onanareaoftheimagetocreateapointatthatvalueoneverycurve.

Onceyouhaveapointintheareayouneedtoadjust,it'sjustamatteroftweakingitspositionuntiltheimagelooksthewayyouwantit.

Learningtheshortcuts

Bouncingaroundbetweencolorchannelsandtweakingcurvesmanuallycantakealotoftime.Fortunately,theCurvesdialogboxhasseveraltoolsthatcanhelpyoucorrectyourimagefaster:theAutobuttonandEyedroppertools.

Thesetoolsadjusttheendpointsofthecurveandeliminateothercontrolpoints.Therefore,it'sbesttousethemfirstandthenfine-tunetheresults.

TheAutobutton

ClickingtheAutobuttonsetsthelightestvalueineachcolorchanneltowhiteandthedarkestvaluestoblackthesameadjustmentyou'dgetusingtheAutoLevelscommand(Image Adjustments AutoLevels).TheAutobuttonusuallydoesn'tproducestellarresults,butitcanbeausefulstartingpoint,especiallyifyou'refairlynewtotheCurvesdialogbox.

TheOptionsbuttonopenstheAutoColorCorrectionOptionsdialogbox,whichallowsyoutomodifythewaytheAutobuttonbehavesintheLevelsandCurvesdialogboxes.Don'tgopokingaroundinhereunlessyou'refamiliarwiththe

Page 48: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

algorithmsPhotoshopusesforcolorcorrection.

Eyedroppertools

DirectlybelowthebuttonsontherightsideoftheCurvesdialogboxarethreeEyedroppertools.ClickinganyofthesesetstheselectedareaoftheimagetothetonalvalueoftheEyedroppertoolyouused.Fromlefttoright,they'rekeyedtotheblackpoint,graypoint(50%inkdensity),andwhitepoint.

TheusefulnessoftheEyedroppertoolsvariesdependingonhowclearlydefinedthewhiteandblackpointsareintheimage.Ifthesetonalextremesdon'tappearinyourimage,theEyedroppertoolswon'thelpmuch.Somephotographersplaceagradientbaroutsidethecroptoensurethatsolidwhiteandblackpointswillbeavailableforthesetools.Evenwhenthesetonalextremesarepresentinanimage,you'llprobablyfindthewhitepointeyedroppermostuseful.

FigureEshowsagoodcandidatefortheEyedroppertool'sassistance.ClickingwiththewhitepointeyedroppercreatestheresultshowninFigureF.Thecolor-correctionjobisn'tquitefinished,butit'sofftoagoodstartwithverylittleeffort.Whenusingthewhitepointeyedropper,becarefulnotto"blowaway"detailsintheimagethatyouwanttokeep.

FigureE.

Page 49: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureF.

SpecialconsiderationsforCMYK

TheAutobuttonandEyedroppertoolsnormallyaffectallcolorchannels,regardlessofwhichcurveisdisplayed.InCMYKmode,however,youmustdealwiththeblackchannelindependently.Changesmadewhenviewinganyothercurve(includingthecomposite)affectallcolorchannelsexceptblack.Likewise,changesmadewhendisplayingtheblackcurvedon'taffectanyoftheothers.

Scribblingacurve

JustbelowthegraphontherightsideoftheCurvesdialogboxisthePenciltool.Thistoolgivesyouaquickanddirtywaytodrawthecurveexactlyasyou

wantit.Youcanevendrawcurvesthatdon'tconnectinsomepoints,whichisusefulifyouneedtomakeanextremecorrectiontoaspecifictonalrangewithoutaffectingtherestofthecurve.

WhenworkingwiththePenciltool,youcan:

SmoothoutaroughcurvebyclickingtheSmoothbutton(activeonlywhenusingthePenciltool).

Createperfectlystraightlinesbyholdingdownthe[Shift]keyasyoudraworclickonendpoints.

Page 50: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Returntoregularcurvemodebyclickingontheregularcurvemodeicon .

Loadingandsavingcurves

Whenbatch-processingscansorphotosshotundersimilarconditions,youcansavealotoftimebysavingyourcurvesbeforeyouclickOK.Tousethismethod:

1.ClicktheSavebuttonandgivethecurveanameonceyouhavethefirstimagethewayyoulikeit.

2. OpentheCurvesdialogboxwhenthenextscancomesaround.

3.

ClicktheLoadbutton,andfindthecurvesfileyoucreated.Youmayhavetotweaktheresultsalittle,butyou'llhaveasignificantheadstart.Savedcurvesarealsousefulforoffsettingcolorcastscreatedbyindividualscanners,cameras,andlensesorforapplyingcurve-basedeffectsthatyouuseregularly.

Note

Forinformationonhowtoremoveacolorcastfromanimage,seetheProblem:Solution"UsetheLevelscommandtocorrectcolorcasts"attheendofthischapter.

Otherhiddenfeaturesandtricks

Soonerorlateryou'llrunacrossanimagethatgivesyoufits,andyou'lljustwanttostartover.YoucouldclicktheCancelbuttonandreopentheCurvesdialogbox,butthere'safasterway.Holddownthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac),andtheCancelbuttonbecomesaResetbutton.Clickitandallisforgiventhedialogboxreturnstoitsoriginalstate,displayingthecompositecurveasifyou'vejustarrived.Justwanttotakebackthelastaction?Press[Ctrl]Z(cZontheMac)toundoit.

Wantamoreprecisegrid?Then,[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac)onthegraphtogetthetightergridshowninFigureG.Repeatthisprocesstorestoretheoriginalgrid.

Page 51: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureG.

NeedmoreelbowroomintheCurvesdialogbox?ClicktheEnlargePreviewWindowbutton inthelower-rightcornertoincreasethesizeofthegrid.

Throwthemacurve

MasteringtheCurvesdialogboxtakesalittlepractice,especiallyifyouregularlyworkinmorethanonecolormode.It'sbesttocurve,startwithimagesthathaveclearlydefinedwhiteandblackpoints,whichwillallowyoutousetheEyedroppertoolstotheirfulladvantage.Asyoubecomemorecomfortablewiththecontrols,moveontoimageswithfewerextremesinthehighlightandshadowregions.Onceyouovercomethelearningyou'llbeamasterofoneofthemostpowerfultoolsinPhotoshop.

Page 52: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Adjusthueandsaturationtoselectivelycolorizeanimage

WhiletheHue/Saturationcommand'smainpurposeistohelpyouwithcolorcorrection,italsoallowsyoutocombinegrayscaleimagerywithcolorimageryinPhotoshop.Thistechniqueisgreatforcreatingdramaticimageswithdominantfocalpoints,similartothatshowninFigureA,wherewedesaturatedacolorimageeverywherebutintheoneareawewantedtoaccentwithcolor.We'llshowyouhowtocreatethiseffectquicklyandeasilyusingtheHue/Saturationcommand.

FigureA.

Page 53: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Selecttheareayouwanttocolorize

TherearesomanywaysyoucanmakeaselectioninPhotoshop,wecouldwriteanentirechapteronthesubject.Tonarrowdownyourchoices,considerthetypeofselectionyouneedtomake,asitoftendeterminesthemethodyoushoulduse.Inourimage,forexample,wewanttoselectthecowboy'smascada,orwildrag.It'sanoddshapethat'scoloreddissimilarlyfromtherestoftheimage;therefore,theMagicWandtoolisagoodchoice.

Chooseaselectiontoolandsetitup

1.ClickontheMagicWandtool intheToolboxorpressthekeyboardshortcutWtoselectit.

ClickontheNewSelectioniconinthetooloptionsbartomakesureit'sselectedandenteranumericalvaluebetween1and255intheTolerancetextbox.Ahighsettingallowsyoutoselectawiderrangeofcolor;alowsetting

Page 54: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2. narrowstheselection.Sometimes,youjusthavetoexperimentbyenteringavalueandclickingonthesubjectareawiththeMagicWandtool.Ifmoreoftheimageisselectedthanyouwant,lowerthetolerancevalue;ifnotenoughisselected,raiseit.Forourexample,wesetthetoleranceto75.

3.

Decidewhetheryouwantaselectionthat'santi-aliasedsoft-edgedratherthanjaggedandcontiguouscontainingonlypixelsthataretouching.Thesettingsdependontheimageareayouwanttoselect.Inourexample,weselectedbothoftheseoptions.

4.

SelecttheUseAllLayerscheckboxifmultiplelayersexistinyourimageandyouwanttoselectsimilarlycoloredpixelsonallvisiblelayers.Otherwise,leavethisoptiondeselected,soaselectionismadeonlyontheactivelayer.Ourimagehasonlyonelayer,sothisoptionisn'trelevant.ThefinalsettingsforourMagicWandtoolareshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Maketheselection

ClicktheMagicWandtoolontheareainyourimagethatyouwanttoselect,suchasthewildraginourimage.Thecoloredpixelsyouclickonaresampledandallthe(contiguous)pixelsofsimilarcolorareselected.AsyoucanseeinFigureConthenextpage,ourMagicWandwasn'tabletocompensateforallthevariationsofcolorcreatedinthehighlightsandshadowsofoursubjectarea.Weneedtoaddtoourselection.

FigureC.

Page 55: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

Note

Theaccuracyofyourselectionisveryimportant.Youmayfindithelpfultomagnifytheareayouwanttoselect.Todoso,selecttheZoomtool fromtheToolbox,andthenclickanddragthemousepointerovertheareayouwanttoseemoreclearly.

ClickontheAddToSelectionicon onthetooloptionsbar,andthenclickdirectlyontheremainingareasyouwanttoincludeinyourselectionthataresurroundedbyaselectionborder.WhentheAddToSelectionoptionisactive,aplussignisvisiblenexttotheMagicWandtool,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 56: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

3.

Subtractfromyourselection,ifneeded.ChoosetheSubtractFromSelectionicon inthetooloptionsbar,andthenclickontheareainyourimagethatyouwanttoremovefromtheselection.AminussigndisplaysnexttotheMagicWandtoolwhenthisoptionisactive.

Note

IftheMagicWandtoolselectsmoreoftheimagethanyouwant,press[Ctrl]Z( ZontheMac)toundotheaction.Then,loweritsTolerancesettingabitandtryagain.

Continuetoaddtoanddeletefromyourselectionuntilonlythesubjectareaisselected,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 57: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Savetheselection

Onceyouhaveaperfectselection,surelyyoudon'twanttorisklosingit!Fortunately,youcansaveitasachannel.

Tosaveyourselection:

1. ChooseSelect SaveSelection.

2.Namethechannelsomethingrelevant,suchaswildrag,intheresultingSaveSelectiondialogbox.

ClickOK.YourselectionissavedintheChannelspalette,asshowninFigureF.Actually,you'vecreatedamask!

FigureF.

Page 58: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

Inverttheselectionarea

Theonlyproblemisthatwewanttomaskthesubjectareatopreservethecolorwithinit.Therefore,weneedtoinverttheselection.Thisensuresthatonlytheareaoutsideofthemaskisaffectedwhenwelateradjustthecolorsaturationofourimage.

Toinvertyourselection:

ChooseSelect Inverseorpress[Ctrl][Shift]I( [shift]IontheMac).Bydoingso,theselectioninverts,asindicatedbytheselectionborderalongtheoutsideedgesofyoursubjectareaandalongtheoutsideedgesofyourimage.

Reducecolorsaturation

Atlast,we'rereadytotakethefinalsteptocreatethefinishedeffect,showninFigureA.We'llcreateanewHue/Saturationadjustmentlayeronwhichtowork.Onthislayer,we'llreducethesaturationofourimagetoproduceagrayscaleeffect.Onlytheimageareaoutsideofthemaskisaffected,preservingthecolorofoursubjectareaand,thereby,accentuatingit.

What'sanadjustmentlayer?

Anadjustmentlayeractslikealayer,butit'sreallyacustomizedfilterorlensthroughwhichyoucanviewyourimage.Anadjustmentlayerautomaticallyaffectsalllayersbelowit.IntheLayerspalette(press[F7]todisplay),youcaneasilylocateanadjustmentlayerbyitscircleicon,asshowninFigureG.Youcan

Page 59: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

alsohide,move,duplicate,ordeleteanadjustmentlayerjustasyouwouldanyothertypeoflayer.

FigureG.

Sinceadjustmentlayerspreserveyourdialogboxsettings,it'seasytoeditandrefinetheeffectontheimage.Ifyouwanttocomparetwodifferentsettings,that'seasytodoaswell.Youcanevenapplymultipleadjustmentlayerstothesameimage.However,ifyouwantanyofthemtoaffecttheimagepermanently,you'llneedtoflattentheimage.Todoso,chooseFlattenImagefromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

Createanadjustmentlayer

1.

ChooseLayer NewAdjustmentLayer.Asyoucanseeintheresultingsubmenu,youcancreateanadjustmentlayerforallsortsofimageadjustmentcommands.

2. ChooseHue/Saturationforourexample.

3.Namethenewlayersomethingrelative,suchasgrayscale,intheresultingNewLayerdialogbox.

4.MakesuretheUsePreviousLayerToCreateClippingMaskisdeselected,theModedropdownlistissettoNormal,andtheOpacityvalueis100percent.

ClickOK.IntheresultingHue/Saturationdialogbox,therearethreesliders

Page 60: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.formakingbasicadjustmentsaffectingHue,Saturation,andLightness.Belowthataretwocoloredbars.Thetopcoloredbarrepresentsthecolorbeforeanyadjustmentsandtheonebelowitshowshowanyadjustmentsaffectallofthehuesatfullsaturation.

6. MakesureMasterischosenfromtheEditdropdownlistforourexample.

7.

MovetheSaturationsliderallthewaytotheleftuntiltheSaturationtextboxreads100,asshowninFigureH.Thisremovesthecolorfromyourimage,makingitgrayscale,asshowninFigureA.

FigureH.

Page 61: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

8.ClickOK.AsweshowedyouinFigureG,thenewadjustmentlayerisaddedtoyourLayerspalette.

Yeehaw!

We'veshownyouhowtousetheHue/Saturationcommandforsomethingotherthancolorcorrection.Fullcolorimagesaregreat,butsometimesasituationcallsforsomethingmoreunique,suchascombiningcolorimagerywithgrayscaleimagery.Ourcowboyisaperfectexampleofanimagethatbenefitsfromthistechnique.

Page 62: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CorrectcolorwiththeVariationscommand

It'snosurprisethatcolorcorrectingyourdigitalimagescanbedifficult.Tryingtodecidewhatneedstobeadjustedinyourimageisalmostasconfusingasfiguringoutwhichtoolyou'llneedtofixit.Thereareautomaticcolorfixesinmanydifferentimage-editingprograms,butthese"one-size-fits-all"adjustmentsoftendon'tmeetyourneeds.Photoshophasoneofthemostintuitiveandefficienttoolsformakingcolorcorrectionstoyourimages.TheVariationscommandisaquickwaytoadjustyourimagesaccordingtoyourowntastes,inavisualformatthatmakesiteasytomaketherightchoices.Byusingthisimage-editingtool,you'llbeabletoseewhatdoesn'tlookquiterightinyourimageandcorrectit,aswedidinFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 63: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Enjoytheview

BeforemakinganyadjustmentsusingtheVariationscommand,it'simportanttogetfamiliarwiththeVariationsdialogbox.Todoso:

1. LaunchPhotoshopandopenanimagethatyouwanttocolorcorrect.

2.

OpentheVariationsdialogbox,whichisshowninFigureB,byselectingImage Adjustments Variations.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Note

TheVariationscommandworksintheRGB,CMYK,andGrayscalecolormodesonly.

Page 64: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Thelayoftheland

TheVariationsdialogboxisbrokenupintofourmainsections.Thefirstsection,intheupper-leftcorner,givesyoutwopreviewwindows.Thefirstisyouroriginalimage,anditalwaysremainsthesame.Usethisimageforcomparisonwhenmakingyouradjustments.Thesecondpreviewwindow,titledCurrentPick,representsthecurrentstateofyourimage.Asyoumakechangestoyourimage,thispreviewisupdated.

Controlssection

ThenextsectionincludesallthecontrolsfortheVariationsdialogboxandislocatedintheupper-rightcorner.HereyoucanchoosetoadjusttheShadows(darkareas),Midtones(middletones),orHighlights(lightareas).YoucanalsoadjusttheSaturationinyourimage,whichistheintensityofyourcolors.Youcancontroltheintensityoftheadjustmentbymovingthesliderlocatedbelowtheseoptions,whichrangesfromFinetoCoarse.Eachtickmarkrepresentsadoublingoftheadjustmentamountandtheyaddupquickly.Settingthesliderforthesecondorthirdtickmarkfromtheleftworkswell,butyoucanexperimentandseewhichsettingworksbestforyou.

WhenyouselecttheShowClippingcheckbox,thepreviewimagesdisplaybrightneoncolorswhenimageinformationisclipped.Thismeanstheimageareahaseithergonecompletelywhiteorcompletelyblack,whichcanlookuglybothonscreenorwhenprinted.It'sagoodideatokeepthisoptionselected,andlookoutfortheclippingindicator,asillustratedinFigureC.

FigureC.

Page 65: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Therearesomeothercontrolsthatletyouacceptorcancelyouradjustments.Youcanalsosaveyouradjustmentsettingincaseyoufindtheperfectadjustment,andloaditinwhenworkingonotherimages.Itisn'tsomethingyou'lluseeveryday,butifyouhaveabatchofimageswiththesamecolorproblem,itcansaveyoualotoftime.

Colorbalancesection

Thethirdsectiontakesupthemostroombecauseit'swhereyou'lldothemostwork.Here,yourimageisshowninthecenterwithvariationssurroundingit.Undereachofthevariations,youcanseewhatadjustmentwasmadetoit,whetherit'sMoreRed,MoreGreen,orwhatever.Clickingononeofthesevariationsincreasesthelevelofthatadjustmentinalltheimages,butyoucanalwaysrefertoanyofthethreepreviewslabeledCurrentPicktoseewhereyouare.

Contrastsection

Thelastsectionislocatedontherightsideofthedialogboxandletsyouchangethecontrastlevelsintheimage.Youmightnotthinkthatcontrasthasmuchtodowithcolorbalance,buthowbrightordarkyourimageappearsaffectstheintensityandtonalrangeofthecolorsinyourimage.

MakingadjustmentsusingVariations

Whileyoucanmakeadjustmentsjustbyclickingarounduntilthingslookgoodto

Page 66: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

you,there'samorestructuredapproachthatcanhelpspeedupthings.Knowingwheretostartwhencolorcorrectinganimageishalfthebattle,sopayattention.Youshouldmakeyouradjustmentsstartingwithcolor,thenmovingontocontrast,andendingwithsaturation.

Todoso:

1.

SelecttheMidtonesoptionandsettheFine/Coarseadjustmenttothethirdtickfromtheleft.Thisgivesyouenoughrangebetweenadjustmentstoseethechange.Settingtheadjustmentamounttoosmallinitiallymakesithardtoseewhat'shappeninginyourimage.

2.

Makeyourcolorcorrectionsbyclickingonthevariationsinthecolorbalancesection.Eventhoughthey'realladditiveadjustments(MoreColor),youdon'thavetothinkofthemthatway.Ifyouenvisionthecolorwheelwealllearnedinelementaryschool,you'llrememberthateachcolorhasacomplementarycolor.Usethisinformationtomakeyourcoloradjustmentsinabackwardway.Forexample,yourimageistooyellow,buttherearenooptionsforremovingyellowfromtheimageinthisdialogbox.Instead,addmoreofthecomplementarycolortodecreasetheyellow.Inthiscase,addMoreBlue.

3.

MovetheFine/Coarseslidertothefinestsettingonceyou'vecomeprettyclosetoyourdesiredcolorbalance,andthenperfectyourcolors.Thenarrowerrangeofadjustmentmakesiteasiertofindtherightbalance.You'llmakemostofyourcoloradjustmentsinthemidtones,butyou'llfindsituationswhereyou'llneedtoadjustthehighlightsandshadowsaswell.Ifthisisthecase,followthesametechniqueandmakeyouradjustment.

Note

Ifyouevergotoofarwithanadjustmentandwanttostartover,simplyclickontheOriginalpreviewwindowandallimageswillrevertbacktothestartingpoint.

4.Adjustthebrightnessinyourimage.KeeptheFine/Coarseslideronthefinerside,ascontrastchangestendtobequitedramatic.

SelecttheSaturationoptiontoadjusttheintensityofthecolors.You'llnoticethattheonlyoptionsareMoreSaturationorLessSaturation,asshowninFigureDonthepreviouspage.Don'tgooverboardwithyoursaturationadjustment,astoomuchwillmakeyourimagelooksurrealandtoolittlewillmakeitlookdull.Stickwithminoradjustmentsandmakesureyourcolorsdon'tgetobnoxious.

Page 67: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. FigureD.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

6.ClickOKonceyoucompleteallofyourcorrectionstoapplythemandreturntothemainapplication.

You'llnowbeabletoseealargerversionofyourimageandzoomintospecificareastoevaluatecolor.ThisoptionwouldbeniceintheVariationsdialogbox,asitcanbedifficulttoevaluateattributessuchasshadowsonapreviewimagethat'sonlyafractionofthesizeoftheoriginal.However,theVariationcommanddoesagoodjoboverallandoffersquickcolorcorrectionswithoutthefuss.

Note

Forinformationonhowtoadjustsaturationinanimage,seetheProblem:Solution"Mellowoversaturatedcolors"attheendofthischapter.

Thebasicsofcolorcorrection

TheVariationscommandprovidesanintuitivemethodforcolorcorrectingyourimages.Youcanalsouseitasateachingtoolbydisplayinghowcolorchangesinteract.Bywatchingyouradjustmentsandfollowingapatternofediting,youcangetaquickeducationonthebasicsofcolortheory.Then,youcanbetterunderstandhowvariousadjustmentsaffectyourimages,makingiteasiertogetperfectcolor.

Page 68: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

KeepcolorsconsistentwiththeMatchColorcommand

Whetheryou'retoningseveralimagesforasinglelayoutorcolorcorrectingoneimage,PhotoshopCS'sMatchColorcommandcanmakethisprocessquickandpainless.Usingthiscommandyoucanmakebroadadjustmentstomultipleimagesbasedonasourceimage'scolormakeuporadjusttonalvalueswithinanimagebyadjustingitsluminanceandcolorintensity.Let'stakeacloserlook.

Colorcorrecting

YoucanusetheMatchColorcommandtoremovecolorcastsandtoadjusttonalvalueswithinanimage.Toseehowitworks:

1.

OpenanRGBimageinPhotoshopthat'sinneedofcolorcorrecting(thisfeatureisn'tavailablewhenworkinginCMYKmode).Forourexample,we'llcolorcorrecttheimageshowninFigureA.Asyoucansee,theimagehasaredcolorcasttoitthatneedstobeeliminated.

FigureA.

Page 69: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

ChooseImage Adjustments MatchColortodisplaytheMatchColordialogboxshowninFigureBonthepreviouspage.Whenmakingadjustmentsinasingleimage,we'llbeworkingintheImageOptionsareaofthisdialogbox.

FigureB.

Page 70: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

SelecttheNeutralizecheckboxtobeginremovinganyunwantedcolorcasts.Photoshopautomaticallybalancesouttheover-abundantcolorwithitscounterpart.FigureCshowshowourimagewentfromredtomoreofacyanhue.Ifyourimageisoverlyneutralized,youcantoneitdownabitusingtheFadeslider.Justdragtheslidertotherighttolowertheappliedcolor.

FigureC.

Page 71: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

ExperimentwiththeLuminanceandColorIntensitysliderstofine-tunethecolorswithinyourimage.TheLuminancesliderincreasesanddecreasesthebrightnessofyourimage,whiletheColorIntensitysliderincreasesanddecreasesthecolorrangeofyourimage.

ClickOKwhenyou'rehappywithyourresults.Ourcolor-correctedimageismuchmoreappealingthantheoriginal,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 72: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Colormatching

TheMatchColorcommandisn'tjustforcolorcorrecting;youcanalsouseittomakethetonalvaluesofmultipleimagesconsistent.Thisisgreatwhenyou'refine-tuningaseriesofproductshotsormultipleimagesforonelayout.Whenmatchingcolorsfromoneimagetoanother,youfirsthavetoopenasourceimagealongwiththeimageorimagesyouwanttoadjust.

Adjustanentireimage

1. OpentwoRGBimagestoworkwith.

2. Selecttheimageyouwanttoadjust,otherwiseknownasthetargetimage.

3. ChooseImage Adjustments MatchColor.

Selectyoursource(yoursecondimage)fromtheSourcedropdownlistintheresultingdialogbox,intheImageStatisticssection,asshowninFigureE.

Page 73: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureE.

ClickOK.AsyoucanseeinFigureFonthenextpage,Photoshopthenautomaticallyadjuststhecolorsofyourimagebasedontheimageyouchoseasthesource.

FigureF.

Page 74: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Dependingontheimagesyouselect,youmaynotbesatisfiedwiththefinalresults.Becausethecommandismakingsuchasweepingchange,someareasofyourimagemaybecomeoversaturated.Tohavemorecontrolovertheresults,

Page 75: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

youcanselectspecificareaswithinyourimagetochange.Let'stakealookathowtodoso.

Adjustselectedareaswithinanimage

Forcontrolledcolormanipulation,youcanselectareaswithinbothyoursourceimageandtheimageyouwanttomodify.Todoso:

1.

Usetheselectiontoolofyourchoicetomakeafeatheredselectionintheimagesyouwanttomatch.Forexample,wewanttomakethebackgroundcolorsofourimagesthesame.It'simportantthatyoufeatheryourselectioninthetargetimageforagradualcoloradjustment.Ifyouleavetheselectionwithhardedges,thechangewillbeveryapparentandwon'tblendinwiththeunchangedportions.YoucanfeatheraselectionbyfirstcreatingyourselectionandthenchoosingSelect Feather.EnteringhighervaluesintheFeatherRadiusproducesasofteredge.

2.

ChooseImage Adjustments MatchColor.ChoosetheSourceImagefromtheSourcedropdownlistintheresultingdialogbox.SelectboththeUseSelectionInSourceToCalculateColorsandUseSelectionInTargetToCalculateAdjustmentcheckboxesiftheyaren'talreadyselected.

3.

ClickOKtoapplythechange.AsyoucanseeinFigureG,thefinalresultsaremuchbetterthanwhenweadjustedthecolorsoftheentireimage.

FigureG.

Page 76: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Amatchmakeryoucan'tlivewithout

TheMatchColorcommandisdefinitelyanaddedbonusforPhotoshopusers.Youcanmakequickcoloradjustmentswithoutalotoffussandit'seasierthantryingtomakeanactionforcoloradjustmentswhenyouwantmultipleimagestolookconsistent.Withthatsaid,takesometimetogettoknowthisusefulcommand.

Page 77: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CorrectcolorwiththeColorReplacementtool

OneofthemostcommontasksPhotoshopusersareaskedtoperforminvolveschangingthecolorofaspecificobjectoriteminaphotographtoacompletelydifferentcolor.Forsomereason,it'sassumedthatthisprocessisquickandeasy.Inreality,though,thedifficultylevelcanrangefromeasytocomplex,dependingonwhatyouhavetomodify.However,Photoshop'sColorReplacementtoolcanaidinthecolor-replacementprocess.ThistoolislocatedontheHealingBrushtool'sflyoutmenuintheToolbox,asshowninFigureA.Withit,youcanpaintoveranimagetoreplaceonecolorwithanothercolorofyourchoosingmoreeasilythaneverbefore.Let'stakeacloserlookathowthistoolworks.

FigureA.

Knowthytooloptions

Page 78: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UnlikePhotoshop'salternativecolorreplacementoptions,theColorReplacementtoolprovidesyouwithahighlycontrollablewayofmodifyingcolorinyourimages.Usingthistool,youcanpaintoversampledpixels,alteringthemtospecifiedvalues.Notonlythat,butyoucanalsoadjustthesizeandhardnessofthebrushforoptimalresults.Let'stakeacloserlookattheoptionsthistooloffers.They'refoundonthetooloptionsbar.

Blendingmodes.WhenworkingwiththeColorReplacementtool,youcanchoosefromfourdifferentmodes:Hue,Saturation,Color,andLuminosity.Thisallowsyoutochangethecolorentirelyormakemoresubtlechanges.EachmodeworksthesameastheblendingmodesfoundintheLayerspalette.

Sampling.YoucanchoosehowtheselectedbrushsamplesthetargetcolorfromtheSamplingdropdownlistonthetooloptionsbar.YourchoicesareContinuous,Once,andBackgroundSwatch.

Limits.Besideschoosinghowtosampleatargetcolor,youcanalsosetlimits.YourchoicesareDiscontiguous,Contiguous,andFindEdges.

Tolerance.YoucanadjustthetoleranceoftheColorReplacementtool.Alowertoleranceallowsyoumorecontrolbylimitingthenumberofpixelsthatarealtered.Ahighertoleranceenablesyoutoreplaceabroaderrangeofcolorsatonce.

Testing,testing

TogetafeelfortheColorReplacementtool,let'sgothroughaquicktechniqueforchangingeyecolor.Thisisalsoagreatwaytoeliminateredeyeand,inaway,we'llbedoingthataswell!Tofollowalong:

1.

OpenanimageinRGBmode.(AlthoughtheColorReplacementtooldoesn'tworkonimagesinBitmap,IndexedColor,orMultichannelmode,itworkswondersonimagesinRGBColorandCMYKColormodes.)OuroriginalimageisshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

Page 79: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Magnifytheareayouwanttochange,soyoucanseeitclearly.Todoso,clickontheZoomtool intheToolboxorpressZonyourkeyboardtoselectit,andthenclickanddragyourmousepointeroverthesubject'seye(s)tozoominonthearea.

3.

ClickontheColorReplacementtool intheToolboxorpressJ(ifit'shidden,press[Shift]Jasmanytimesasittakestocyclethroughthetools)toselectit.WhentheColorReplacementtoolisselected,itsoptionsappearinthetooloptionsbar,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

ClickontheBrushiconinthetooloptionsbarandsetyourbrushsizesoit'ssmallerthantheareayouwanttoedit.Forexample,wesetourbrushtipto10px(pixels)indiameter.WealsosettheHardnessvalueofourbrushto50%tocreateamid-weightstroke.SettheremainingBrushoptionsasshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 80: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Note

Ifyou'reusingagraphicstablet,settheSizeandToleranceoptionsaccordingly.

5.

SelectColorfromtheModedropdownlist,OncefromtheSamplingdropdownlist,DiscontiguousfromtheLimitsdropdownlist,andenter30%intheTolerancetextbox.

6. SelecttheAnti-aliasedcheckboxtocreateasoftedge.

7.

ClickontheSetForegroundColorswatchintheToolboxtoopentheColorPickerdialogbox,andspecifyacolorfortheeyes(oreye,inourcase).Wesetourforegroundcolortoblack.Ifyou'rechangingtheeyecolorofahuman,chooseashadeofblue,green,orbrown.ClickOK.

8.

Clickanddragyourmousepointerovertheareayouwanttomodify.Photoshopsamplesthecoloryoufirstclickonandreplacesitwiththeforegroundcoloryouselected.Becarefulnottoletthecrosshairsofyourmousepointergopasttheactualeyearea,asshowninFigureE.Inourimage,there'salotofredaroundtheeyethatmightbereplacedifwepaintoverit.

FigureE.

Page 81: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Letthemseethewhites

1.

Chooseasmallbrushsize,suchas1pixel,andsettheforegroundcolortowhite.We'vemanagedtogetmostoftheredout,butthere'sstillatadleftinourwhiskeredfriend'seye.ThisisbecauseourtoolsettingstellPhotoshopthatthislightershadeofredisn'tsimilarenoughtobereplaced.Thisisexactlywhatwewanttohappen.Now,wecanreplacethissmallselectionofpinkishpixelswithwhite,whichmakestheeyelookmorerealistic.

2.

Clickanddragyourmousepointeroverthefewpinkish-coloredpixelstocompletethesuccessfultransformation,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Didyoucoloryourhair?

TheColorReplacementtoolisusefulformorethanjustfixingredeye.Youcanalsouseittoreplacelargeareasofcolor.Forexample,youcanusethesame

Page 82: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

techniquethatyouusedtochangehiseyecolortowhitenourlittlefriend'syellowedhair.Simplychangeyourbrushsizeto35pixelsandsetyourforegroundcolortoacoldgray.Then,paintovertheentireimage.AsshowninFigureGonthenextpage,thistechniqueisagreatwaytoremoveayellowcastfromanimage!

FigureG.

Removecolorfromtheedgesofdarkobjects

Fringingoccurswhenimagesensorsarepresentedwiththetaskofinterpretinglightagainstdark.Atypicalexampleisdarktreeleavesagainstabrightsky,asshowninFigureH.Infact,inthiscase,you'llseebothpurpleandgreenfringing.Iftheamountofcolorfringingismoderate,theColorReplacementtoolisagoodchoiceforquicklyrestoringrealisticcolortothearea.Formoreextensivecolorreplacement,youmayfindthattheReplaceColorfeature(discussedlaterinthischapter)providesanevenfastersolutiontotheproblem.

FigureH.

Page 83: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Forourexample,weusedtheColorReplacementtooltomakecorrectionstoaphotooftreesthatappeartohavecoloredjellyhangingfromtheirleaves.TousetheColorReplacementtooltocorrectfringing:

1. Openthefileyouwishtocorrect.

2. Zoominontheareaoftheimagethatneedstobefixed.

3.SelecttheColorReplacementtoolandthenchangetheSamplingdropdownlisttoContinuous.

4. Selectabrushsizethatwillcoverjustafewoftheoffendingpixelsatatime.

5.

Clickanddragalonganareawherefringingispresentandthen[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac)onaportionoftheimagetocapturethecoloryou'llusetoreplacethefringecolor.

6.PositiontheColorReplacementpointeroveranareawherefringingispresentandbegintodragbackandforthasyouwatchthepurplepixelschangecolor.

Eliminatesubtlecolorshifts

Chromaticaberrationiscausedbyaprocessingerrorinthedigitalcamerawhereoneormoreofthethreecolorchannelsdon'talignproperly.Theresultisacyan,yellow,red,blue,orgreenedge.We'veexaggeratedthatphenomenoninthesampleshownontheleftinFigureI,buttheproblemandthecorrectionare

Page 84: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

essentiallythesameforalessobviouscaseofchromaticaberration.

FigureI.

You'llseeredbandsonverticalsurfacesofthewhitetrimofthehouse.Resemblingaglow,youmightmistakethemforreflectionsofsurroundingsurfacesorasthecolorspillofaneveningsunset.Inmostcases,they'recoloraberrationsthatdon'tbelong.

Tocorrectchromaticaberrations:

1. Openthefileyouwishtocorrect.

Page 85: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

SelecttheColorReplacementtoolandusethefollowingsettings:Mode=Color,Sampling=Once,Limits=Discontiguous,Tolerance=50%,andtheAnti-aliascheckboxselected.

3.

SampletheerrantcolorwiththeColorReplacementtooland[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac)onasimilarsurfacethatdoesn'tsufferfromacolortint.Inourexample,wesampledredandthen[Alt]-clicked([option]-clickedontheMac)onahorizontalportionofthewhitetrim,asindicatedontherightinFigureI.

4.

Selectabrushsizethat'sappropriatetotheareayouneedtocorrectandgraduallyclickanddragoverthecolortoreplaceit.You'llseethat,evenifyoubrushovertheboundaryofthecolortint,theColorReplacementtoolleavessurroundingpixelsuntouchedbecausetheyaren'tthetargetcolor.

Fastandeasyrestoration

Photoshop'sColorReplacementtoolisonethatwillgetplentyofuse.It'sfast,easytouse,versatile,andreliablyeffectiveintakingcareofdigitalcameradefectsthatoccurdayinanddayout.Onceyoubecomefamiliarwithitscontrolsandlimitations,you'llfindthattheColorReplacementtooldeservesafavoredpositioninyourboxofretouchingtricks.

Page 86: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ChangecolorwithReplaceColor

You'vejustspentseveralhourssearchingthroughyourphotofilesforaclose-upshotofaflashlightyouwanttouseforasalespresentation.It'sperfectexceptforthecolor.Theflashlightisyellow,andyouneedagreenone,asshowninFigureA.Whatdoyoudo?WhynottryagreateditingfeatureincludedwithPhotoshopcalledtheReplaceColorcommand?ByusingtheReplaceColorcommand,youcaneasilyandquicklysubstituteonecolorforanother,turningayellowflashlighttogreenorwhateverothercoloryoudesire.

FigureA.

Determinethecolorreplacementcolor

Photoshop'sReplaceColorcommandisoneoftheeasiercommandstousebecauseyouworkwithinonlyonedialogbox.Thecommandcreatesamaskaroundspecificcolorsandthenreplacesthosecolorsintheimage.

Tobegin:

1. OpentheimageyouwishtoworkwithinPhotoshop.

SelectImage Adjustments ReplaceColor.TheReplaceColordialogboxopens,asshowninFigureB.

Page 87: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

FigureB.

3.

SelectthePreviewcheckboxontherightsideofthedialogboxsoyoucanseeyourresultsasyougo.Ontheleftsideofthedialogboxyou'llseetwopanes:SelectionandReplacement.

SettheSelectionvalues.TheSelectionsettingsdeterminewhichcolorvaluesyouwanttoreplace.Choosefrom:

Fuzziness.Bymovingthisslider,youadjustthetolerancesettingofthereplacecolormask.YoucansetthevaluebyeitherenteringanumericvalueintheFuzzinesstextboxorbyadjustingtheFuzzinessslider.

Image.ByselectingthisortheSelectionoptionbutton,youdeterminethemethodforselectingthecolorvalueyouwanttoreplace.TheImageoptionbuttondisplaysyourimageinthepreviewbox,andwhenyoumoveyourmousepointerinsidethepreviewbox,anEyedroppericonappears,asshowninFigureC1,allowingyoutoselectthereplacementcolor

Page 88: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

value.

FigureC1.

Selection.Byselectingthisoptionbutton,youdisplaythecolormaskinthepreviewwindow.Whenyoumoveyourmousepointertothisarea,anEyedroppericonappears,asshowninFigureC2,allowingyoutocreatethereplacecolormask.Maskedareasareinblack,unmaskedareasareinwhite,andpartiallymaskedareasappearinshadesofgray,dependingupontheiropacity.

FigureC2.

Page 89: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Setthecolorhue,theamountofsaturation,andthelightnesswithwhichtoreplaceitbyadjustingtheHue,Saturation,andLightnessasfollows:

Hue.Thisreferstothecolorvaluesettingofthereplacementcolor.Asyouadjustthehuevaluetoacolor,thereplacementcolorchangesalongtherange,asshowninFigureD.YoucansetthevaluebyeitherenteringanumericvalueintheHuetextboxorbyadjustingtheHueslider.

FigureD.

Saturation.Thisreferstothegraymixturevaluesettingofthereplacementcolor.Asyouadjustthegraymixturevaluetoacolor,thereplacementcolorvariesfromanentirelyunsaturatedgrayvaluetoanentirelysaturatedpurevalue,asshowninFigureE.YoucansetthevaluebyenteringanumericvalueintheSaturationtextboxorbyadjustingtheSaturationslider.

FigureE.

Lightness.Thisreferstothebrightnessvaluesettingofthereplacementcolor.Asyouadjustthebrightnessvaluetoacolor,itrangesfromblacktowhite,asshowninFigureF.YoucansetthevaluebyeitherenteringanumericvalueintheLightnesstextboxorbyadjustingtheLightnessslider.

FigureF.

Page 90: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Replacingcolorinyourphoto

1.

SelecttheSelectionoptionbuttontochoosethecolorvaluesyouwanttochange.YoucanusetheImageoptionbutton,butitdoesn'tgiveyouagoodsenseoftheentireareayou'vechosen.SincetheSelectionoptionbuttondoesshowtheareamaskedbythecolorreplacementmask,selectit.

2.

MoveyourpointerintothePreviewboxandanEyedroppericonappears.Inourexample,theyellowcoloroftheflashlightvariesfromahighlightontoptoashadowalongtheside.

3.

Movethepointertoamiddlepoint,clickonit,andchecktheresults,asshowninFigureG.Thekeytounderstandingwhat'shappeninginthePreviewboxisinunderstandingwhatamaskdoes.Amaskprotectsanimagefromaneffectthatyouapplytoit.InFigureG,theblackanddarkgrayareasarethemasked,orprotected,areas.Theseareaswillbeprotectedfromhavingcolorvaluesreplaced.Thewhiteandlightgrayareasaretheunmasked,orunprotected,areas.Theseareaswillhavethecolorvaluesreplaced.

FigureG.

Page 91: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Toincludeadditionalcolorareas,increasethevaluetolerancebymovingtheFuzzinessslidertotheright.Asyoumoveit,noticemoreandmoreareasbecomeselected.Inourexample,wemovedtheslidertoavalueofabout80,asshowninFigureH1.

FigureH1.

5.

Youcanselectadditionalareas,ifneeded,withthemousepointerbyeitherpressing[Ctrl][Shift]( [shift]ontheMac)orbyselectingtheAddToSimpleicon (EyedropperPlusiconontheMac)intheReplaceColordialogbox.WeusedtheAddToSampleicontomoveourmousepointerintothePreviewboxandselectadditionalareasuntilwehadselectedwhat'sneeded,asshowninFigureH2.

FigureH2.

Page 92: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Selectingthereplacementcolor

1.

Adjustthehuevaluestosetthereplacementcolor.Forourexample,wewantedtochangethecoloroftheflashlighttogreen,sowechoseaHuevalueofabout+85.Atthispoint,theyellowareasintheflashlightchangetogreen,includingthereflectionfromthetableitsitson,asshowninFigureI.

FigureI.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 93: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.Desaturatethecolor,ifneeded,byadjustingtheSaturationvalue.Forourexample,weusedaSaturationvalueofabout-10.

3. ChecktheLightnessvalueandmakeanyappropriateadjustments.

4. ClickOK.Ouryellowflashlighthasbecomeabright,shinygreen.

Sweetandsimple

Photoshop'sReplaceColorcommandisoneoftheeasiestadjustmentsyoucanmaketoanimage.It'sprecise,versatile,andproducesagreat-lookingresult.Justthinkoftheendlesspossibilitiesforsubjectsthatmaynothavebeenthatperfectcolorbefore!Takethisnew-foundabilityandutilizeitwhereveryoupleaseturnredrosespink,greenbananasyellow,andgrayskiesblue!

Page 94: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionUsetheLevelscommandtocorrectcolorcasts

Problem:Unnaturalcolorobscuresthebeautyofanimage.

Solution:UsetheLevelscommand.

Page 95: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Oneofthemostcommon,andessential,taskswheneditingfull-colorphotographsisadjustingcolor.Timeaftertime,you'llencounterexcellentimagesthathidebehindaveilofunnaturalcolor,knownascolorcast.Thisshiftincolormaybecausedbytheinherentdeficienciesofascannerordigitalcameraorbytheeffectofincandescentorfluorescentlighting.InPhotoshop,thereareavarietyofmethodsyoucanusetoremoveacolorcastandrevealthetruecolorsofanimage.Anymethodwechoose,however,shouldproducethedesiredresultwiththeleastamountoftimeandeffort.TheLevelscommand,althoughlesspowerfulthantheCurvescommand,allowsustotargetandeliminatecolorcastswithfewersteps.

Identifyingasimplecolorproblem

Tobegin,openanimagefileinPhotoshopthatdisplaysanunnaturalcolorcastyou'dliketoeliminate.Oursampleimageofvegetablesagainstagraybackgroundhasanunattractivegreencolorcastcoveringtheentireimage.Let'sassumethatwealreadyknowthebackgroundshouldbeacoolgrayandnotgreen.

Thesetypesofcolorcastsareeasytoidentifybecausetheyaffecttheentireimageandoftenshowupasablue,green,orredcast.Ifyou'reunsurewhichcolormightbecausinganimbalance,lookforanareaintheimagethatyouknowshouldbeneutralgray.Resettingtheneutralgrayvalueseliminatesacolorcastandrevealsthetruecolorsinyourimage.

CorrectingacolorcastwiththeLevelscommand

1. OpentheimageandselecttheEyedroppertool fromtheToolbox.

2.Clickonamediumtoneportionofthebackgroundaffectedbythecolorcast.YourSetForegroundColorswatchshowsthecolorselection.

3.CreateanadjustmentlayerinyourLayerspalettebyclickingtheCreateNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbutton andselectingLevelsfromitsdropdownlist.

4.

Double-clickontheSetGrayPointeyedroppertoolintheresultingLevelsdialogbox.TheColorPickerdialogboxopensanddisplaysvaluesforneutralRGBmidtonesinthiscase,avalueof128foreachofred,green,andblue.

5. Changethevalueforeachcolorsothey'reequalandthenclickOK.

UseyourEyedroppertooltoclickonceinthesamemidtoneareaaffectedby

Page 96: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.thecolorcast.Thegreen-graybackgroundchangestoneutralgray,andthecolorcastwithinthemidtonesinallpartsoftheimagedisappears,asshowninourSolutionimage.

7.

Adjustthehighlights.Inourexample,weonlyneededtoadjustthewhitepointslider(totheleft)tobrightenthehighlights,andwemovedthemidtonesliderslightlytothelefttoopenupmid-levelshadowdetail.

8.ClickOK.Youmaychoosetofinishupwithsomeselectivesharpeningandspotretouching.

RemovecolorcastswithLevels

Colorcorrectinganimageisasmuchartasitisscience.You'llfindthatyoursuccess,likesomanytasksinPhotoshop,improveswithpatience,practice,andcarefulanalysisofcolor.Knowinghowtorescueaphotofrombehindanunattractivehazewillgiveyoutheskillsneededtoproducegreat-lookingimages.

Colorcalibrateyourmonitor

Yourmonitorcanhaveacolorcastofitsown.Ifthat'sthecase,anycolorcorrectingyouperforminPhotoshopmaybeunsuccessful.Alwaysstartfromthemostidealconditionsavailabletoyoutoproduceconsistent,aestheticallypleasingresults.

Beforeyoubeginevaluatingimagesonscreen,followthemonitormanufacturer'sprocessforachievingaccuratecolordisplayinyourworkenvironment.Infact,it'sagoodpracticetore-runthecolorcalibrationschemeforyoursystemonceamonthtoallowforthechangingphysicalconditionofyourmonitor'selectronics.

Ifyouhavetheabilitytocalibrateyourmonitortotheoutputdevice(colorcopieroroffsetpress,forexample),nowisthetimetodothataswell.Contactyourprintvendorforinformationonthebestmethodforachievingpredictablecolorbetweenyoursystemandtheirs.Formoreoncalibratingyourmonitor,seetheIntroduction.

Page 97: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionMellowoversaturatedcolors

Problem:Animageisoverwhelmedbyoversaturatedcolor.

Solution:MakeaHue/Saturationadjustment.

Page 98: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Oversaturationoccurswhenadigitalcamera'simagesensormisreadsorbecomesoverlysensitivetoacolor,causingthelightinformationtoberecordedwithfewergrayvaluesandbecomemoresaturated.Oversaturatedcolorscanprintpoorlyorjustmakeyourimagelookbad.Photoshopmakesiteasytotamethesebrillianthuesandkeepthemfromoverwhelmingtherestoftheimage.

ThefirstlineofdefenseinPhotoshop

Whenattemptingtoquiettheseoverlypurecolors,youshouldalwaysstartwiththeHue/SaturationadjustmentinPhotoshop.Thisfeatureprovidesthebestsetoftoolsfortargetingandeditingaspecifichue,soitworksbestforlargeareasofsaturatedcolor.It'salsofairlyeasytocontrol,soyoucaneasilytestoutdifferentsettingstogetjusttherightbalance.

MakeaHue/Saturationadjustment

1.

ClicktheCreatNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbutton intheLayerspaletteandselectHue/SaturationfromthelisttoaddaHue/Saturationadjustmentlayertoyourimage.Usinganadjustmentlayerletsyoualsocontrolopacity,blendingmodes,andotheradjustmentsthatcouldcomeinhandy.

2.

ClickontheEditdropdownlisttoselectfromthesixavailablecolorranges.Forexample,ouroriginalimagedisplaysoversaturatedgreens,soweselectedGreensfromtheEditdropdownlistandusedtheslidertobringthembacktothemorenormalappearanceinthesecondimage.

Controlyoursaturation

Youcontrolsaturationbyusingthesliderorenteringavalueinthetextbox.Movingtheslidertotheleftdecreasescolorsaturation,whilemovingittotherightincreasessaturation.Therangeofsaturationvaluesis-180to+180,withnegativenumbersrepresentinglowersat-urationandtheoppositeforpositivenumbers.

GetthemostfromHue/Saturation

Page 99: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

HereareafewtipsforusingtheHue/Saturationdialogbox:

MakesurethePreviewoptionisselectedwhenadjustingsaturationinthisdialogbox,soyoucaneasilyseehowyourimageischanging.

Workwiththecolorrangethatbothersyouthemostbeforeswitchingtoothercolors.Whenyoumakemajorchangestothemostsaturatedcolorinyourimage,othercolorscanshift.It'smucheasiertomakebigchangesandthenadjusttheothercolorsafterward.

Ifyou'vefoundaperfectcolorcorrectionthatcouldapplytoaseriesofimages,clicktheSavebuttontosavethemasaseparatefile.Whenyouopenyourotherimages,selectLoadfromtheHue/Saturationdialogbox,locateyoursavedfile,andyourcustomsettingsareapplied.Thisisabigtime-saverandalsocanmakeyoureditedimagesmoreconsistent.

Areyousaturated?

Overlysaturatedcolorscanruinagreatimage,buttheHue/Saturationcommandcanhelpcalmthoserichcolors.Thissimpleadjustmentmaybejustthethingyouneedwhenitcomestimetorescueanimage.

Page 100: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 101: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter2.TonalCorrection

Page 102: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Determinetonalqualitybyreadingahistogram

We'veallhadithappensomeonegivesyoualess-than-stellarimagetouseforaprojectyou'reworkingon.Whenthisoccurs,youshouldimmediatelyevaluatetheimage'stonalquality.Afterall,youprobablydon'twanttospendcountlesshourstryingtocorrecttheimageinPhotoshoponlytofindoutlaterthatitisn'tsalvageable.Oneofthewaysyoucandetermineifanimageisofquality,orifitcanbesaved,istoviewitshistogram.

What'sahistogram?

InFigureA,weshowanimagewithitshistogram.Thisisanexampleofaqualityimagethathasawell-dispersedtonalrange,meaningthatithasanacceptableamountofpixeldatainallthreerangesshadows,midtones,andhighlights.Ahistogramisagraph,whichrepresentsthetotaltonalrangeofanimage.Thehorizontalaxisonahistogramshowsthetonalrangeandtheverticalaxisshowsthenumberofpixels,from0to255,ateachtonalvalue.Theleftsideonthehistogramshowsshadowdetailinanimage;therightsideshowsitshighlights;andallthedetailinbetweenaremidtones.Animagethat'stoodark,orunderexposed,showsmoredetailontheleft,andanimagethat'stoolight,oroverexposed,showsmoredetailontheright.

FigureA.

Page 103: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Note

Toviewanimage'shistogram,chooseWindow HistogramtoshowtheHistogrampaletteorImage Adjustments LevelstodisplaytheLevelsdialogbox.U

Understandinghistograms

Ahistogramcanbeprettyintimidatingifyoudon'tknowwhatyou'relookingat.We'lldefineeachitemfoundintheHistogrampalette,soyouhaveabasicunderstanding.Then,we'llshowyouhowtointerpretthegraph.

Makingsenseofwhatyousee

ToviewtheHistogrampalette,openanimageinPhotoshopandthenchooseWindow Histogram,aswementionedearlier.Bydefault,justthebargraphdisplays,asshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

Page 104: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FromtheHistogrampalette'spop-upmenu,youcanchooseExpandedViewtoshowthestatisticalinformationdisplayedinthegraph.Inthisview,youcanalsochoosetoshowthehistogramofspecificlayersfromtheSourcedropdownlist(onlyavailableinadocumentwithmultiplelayers).IfyouchooseAllChannelsViewfromtheHistogrampalette'spop-upmenu,agraphforeachcolorchannelisshownseparatelyonthepalette.

Channel.Thisdropdownlistallowsyoutoviewthehistogramforeveryavailablechanneleithercombinedorindividually.

Mean.Meandatarepresentstheaverageintensityleveloftheimage,layer,orselection.

StdDev.Thedatashownhereindicateshowwidelythevaluesvarywithintheentireimage,layer,orselection.

Median.Thisshowsthemiddleintensityvalueoftheimage,layer,orselection.

Tip

Youcanviewthehistogramforanentireimage(bydefault),aselectionoftheimage,oraspecificlayerintheimage.Toselectanareainanimage,choosetheRectangular

Marqueetool fromtheToolbox.Then,clickanddragyourmousepointeraroundtheareayouwanttoselect.Toselectaspecificlayer,simplyclickonitintheLayerspaletteandthendisplaytheimage'shistogram.

Pixels.Thisshowsthetotalnumberofpixelsintheimage,layer,orselection.

Level.Placeyourmousepointeranywhereonthehistogramtodisplaythearea'slevelofintensityinthisfield.

Count.Placeyourmousepointeranywhereonthehistogramtoshowthenumberofpixelsofthecurrentintensitylevelinthisfield.

Percentile.Placeyourmousepointeranywhereonthehistogramtoshowthe

Page 105: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

totalnumberofpixelsatorbelowthepointer.

CacheLevel.Thisshowsthelevelofimagecacheusedtodisplaythehistogram.

Thehistogramisdynamic.Thatis,asyoumaketonalcorrectionswiththeLevelscommand,youcanseeabeforeandafterviewofthehistogramontheHistogrampalette.Thedarkerportiononthegraphistheadjustedhistogram,whilethefadedportionrepresentstheoriginalhistogram,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Youalsonowhavetheabilitytorefreshthehistogramdisplaytoviewtheimage's

truehistogram.SimplyclicktheCachedDataWarningbutton ortheUncachedRefreshbutton .Botharelocatedintheupper-rightcornerofthepaletteandappearwhenPhotoshopisshowingacachedversionofthehistogramratherthantheimage'struehistogram.Thecachedversiondisplaysmorequicklyandrequireslessmemory,butitisn'tcompletelyaccurate.

Readingahistogram

Photoshopisanimage-editingapplicationbut,eventhoughithasamagicwand,itisn'tamagician!Sometimes,animagesimplydoesn'tcontainenoughinformationforyoutoproduceaqualityphoto.Youcanascertainthisbeforewastingtimetryingtocorrectanimagebysimplyviewingthehistogram.

Page 106: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

InFigureD,weshowanunderexposedimageanditshistogram.Thetonalrangeintheimageisconcentratedontheleftsideofthegraph,indicatingtoomuchdetailintheshadowsandnotenoughdetailinthehighlights.InFigureE,weshowanoverexposedimageanditshistogram.Here,youcanseethattherearebarelyanypixelsintheshadows.Mostoftheintensityisontherightsideofthegraph,inthehighlights.Therefore,bothimageslacktoomuchinformationandprobablywouldn'tbenefitfromtonalcorrection.Andwe'reabletodeterminethisjustbylookingatthegraph,so,ifaMeanvalueof92.13stilldoesn'tmeananythingtoyou,don'tworryitdoesn'thaveto!

FigureD.

FigureE.

Page 107: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Note

Forinformationonhowtofixoverexposedimages,seetheProblem:Solution"Restoreoverexposedphotos"attheendofthischapter.

Worththeeffort

Whenyouworkwithimagesformanydifferentprojectsandyoureceivethemfromdifferentsources,it'simportanttoknowwhatsortofimagesyou'reworkingwith.Youcancorrectmanyimageswithpositiveresults,butothersmaynotbeabletobefixed.Byviewinganimage'shistogramfirst,youcandetermineifwhatyou'reworkingwithis,well,worththehardwork!

Page 108: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UseAutoContrasttoautomaticallycorrectanimage

Anoldsayinggoes,"Lightisthepaintbrushofphotography,"andit'scertainlytrue.Justastherearemanytypesofpaintbrushes,soaretheremanytypesoflightsoftlight,hardlight,directionallight,andbouncedlight,tomentionafew.Eachinfluencesthemoodandqualityofaphoto.

Lightalsoaffectssuchthingsascolorbalance,saturation,andcontrast.Manytimeswe'reabletocontrolthesefactors.Colorbalanceandsaturationarerelativelyeasytoadjustwithfiltersandexposure,butcontrastcontrolisn't.OneofPhotoshop'sgreatstrengthsisitsabilitytoadjustimageproperties,andadjustingcontrastisasnapwiththeAutoContrastcommand.

Understandingcontrastinanimage

Photographersliketothinkintermsoftones,thatis,howbrightsomethingisasopposedtohowdarkitis.Everythinginascenefallsintothreecategories:highlight,midtones,andshadows.Whenyoutakeaphoto,thetonesinthephotoreproducerelativetotheircorrespondingtonesintheoriginalscene.

Iftheoriginalscenehappenstohavethesamenumberoftonesascanbereproducedbyfilmoranimagecard,theneverythingintheoriginalisreproducedexactlythesameintheimage,andthesceneissaidtobeanormal-contrastscene,asshowninFigureA1.Butmostoftenthisdoesn'thappen.Whenascenehasfewertonesinitthanitcanreproduce,it'ssaidtobealow-contrastscene,asshowninFigureA2.Conversely,whenascenehasmanymoretonesthanitcanreproduce,it'ssaidtobeahigh-contrastscene,asshowninFigureA3.

FigureA1.

Page 109: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureA2.

FigureA3.

Aphotoofalow-contrastscene,whilecontainingallthetonesoftheoriginal,issaidtobeflat.That'sbecauseitcontainsnotruewhites,orhighlights,andblack,orshadows.Everythingissimplyatoneofgray.Ontheotherhand,aphotoofahigh-contrastscenenotcontainingallthetonesoftheoriginalissaidtobesharp.That'sbecauseithastoomanyhighlightsandshadows.

ApplyingtheAutoContrastcommand

Toadjustthecontrastofanimage,wesimplywanttodotheoppositeofwhatwe

Page 110: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

seeinthescene.Wewanttoincreasethecontrastofalow-contrastimageanddecreasethecontrastofahigh-contrastimage.WhileyoucanadjusttheseimagesmanuallyusingtheBrightness/Contrastcommand,typicallyyou'llneedtoadjustbrightnessandsaturationaswell.TheAutoContrastcommandautomaticallyadjustseverythinginonesimplestep.

Tousethecommand:

1. OpenthefileyouwanttoworkoninPhotoshop.

2.

ChooseImage Adjustments AutoContrast,andyouroriginalimage,suchastheoneshowninFigureB1,iscontrastcorrected,asshowninFigureB2.It'sassimpleasthat.

FigureB.

Page 111: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Note

Youcanalsousethekeyboardshortcut[Ctrl][Alt][Shift]L( [option][shift]LontheMac)toselecttheAutoContrastcommand.

Threeadjustmentsinonecommand

Animagethat'seithertoolowortoohighincontrastcanappearflatorsharp,respectively,inhighlightandshadowdetails.AsimplewaytocorrectimagecontrastproblemsiswiththeAutoContrastcommand.Thiscommandadjustscontrastaswellasbrightnessandsaturationallinonestep.

Page 112: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Addmissingdetailtoyourimages

Aswementioned,animageisbrokendownintohighlights,midtones,andshadows.Thetermsrefertorelativeluminance,orbrightness,levelsinasceneaswellasinanimage.Becauseofthelimitationsofadigitalcamera'sCCD,alltheluminancelevelscan'tberenderedinanimageasfaithfullyastheycanbeintheoriginalscene.

Highlightsthatyoucanobserveinasceneoftenappearasareasvoidofdetailinanimage.Thesameistrueforshadows.Shadows,whosedetailsyoumayeasilyseeinascene,oftenappearasverydarkorblackareasinanimage.Thisisn'taproblemifthehighlightandshadowareasaresmallandcontainnoorverylittleimportantdetail,butsometimesyoucan'taffordtolosethesedetails.Thisproblemhasplaguedphotographerssincethebeginningofphotography.However,unlikethephotographersofyore,youhavethedigitalsolutionknownasPhotoshopatyourfingertipstohelprestorepoorqualitydetailinyourdigitalimages.

Noiseisgood

Backgroundnoisecanmakecommunicationdifficultifyou'retryingtoconversewithsomeone,butifyouaddnoisetoyourimage'swashed-outhighlightareas,itcanbequitepleasing.Forexample,youcanusenoisetofillanoverexposedareainanimage.

Todoso:

1. OpenthefileyouwishtoworkwithinPhotoshop.

2. SelectWindow LayerstoopentheLayerspalette.

3. Double-clickontheBackgroundlayertounlockthelayer.

4. EnteranameforyourlayerintheNametextboxoftheNewLayerdialogbox.

5. ClickOK.

Maketheselection

Page 113: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Next,we'llselectthehighlightpixelareatowhichwewanttoaddnoise.

Todoso:

1. ChoosetheMagicWandtool fromtheToolbox.

2.

Inthetooloptionsbar,enteravalueintheTolerancetextbox.Lowvaluesselectcolorssimilartothepixelyouclickon,whilehighernumbersselectawiderrangeofcolors.

3.

Moveyourpointertothemiddleofthehighlightpixelareaandclick.Aselectionborderappears,asshowninoursampleimageinFigureA.

FigureA.

Isolatethehighlightpixels

Now,wewanttocopyandpastetheselectedhighlightpixelsintoanewlayer.

Todoso:

1. Press[Ctrl]C( ContheMac),andthenpress[Ctrl]V( VontheMac).

2. NamethenewlayerHighlight.Next,we'lladdthenoisetotheHighlightlayer.

3. ChooseFilter Noise AddNoise.

SetanAmountthat'sjustenoughtoaddasmallamountofvisualtextureto

Page 114: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4. thehighlightarea(22%workedwellforourexample).

5.

SelecttheGaussianoptionbutton,selecttheMonochromaticcheckbox,andthenclickOK.Inourexample,theNoisefilteraddsasubtleamountoffauxdetailtothehighlightarea,asshowninFigureBonthepreviouspage.

FigureB.

Cloningisbetter

Addingnoisetowashed-outhighlightareasisgood,butifyouwantmorethantexture,tryusingtheCloneStamptool.WiththeCloneStamptool,youcantakeasampleofanimageanduseittopaintotherareasoftheimage.Thismakesiteasytocoverhighlightareaswithmoredetailedimageinformation.

SetuptheClonestamp

BeforewecanworkwiththeCloneStamptool,deselectthelayervisibility,andthencreateanewlayertoworkon.

Todoso:

1. ChooseNewLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

2.

EnterHighlights2intheNametextboxintheNewLayerdialogbox,andthenclickOK.

Page 115: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3. SelecttheStamptool fromtheToolbox.

4. SelecttheUseAllLayerscheckboxonthetooloptionsbar.

5.

Selectabrush,sincetheCloneStamptoolisapainttool.Forourexample,wechoseasoft,round35-pixelbrushfromtheBrushPresetsPickeronthetooloptionsbarandsettheOpacityoptiontoavalueofabout20%,sinceitwon'ttakemuchtoseearesultinthehighlightareas.

6.

Definethepixelareaintheimageyouwanttocopybymovingyourpointertoanareainyourimagerightnexttothehighlightarea,andthen[Alt]-clicking([option]-clickingontheMac)onit.

7.

Dragafewbrushstrokesfromtheedgeofthehighlightareatowardthecenterofthehighlightarea.Youdon'tneedtototallyfilltheareabecauseyouwanttoretainsomeofthehighlightareaandnottotallyeliminateit.

8.Positionyourpointeratanothersideofyourhighlightandredefineyourpixelpaintsamplewhenyou'vefinishedonesideofthehighlightarea.

9.

Continueinthismanneruntilyou'vefinished,aswedidinoursampleimage,FigureC.

FigureC.

Page 116: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Lostandfound

Losthighlightdetails,althoughbothersome,aren'tnecessarilydifficulttofix.WithPhotoshop,youcanapplyavarietyoftechniquestorestoredetailandcreateagreatimage.IntheProblem:Solution"Restoreunderexposedshadowdetail"attheendofthischapter,we'lllookattheotherendoftheluminancerangeandshowyouhowtobringyourshadowdetailsoutofthedarknessandintothelight.

Page 117: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ImprovetonalrangewiththeShadow/Highlightcommand

Sometimesthere'snothingwrongwithpartofanimage.Perhapsthesunwasbehindyourmodelthebackgroundlooksfine,butthesubjectisinshadow.Maybethesubjectwasinbrightlightortooclosetotheflash,resultinginanotherwisegreatpicturewithafewkeydetailsblownout.Whethertheproblemisunwantedlightorshadow,there'sawaytofixitquickly.

Forimagesthatarewell-litinsomeplacesbutneedhelpinothers,PhotoshopofferstheShadow/Highlightadjustmentcommand.WhilemostofPhotoshop'sadjustmenttoolscanmodifyprecisetonalranges,eventhemightyCurvesandLevelscommandsaredesignedtoadjusttheentireimageoraselectedarea.TheShadow/Highlightcommand,however,isaspecializedtoolthatlooksfordiscrepanciesbetweenlightanddarkareasoftheimage.Youmaynotneediteveryday,butwhenyoudo,itcansaveyouhoursoffrustration.

GettingtoknowtheShadow/Highlightcommand

TobeginusingtheShadow/Highlightcommand:

1.

OpenanRGBorgrayscalefilethatcontainsbothwell-litandshadowareas,suchastheoneshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 118: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

SelectImage Adjustments Shadow/Highlight,andtheShadow/Highlightdialogboxappears,asshowninFigureB.WhenyouactivatetheShadow/Highlightdialogbox,Photoshopcomparesthepixelsintheimagetoothersnearbytodeterminetheshadowandhighlightareas.(We'llshowyouhowtoadjustthisrangelater.)

FigureB.

AdjustshadowpixelswiththeShadowsAmountslider.Youcanadjusttheamountbymovingthesliderorbytypingaspecificvalueinthetextbox.Eachimageisalittledifferent,soexperimenttogettheeffectyouwant.FigureCshowstheimagewiththedefaultshadowadjustmentof50%,whileweused

Page 119: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

anadjustmentof100%fortheimagethat'sshowninFigureD.

FigureC.

FigureD.

Page 120: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Mutinghighlights

ThedefaultsettingsfortheShadow/Highlightcommandaredesignedtobrightenshadowareas.TheHighlightsAmountslider,whichissetto0bydefault,appliestheoppositeadjustmenttotheimage:Thehighertheamount,thedarkerthehighlightsbecome.

FigureE,onthenextpage,showsasubjectthat'spartiallywashedoutbybrightsunlight.Toenhancetheimage,weopenedtheShadow/Highlightdialogbox,settheShadowsAmountsliderto0,andincreasedtheHighlightsAmountsliderto50%.TheresultisshowninFigureF,alsoonthenextpage.

FigureE.

Page 121: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureF.

Loadingandsavingoptions

Page 122: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheLoadandSavebuttonsworkjustlikesimilarbuttonsintheCurves,Levels,andotherAdjustmentcommanddialogboxes.TheSavebuttonallowsyoutocapturethecurrentsettings,whiletheLoadbuttonenablesyoutore-applythemduringalateruse,savingyouagreatdealoftimeifyouhavetomakesimilaradjustmentstoaseriesofimages.

Fine-tuningtheresults

Nowthatyouhavethebasicidea,let'sgetunderthehoodandplaywiththeadvancedoptions.Todoso,selecttheShowMoreOptionscheckboxinthebottom-leftcorneroftheShadow/Highlightdialogboxtorevealthecommanddialogboxinitsfullglory,asshowninFigureG.

FigureG.

Page 123: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Theadvanceddialogboxisdividedintothreesections:Shadows,Highlights,andAdjustments.ThefirstiteminboththeShadowsandHighlightssectionsistheAmountslider,whichworksexactlyasitdidinthesimpledialogbox.Unlikethesimpledialogbox,however,younowhavemorecontroloverwhichpixelsPhotoshopselectsandmodifies.

TonalWidthslider

TheTonalWidthsliderdeterminestherangeoftonesthatthecorrectionisappliedto.Thesmallerthevalue,thefewertoneswillbeaffected.Thus,alowvalueintheShadowsTonalWidthsliderrestrictschangestojustthedarkestshadows,whilealowvalueintheHighlightsTonalWidthconfinestheadjustmentstothebrightesthighlights.Increasingthisvalueresultsingreateradjustmentstothemidtonesandcontrastingtonalranges.

StartingwiththeimageshowninFigureH,thedefaultShadow/HighlightadjustmentproducestheresultshowninFigureI.Inthiscase,thesubjectisstillfairlydark,soweincreasedtheTonalWidthoftheShadowsAmountto65%toproducetheresultshowninFigureJ.

FigureH.

Page 124: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureI.

FigureJ.

Note

Ifyourimagehasstrongtransitionsbetweendarkandlightareas,youmaypick

Page 125: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

upa"glow"effectifyourTonalWidthadjustmentistoohigh.Experimentwitheachimageonacase-by-casebasistogetthebestresult.

Radiusslider

TheRadiussliderspecifiesthesizeoftheareaPhotoshopcomparestodetermineifagivenpixelisinashadoworhighlightarea.Thelargertheradius,themorelikelyagivenpixelisconsideredpartoftheareathatrequiresadjustment.Thisisanothersettingthatvariesdependingontheimage.Iftheradiusistoolow,thecorrectionmaynotbeappliedeverywhereyouneedit.Ifit'stoohigh,itmayaffecttheentireimage.

TheAdjustmentssection

Atthebottomoftheadvanceddialogboxisanewsetofoptions,whichprovideadditionaltoolsforfine-tuningtheimage:ColorCorrection/Brightness,MidtoneContrast(Brightness),BlackClip,andWhiteClip.Let'sexaminetheseoptionsinmoredetail.

Note

Whenworkingwithgrayscaleimages,PhotoshopreplacestheColorCorrectionsliderwithaBrightnesscontrol.

ColorCorrection/Brightness

Thisslideradjuststhevividnessofthecolorsintheareasaffectedbytheshadoworhighlightadjustment.Typically,thesetonesneedabitofaboosttobalancethemwiththerestoftheimageafterthecorrectionismade.

Bydefault,Photoshopenhancesthecolorofthemodifiedareasby20percent.YoucanadjustthisamountwiththeColorCorrectionslider.Typically,aloweramountresultsinaless-saturatedimage,asshowninFigureK,whileahigheramountincreasessaturation,asshowninFigureL.

Page 126: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureK.

FigureL.

TheColorCorrectionsliderisprettysensitive,anddependingonyourimage,asmalladjustmentcangoalongway.It'sabitcrudecomparedtoPhotoshop's

Page 127: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

othercolor-correctiontools,butithastheadvantageofaffectingonlytheareasoftheimagewhereyou'vemadeshadoworhighlightadjustmentsinthecurrentsession.

MidtoneContrast

MovingtheMidtoneContrastsliderdecreasesorincreasesthecontrastofthemidtonesoftheimage.Apositiveamountmakesshadowsdarkerandhighlightsbrighter,whileanegativeamountdoesthereverse.

BlackClipandWhiteClip

ThetwotextboxesatthebottomoftheAdjustmentssectionBlackClipandWhiteClipdeterminewhatpercentageoftheimage'sshadowsandhighlightsaresettopureblack(level0)andpurewhite(level255),respectively.Increasingthesevaluessetsmorepixelstotheextremesettings.Thiscangiveyoumorecontrast,butbecarefulnottoeliminatedetailsintheshadowsandhighlightsbysettingtheclippingrangestoohigh.

Changingthedefaultsettings

TheSaveAsDefaultsbuttonatthebottomoftheadvanceddialogboxchangestheinitialsettingsofeachShadow/Highlightsessiontothevaluesthatarecurrentlyselected.ThisishandyifyouregularlyneedtomakeHighlightadjustmentsmoreoftenthanShadowadjustments.IfyoueverwanttogobacktoPhotoshop'soriginalsettingsafterdefiningyourown,simplyholddownthe[Shift]keytochangeittoaResetDefaultsbutton.

Note

Forinformationonhowtogetmoredetailfromtheshadowsinyourimages,seetheProblem:Solution"Restoreunderexposedshadowdetail"attheendofthischapter.

Nowthatyou'veturnedthelampdownlow…

Page 128: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheShadow/Highlightadjustmentcommandprovidesaquickandeasywaytosalvageimagesthatonlyneedcorrectionincertainareas.Inthepast,youmighthavespentalotoftimemakingaselectionmaskorrubbingtheimagewiththeDodge,Burn,orSpongetoolstoachievesimilarresults.Morelikely,youwouldhavejustdeletedthem.However,withthishandynewfeatureyoucansalvagemanyofyourimagesinlesstimeandwithfewerhassles.

Page 129: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Correctexposureproblemswithdodgingandburning

UsingPhotoshopfeaturessuchasCurvesandLevelstoadjustthetonalvaluesinyourdigitalimagesisveryeffective,butoftenthecomprehensivenatureoftheseadjustmentsmakesithardtotargetspecificareasofyourimage.Youcouldapplythesecommandstoamaskorlayerstyle,butwhygothroughamulti-stepprocesswhenyoucanusetheDodgeandBurntoolstomaketonaladjustmentsinyourimages?Thesetoolsgottheirnamesfromtraditionalprintdeveloping,soitmightnotbeimmediatelyevidentwhattheydoorhowtobestusethem.Restassured,theDodgeandBurntoolsshouldbeasmuchapartofyourimage-editingprocessasLevelsorCurves,andwe'regoingtoshowyouhowtousethemtoedityourownimages,justaswedidtogettheresultsshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 130: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Fromdarkroomtodigital

Onereasonthesetoolsaren'tfamiliartosomePhotoshopusersistheirsomewhatold-fashionednames.Whileanyonewhohassomedarkroomprintingexperiencehasheardoftheseterms,thosewhohavecomeintophotographyusinginkjetprintersandimage-editingapplications,suchasPhotoshop,probablyhaven'theardofthem.Dodgingiscontrollingtheexposureinphotographicprintingbyreducingtheamountoflightreachingspecificareasofthepaper,whileburninginvolvesaddinglighttospecificareas.Similarly,inPhotoshop,theDodgetoolallowsyoutodarkenportionsofanimage,whiletheBurntoolallowsyoutolightenthem.

Forthosewhoprintindarkrooms,havinggooddodgingandburningtechniquesallowsyoutostrengthenyourimagesbymanuallycorrectingproblemexposures,butthispracticeisnowmuchmorecommonlydone,andwithgreaterprecision,onacomputer.Anyonewhohaseverdodgedandburnedhiswaythroughapileofjunkyprintsknowsthatthetraditionalwaycanbeverytricky;sohavingthesetoolsinPhotoshopgivesyoutheflexibilitytoperfectimagesbeforethepixelshitthepage.

Beforeyoustartyouredit

YoucangetthebestresultsfromtheDodgetoolandtheBurntoolbypreparingthembeforeyoustartediting.Togetstarted:

Page 131: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1. SelecteithertheDodgetool ortheBurntool fromtheToolbox.

2.

Checkoutthetooloptionsbarlocatedbelowyourmenucommands.Understandingthethreeattributesofthesetools(Brush,Range,andExposure)iskeytocontrollingthem,solet'stakealookateachindetail.

Choosingabrush

TheBrushoptionenablesyoutosetthediameterofyourbrush,whichisdictatedbythescopeofyouredit.Selectalargediameterifyou'retargetingalargeareaorasmallerdiameterifyou'redoingfineredits.Don'tgotoobigortoosmall,though,asthesebrushsizescanbeveryhardtocontrol.YoucanalsoselectanduseanycustombrushesyouhavestoredintheBrushpalette.Thisallowsyoutofurthercustomizethetooltocreatethebestpossibleeffect.

Sincewe'reonthetopicofbrushes,wehavetomentionthatthebestresultswhenusingeithertoolcomefromabrushwithafeatherededge.ThisallowsPhotoshoptoblendinyouradjustmentswiththeadjacentpixelsandgiveamuchmorenaturallook.MostofthebrushesavailableintheBrushpalettehaveafeatherededge,butyoucancontroltheamountoffeatheringbyeditingthebrush.

1. Selectyourbrushinthepalette.

2. OpentheBrushespalettebyselectingWindow Brushes.

ClickontheBrushTipShapepresetandyou'llfindthesameHardnessadjustment,asshowninFigureB.Aswementioned,mostpresetbrushesareadequatelyfeathered,butyou'llwanttocheckthisadjustmentwhenusingcustombrushesoranytimeyou'relookingforaveryspecificresult.

FigureB.

Page 132: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

Range

TheRangeoptionallowsyoutotargetthehighlights,midtones,orshadowsofyourimage.Fromanimage-editingstandpoint,thisisthemostvaluableaspectofthesetools.Beingabletotargetthelight,dark,ormediumtonesinyourimagegivesyoutheflexibilitytoadjustcertaintoneswhileleavingothersintact.Italsoallowsyoutousethesametooltoaddressmanydifferentexposureproblemsinyourimagewithouthavingtojuggledifferenttoolswithdifferentsettings.Ifyouhaven'tworkedwitheditingimagesbytheirtonalrangesbefore,trystartingwiththeMidtonesoptiontogetafeelforeachtool.Then,branchouttotheothertwooptionsonceyougetasenseofhoweachtoolaffectsyourimage.

Exposure

TheExposureoptioncontrolsthestrengthofyourtool,whichissimilartoadjustingtheopacityofabrushtogetamoretransparentlook.Rangingfrom1%to100%,thehighernumberscreatethegreatesteffectonyourimage,asshowninFigureC.Usually,youwon'twantthistoolatfullstrengthasitcanquicklycauseblown-outhighlightsormurkyshadows.Startat50%andevaluatetheeffectofthetool.Wetypicallyusesmallerpercentagessuchas20%foraweakereffectandtakemultiplepasseswiththebrushtofine-tuneouradjustment,but

Page 133: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

you'llfindwhatpercentagesworkbestforyouasyougetmorefamiliarwiththesetools.

FigureC.

Note

Beforedodgingorburning,it'sagoodideatoduplicatethelayeryou'llbeworkingonandkeepyouroriginalimageuntouchedforinsurance.Toduplicateyourlayer,selectitintheLayerspaletteandselectDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.GiveyournewlayeranameandclickOK.Sinceyourduplicatedlayerisabovetheoriginallayer,itwon'tgetinthewayvisually,butyoucanturnoffthevisibilityifyouwanttokeepitcompletelyoutofthepicture.

Applyingthetools

Let'stakealookatanexample.TheimageshowninFigureAneedstobedodgedandburnedtocorrectexposureproblems.Whenevaluatinganyimagefortonaladjustments,firstlookforareasthataretoolightortoodark.Inthisimage,thebaseofthemushroomistoolightandtheareaimmediatelytotherightofthebaseisdistractinglydark.Inaddition,therightsideofthemushroomcapislookingabitmuddy,sowe'llalsotrytobringoutthecoloranddetailbyadjusting

Page 134: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

themidtonesinthatarea.

Note

We'regoingtotalkindetailaboutourexample,butifyoufollowalongwithourprocedureyou'llbeabletoeasilyusethesamestepstomakeadjustmentstoyourownimages.

Brighteningthebase

Forthebrightbaseinourimage,selecttheBurntool andtheSoftRound35Pixelsbrush,thensettheRangetoHighlights,andtheExposureto20%.Thisareaoftheimageissooverexposedthatthereisn'tmuchimageinformationthere,sothegoalistolessenthedistractionabitwithoutmakingitlookunnatural.Usingalowpercentage,clickanddragacrossthehighlightedbasetosubtlydarkenit.Besurenottogooverboardorthebasewillbegintolookoverlygray.

Lighteningtheshadowareas

Fortheshadowsnexttothebase,you'llwanttolightenthearea,soswitchovertotheDodgetool .SetthetoolforthesameSoftRound35Pixelsbrush,butchangetheRangetoMidtonesandtheExposureto35%.Next,carefullyclickanddragovertheshadowareatobringoutthedetailsinthewoodandmakeitbalancebetterwiththerestoftheimage.Sincethisisalargerarea,youcanusealargebrush,butasmallerbrushoffersmorecontrol.

Takingthemudoutofthemidtones

Thelastadjustmenttomakeisinthemidtonesofthemushroom'scap.ForthisusethesameDodgetoolsetup,butsettheExposureforamoreaggressive60%.You'llnoticeabigdifferenceinthestrengthoftheeffectwhenyouclickanddragacrossthecap,asiteasilylightensthemidtonesandmakesthecolorsanddetailsmoredistinct.Becarefulwhenadjustingmidtones,astoomuchdodgingcanreducecontrastsandmakeyourimagelookflat.

Page 135: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Goforthetones

Couldwemakemoreadjustments?Sure,theDodgeandBurntoolsallowtheusertobeassubjectiveashewantstobetoperfecthisimage.Withtheabilitytosetthesize,strength,andtargettonalrangeofeachadjustment,dodgingandburningallowyoutomakeveryspecificeditstoyourdigitalimagestomakethemlooktheirverybest.

Page 136: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRestoreunderexposedshadowdetail

Problem:Imageisunderexposed.

Solution:UsetheLevelscommandtobringdetailsoutoftheshadows.

Page 137: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Tobegin,launchPhotoshopandselectanimagetoworkwith.Ourexampleimagefeaturesagroupofbacklitferns.Thelateafternoonsunilluminatesafewfronds,butpartofthestemandthemajorityofthegroupareindeepshadow.Theimagewilllookbetterifwelightenthetonesintheshadowdetailswithoutchangingthetonesinthemidrangeandhighlightareasthatareilluminatedbysunlight.

TheLevelscommand'ssettingsandoptions

Togetstarted,chooseImage Adjustments Levels,andtheLevelsdialogboxopens.TheLevelsdialogboxcontainsanumberofsettingsandoptionsthatallowyoutoadjustthehighlights,midtones,andshadowsofanimage.

AbovetheInputLevelsslidersisahistogramthatrepresentsthepixelquantityoftonallevelsinyourimage.AbovetheOutputLevelsslidersisagrayscalebarthatrepresentsthetonallevelstowhichyoucanresetyourshadowandhighlightpoints.

WorkingwiththeLevelscommandadjustments

Tounderstandthecause-and-effectrelationshipofadjustingthesliders,let'smakeafewsimpleleveladjustmentsandwatchwhathappenstothetonesinourimages.SincetheInputLevelssettingsallowustochangetheindividualhighlight,midtone,andshadowtonalranges,weonlyneedtoadjusttheInputLevelssliders.

Tostart:

1.

Movethehighlightslidertotheleftuntilyoureachavalueofabout155.Asyoudoso,you'llnoticethatjustthehighlightsandmanyoftheuppermidtonesintheimagebecomebrighter.

2. Resetthehighlightsliderto255.

3.Movetheshadowslidertotherightuntilyoureachavalueofabout130.You'llnoticethattheshadowsandmostofthemidtoneshavebecomedarker.

4. Resettheshadowsliderto0.

Finally,movethemidtonesliderfirsttotherighttoavalueof0.50,andthentothelefttoavalueof2.90.Asyoudoso,you'llseethatthemidtonesfirst

Page 138: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. becomedarker,andthenlighter.You'llalsonoticethatthere'sasurprisinglylargeamountofdetailintheshadowareas,whichyoupreviouslyweren'tabletosee.

6. Resetthemidtonesliderto1.00.

Adjustingtheshadowdetail

Nowthatyouhaveafeelingfortheresultsofsettinghighlight,midtone,andshadowInputLevelswiththesliders,let'sadjusttheunderexposedshadow.

1.Movethehighlightslidertotheleftuntilitreachesthetoesectionofthehistogram.Forourexampleimage,thishappensatavalueofabout170.

2.

Movethemidtoneslidertotheleftuntildetailintheshadowareasbecomemorevisible,atabout1.20inourexampleimage,oraccordingtoyourpreference.

3.ClickOKwhenyou'vefinished,andyounowhaveanimageyoucanusehoweveryou'dlike.

Outoftheshadowsandintothelight

TheLevelscommandisasimpleandeasywaytoadjustthetonalvaluesinanimage.It'susefulwhenyouwanttobringoutdetailsintheshadowareascausedbyunderexposureorlowlightingconditions.It'salsousefulinfine-tuningmidtoneandhighlightvalues.Wheneveryouhaveanimageyoulike,butwhichlacksdetailinaparticulartonalarea,usetheLevelscommand.You'llbesurprisedatwhatcomesoutoftheshadows.

Page 139: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRestoreoverexposedphotos

Problem:Lossofdetailinanimage'shighlightareasduetooverexposure.

Solution:UsetheThresholdcommandtorestorewashed-outimages.

Page 140: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Ifthehighlightareasinanoverexposedphotodon'tseemtocontainmuchdetail,thenhowdoestheThresholdcommandhelptorestorethem?Inthesamewayyoucanseeamuchwidertonalrange,thetonalrangeoffilmoranimagesensoriswiderthanyourmonitor.There'susuallyacertainamountofhighlightdetailpresentthatyourmonitorjustcan'tprocess.TheThresholdcommandisabletoisolatethehighlightareasinyourphoto.Then,afteryouselect,copy,andpastethemintoanewlayer,youcanadjustthehighlighttonalleveltoadddetailtothehighlightareasinyourphoto.

Correctforslightoverexposure

Let'scorrectaslightlyoverexposedphoto.Ifyouwanttogothroughthistechniquewithoneofyourimages,makesureyou'reabletoeasilyseethedetailintheshadowareasofyourimagebutnotinthehighlights.

DuplicatetheBackgroundlayer

BecausetheThresholdcommandchangesacolorimageintoahigh-contrastblack-and-whiteimage,wemustfirstduplicatetheBackgroundlayersowecanworkonit.

1. ChooseWindow LayerstoopentheLayerspalette.

2. ClickontheLayerspalette'spop-upmenuandchooseDuplicateLayer.

3.EnterThresholdintheAstextboxoftheDuplicateLayerdialogboxandthenclickOK.

AdjusttheThresholdlevel

1.

ChooseImage Adjustments Thresholdfromthemainmenu,andtheThresholddialogboxopens.You'llnoticethattheThresholdcommandhasconvertedtheThresholdlayerintoahigh-contrastblack-and-whiteimage.TheThresholdLevelsettingdeterminesthetonallevelbreakpointatwhichwhiteareasbecomeblack.Thehigherthesetting,thehigherthebreakpoint.

2.

Movetheslidertoahighervalue.(Weused205forourexampleimage.)Asyoudoso,you'llnoticethatmoreandmoreoftheimageareabecomesblack.Movetheslideruntilonlythehighlightareasremainwhite.

Page 141: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3. ClickOK.

Selectthehighlightareas

1.ChoosetheMagicWandtool fromtheToolboxtopreparetoselectthehighlightareasintheThresholdlayer.

2.EnteraToleranceof15tolimittheareayouselectintheTolerancetextboxfoundontheleftsideofthetooloptionsbar.

3.

SelecttheAnti-aliasedcheckboxtokeeptheedgesofyourselectionniceandsmoothanddeselecttheContiguouscheckboxsotheselectionofvalueswon'tberestrictedtojusttheareayouclickon.

4. Selectawhitehighlightarea,andthenchooseSelect Feather.

5.Enter2intheFeatherRadiustextboxwhentheFeatherSelectiondialogboxopens.

6. ClickOK.

CopyandpastethehighlightsintheBackgroundlayer

1.ClickontheEyeicon ontheleftsideoftheThresholdlayertodeselectit,andthenselecttheBackgroundlayer.

2.Press[Ctrl]C( ContheMac)tocopythehighlightareas,andthenpress[Ctrl]V( VontheMac)topastethemintoanewlayer.

3.Double-clickontheLayer1nameintheLayerspalette,andthenenterHighlightsintheLayerNametextbox.

AdjusttheHighlightslayertonallevel

1. ChooseImage Adjustments Brightness/Contrast.

Page 142: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

LowertheBrightnesstonalvaluebymovingtheBrightnessslidertotheleftwhentheBrightness/Contrastdialogboxopens.Weusedavalueof-40forourexample.

3.ClickOK,andyou'verestoredthedetailinthehighlightareas,asshownintheSolutionimage.

Highlightmanagement

Evenifyoucan'tavoidoverexposedhighlights,youcaneasilyrestoretheimage.Thenexttimeyou'retemptedtogiveuponanoverexposedimage,remembertheThresholdcommand.

Page 143: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 144: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Part2:EssentialImageEditingFixes

Digitalimagesthatcomefromdigitalcamerasorscannerstypicallysufferfromoneoftwoproblems.Eitherthey'retoosoftandrequiresharpeningorthey'retoocrispandrequireblurring.Ineithercase,adjustingthesharpnessofyourimageandmanagingdigitalnoiseiscrucialtocreatingaqualityimage.Whilethesetypesofadjustmentscanbethemosttechnical,they'realsothemostessential.Butdon'tworrywe'llmakesenseofitallforyou.

Chapter3:NoiseandSharpening

AddnoisewiththeAddNoisefilter

Useblendingmodestofixdigitalnoise

Page 145: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Keepyourdigitalimagesnoisefree

BoostclaritywiththeUnsharpMaskfilter

Problem:SolutionRemovenoisewithLabcolor

Problem:SolutionUseabrushwiththeUnsharpMaskfilter

Chapter4:RetouchingTechniques

CorrectimperfectionsindigitalphotoswiththeHealingBrush

RepairandedityourimageswiththePatchtool

CleanupcolorproblemswiththeSpongetool

Fixflawedarchitecturalimages

Problem:SolutionEliminateskinflaws

Problem:SolutionRestorecolortounderexposedareas

Problem:SolutionRemovelinesandwrinkles

Chapter5:OptimizationandSizing

Choosethebestfileformatsfortheweb

Optimizeyourimagestogetthebestwebresults

AdjustJPEGwebqualitywiththeModifyQualitySettingcommand

Makeprecisecroppingselectionsusingguides

OptimizeyourimagesforuseinMicrosoftPowerPoint

Problem:SolutionImproveblurringincompressedwebimages

Problem:SolutionImproveresampledimagesforprint

Page 146: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 147: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter3.Noiseandsharpening

Page 148: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

AddnoisewiththeAddNoisefilter

Sometimesnoiseisagoodthing.Notthe"headnexttoabuzzsaw"typeofnoise,butthecolorfuldinofastreetfairorthecontrolledcommotionofabaseballgame.UsingnoiseinPhotoshopcanalsoproducesuchorganicresults,especiallyifyouusenoisetoaddrealismandrandomnesstoanimage.Ifyouaren'talreadyusingnoiseinPhotoshop,youshouldbe.Ifyouare,keepreadingtolearnaboutwhatelseyoucanaccomplishwithnoise.

Whatisnoise?

Noise,asdefinedbyAdobe,adds"pixelswithrandomlydistributedcolorlevels."Simplyput,noiseimposesarandomvaluetothepixelsthatmakeupanimage.However,therandomnessofnoisedoesn'thavetobeadistraction.Infact,usingnoiseinimagesoftencanhelphideproblemareassuchasbandingandawkwardcloning.ThenoisefiltersinPhotoshop,locatedintheFiltermenu,helptoreducenoiseandeliminatetheeffectsofoverlynoisyimages.Whilethesefilters,whichincludeDespeckle,Dust&Scratches,andMedian,havepositiveattributesoftheirown,theyexisttoremovenoise.We'llconcentrateonthefunofintroducingnoisetoyourimageusingtheAddNoisefilter.

TheAddNoisefiltercomesalive

TheAddNoisefilterwasoriginallycreatedtosimulatethegrainytextureofhigh-speedfilm.Sinceitsintroduction,ithasbeenastapleofseriousimagejockeysbecauseitcandosomuchmore.TheAddNoisedialogbox,showninFigureA,consistsofthestandardpreviewwindowthathelpsgaugetheimpactofyournoiseoptions.Fine-tuningthenoisevaluesisanartinitself,sousethepreviewasmuchaspossible.

FigureA.

Page 149: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheAmountsliderandtextboxintheAddNoisedialogboxworkonan8-bitscale,whichmeansituses256shadesofgraybetweenblackandwhite.Basically,theAmountsliderdetermineshowfarthepixelsinyourimagecandriftfromtheiroriginalcolor.Thistechnicalmumbo-jumboisimportant,butthemostimportantthingtorememberabouttheAmountslideristhathighernumbersmeanhighercontrastbetweenyourpixels,andtherefore,morenoise.

Typesofnoise

Therearetwotypesofnoiseyoucanapply.Thefirst,Uniform,createscompletelyrandomnoise.Thismeansthatanycolorisjustaslikelyasanothertobeusedtoproducetheeffect.Thesecondoption,Gaussian,createsnoisealongtheGaussiancurve,whichresultsinamoreconsistentallocationofnoisevalues.Sincecolorsaresettoaspecificrange,thecolorsofGaussiannoisemorecloselyresemblethecolorsofyourimage.Gaussiannoiseoftencreatesamorerealisticeffect,whileUniformnoisedeliversamoredistinctresult.FigureBshowsasampleofeachofthesenoiseoptionsappliedtoasolidblockof50%gray.

FigureB.

Page 150: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheMonochromaticcheckboxatthebottomofthisdialogboxcontrolsthelookofbothUniformandGaussiannoise.Selectingthisoptionallowsyoutoapplygrayscalenoisetoyourimage.Monochromaticcreatesanevendistributionofnoiseacrossthechannelwithoutchangingthecolors.Ifthischeckboxisn'tselected,thepixelsandcolorsarescatteredrandomlythroughoutalltheavailablechannels.Thisoptionisagoodideawhenyou'reworkingonimageswithareasofsolidcolor,butabadchoiceifyou'retryingtoblendcontrastingareasofcolortogether.Again,usethepreviewwindowtoseeifMonochromaticnoisemakessenseforyourimagingneeds.

Real-worldnoise

Therearemanyreasonstoapplynoiseinyoureverydayimageediting.You'llfindthatnoisecanhelpcorrectmanyproblemscausedbypoorscans,blurrydigitalcameraimages,orstrangerasterization.Inanycase,we'lltakealookatoneofthemostcommonscenariosforusingnoise.Fromthere,youcanbuilduponyourrepertoireandturnthenoiseintoasymphony.

Page 151: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Addinggrain

Asmentionedearlier,theAddNoisefilterwasdesignedtosimulatefilmgraininapixel-basedenvironment.Thisisstilloneofthemostusefulfeaturesofthisfilter,andyoucanuseitinmanywaystoimprovethelookofanimage.Youcanaddnoisetoblurryimagestoincreasecontrast,toblackandwhiteimagestoheightenthevisualmood,tovectorarttoincreasetexture,ortoretouchedimagestoblendineditedareas.Ourexample,showninFigureC,ismissingsomething.Toaddanice"oldphoto"grain,weaddedsomenoisetothisgrayscaleimagetogivetheimagesometextureandpersonality.

FigureC.

Animagingcacophony

Page 152: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TherearemanyotherusesfornoiseinPhotoshop.Forthetimebeing,experimentwithaddingnoisetoyourdesigns.You'llsoonfindnoisealloveryourimages,andthat'sagoodthing.Technically,noisefiltersareconsidereddestructivefiltersbecausethey'reusedtodegradethequalityofanimage.Butthisisn'tnecessarilythecase.Noisehascorrectivevaluesaswell,whenusedproperlyandsubtly.

Page 153: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Useblendingmodestofixdigitalnoise

CorrectingimagesinPhotoshopcanbeatrickybusinessasthere'sadegreeoftrialanderrorinvolved.Becauseofthis,it'sbesttotrytokeepyourchangestothefileeditableandnotpermanentlyembeddedintheimage.Thiswayyoucanmakeadjustmentswitheaseatanypointintheprocess.Photoshopprovidesmanywaystoeditanimagewithoutpermanentlychangingit,particularlywhenyou'redealingwithnoiseinanimagefromadigitalcamera.Oneofthesetechniquesisblendingmodes,whichisalayerfeatureofPhotoshop.Usingblendingmodes,youcansetanormallayertoavarietyofdifferentblendsettingstochangetheappearanceofpixelsonthelayersbelowit.Thisgivesyouaniftywaytofixdigitalnoiseinyourimagewithoutactuallymakingpermanentchanges.

Blendcontrols

We'llbeusingtheOverlay,SoftLight,Hue,andColorblendingmodes.We'lldiscussthemingroups,assomeblendingmodesareverysimilartooneanother.

OverlayandSoftLight

TheOverlayandSoftLightmodesbasicallydothesamething,thoughtheSoftLightmodeismoresubtle.TheOverlaymodeeitherscreensormultipliescolorsdependingonthebasecolorbelowit,whichmeansitmakesyourdarksdarkerandyourwhitesbrighter.It'susefulforbumpingupthecolorcontrastofanimage.

TheSoftLightfilteralsodarkensandlightensthecolorsinthebaseimage,butitsalgorithmisbasedonthevalueoftheblendcolorratherthanonthevaluesofthebasecolor.Thesedetailscanbehardtoremember,butit'seasytorememberthattheSoftLightmodeissortoflikeOverlayLight.IthasthesamegeneraleffectasOverlaybutislessdramatic.

HueandColor

TheonlydifferencebetweentheHueandColorfiltersisthemanagementofsaturation,orthevividnessofthecolors.TheHuesettingappliesonlythehueoftheblendcolortothebasecolors.Thebasecolorretainsitsownsaturationandluminancevalues.WiththeColorsetting,thehueandthesaturationoftheblend

Page 154: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

colorareappliedtothebasecolor.Again,youdon'treallyneedtorememberthespecifics.JustkeepinmindthatHuetypicallyresultsinamoresubtleeffectthanColor.Ingeneral,it'sbesttotrybothwhenattemptingtoaltercolorsinyourdigitalimages.

Noisecorrection

Noiseisafrequentproblemthatdigitalphotographershavetodealwithonaregularbasis.Certainshootingsituationstendtocreateimagesthathavealotofnoise,particularlyintheshadowareasorinunderexposedareas,asshowninFigureA.Thishappensbecausemostconsumer,andevensomehigh-end,digitalcamerashavealimiteddynamicrangethatstrugglesintheshadowareas.

FigureA.

Locatetheproblem

1.

Openanimagethat'shavingsometroublewithcolorednoise.Ifyoucan'tfindonerightoffthebat,lookatimagesyoushotindoorswithaflashorimagesthathaveextensiveshadowareas.

Zoominto200%or300%andyoumightseenoiselikeourrednoiseinFigureB.There'sactuallyquiteabitofnoiseallovertheimage,butitreally

Page 155: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

showsupontheedgesofobjectswherethere'slikelytobesharptonaltransitions.Youmayalsonoticethiseffectonimagesthathaveundergonealotofsharpeningorhadalotofcorrection.

FigureB.

Thebenefitsofblur

Theeasiestwaytocorrectrandomcolorednoiseistouseablurredcopyoftheimagetoknockoutthenoise.Totrythis:

1.

.AccesstheLayerspaletteandduplicatetheimagebydraggingtheBackgroundlayerontotheCreateANewLayerbutton .TheBackgroundcopylayerappearsandisselectedautomatically.

2. ChooseFilter Blur GaussianBlur.

3.Setalowblurradiusofabout2pixelsintheresultingdialogbox.Youdon'ttypicallyneedalargesettingtofixthesubtlenoisewe'retargeting.

ClickOKandsettheblendingmodeoftheBackgroundCopylayertoColor.Thisappliesthecoloroftheimagetoyouroriginal,butdoesn'taffectsharpness.YoucanseeourresultsinFigureC.Asyoucansee,toningdownthenoiseinimagesisn'ttoodifficultanditresultsinasignificantlybetterimage.

Page 156: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureC.

Theabovemethodwon'tworkforallimages.Onoccasion,you'llfindthatitactuallycreatesmoregeneralnoiseevenasitfixesthecolorednoiseproblem.Becauseofthis,youmayneedtoadapttheblurringmethodtouselocallyratherthanontheentireimage.YoucanalsousetheErasertool toeraseportionsofthelayerthatareunnecessaryifyouthinkit'scausingstrangeeffects.

Changecolorswithease

YoucanalsoeasilyremovecolorswiththeColorandHueblendingmodes.Todoso:

1.

Openanimagethathasaspotofcoloryouwanttoremove.OntheleftinFigureD,youcanseeabrownspotatthetopoftheleafthatwewanttoremove.

FigureD.

Page 157: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.CreateanewlayerandthensampleagoodreplacementtonefromtheimagewiththeEyedroppertool .Weselectedanearbyshadeofgreen.

3. SelecttheBrushtool andpaintoverthespotonthenewlayer.

4.

SettheblendingmodeofthelayertoHueorColortoseewhichworksbest.Inourcase,Huecorrectedthecolorperfectly,asyoucanseeontherightinFigureD

Blendaway

Asyoucansee,blendingmodesareusefulforbothcorrectingyourimagesandaddingfunvisualeffects.We'veonlytouchedonafewofthepossibleeffectsyoucancreatewithblendingmodes.Withalittleexperimentation,you'llundoubtedlyfindmorereasonstouseblendingmodeswhenworkingwithyourdigitalimages.

Page 158: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Keepyourdigitalimagesnoisefree

Digitalnoiseisoneofthebiggestproblemsfacedbydigitalphotographers.Thegoodnewsisthatyoucanavoidit.ThefirstthingtodoisconsideryourISOsetting.HigherISOsettingstendtodisplaymoredigitalnoisethandigitalimagestakenatlowerISOsettings.ThefixistolowerthissettingtoISO200orISO100,ifpossible,whichreducesthecamera'ssensitivitytolight.Butthisisn'talwaysthecauseofnoise.Whileavoidingnoisemightbeimpossible,herearefewothersuspectstoconsiderwhentryingtoquietdownyournoisyimages:

Underexposedimages.Ifanimagesensorcan'tgetenoughlighttocaptureanaccuratereading,it'slikelytomisinterpretthesignalandproducenoise.Youcanfixthisbyincreasingyourexposurecompensationoryourshutterspeed.

Blueskies.Forverytechnicalreasons,digitalcamerasandblueskiesdon'tgetalong.First,thesubtlecolorshiftsandlargeareasofuniformcolorcancausenoisetodevelopasthesensortriestoreproducethegentlegradient.AnotherfactoristheinfraredfilteronmostCCDsensors,whichtendstoincreasethesensitivitytotheblueendofthespectrum.Thereisn'tmuchyoucandotofixthisoutsideofanimage-editingprogram,butcameratechnologyisimprovingeveryday!

Automaticsharpening.Somecamerasletyouapplyasharpeningfiltertoyourimagesduringcapture,whichcanemphasizenoise.Tryreducingtheamountofsharpeningorsimplyturningoffthisfeature.

Shadows.Whenadigitalcameraevaluatesascene,itadjuststheexposuretogetthebestoverallimagequality.However,shadowsoftenbecomenoisy,especiallywhenamajorityofthesceneisbright.Considerusingyourcamera'smanualsettingsorslightlyunderexposingtheshot.Youcanlightenuptheremainderoftheimagelaterinyourimage-editingsoftware.

Page 159: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

BoostclaritywiththeUnsharpMaskfilter

Whenitcomestosharpeninganimage,thingscangetalittlehairy,especiallyifyouaren'tsureofthebestapproachtotake.Althoughmuchdependsontheimageitself,thereareafewtechniquesyoucanuseonallofyourimagestoboostdetailandcrispness.Often,imagesloseclarityduringthephotographicprocessorwhenthey'rescanned.Becauseofthis,PhotoshopcomesequippedwithafilterknownasUnsharpMask(USM).Thisfilterisidealwhenitcomestoredefiningimagery.

Keepinmindthatthisfilterisn'tamiracleworker.Youcan'ttakealow-resolutionimagethat'sblurryorpixelatedandturnitintoahigh-qualityimage,butyoucantakeadecentimageandmakeitreallysharpwithafewclicksofthemouse.And,onceyouhaveathoroughunderstandingofhowtheUSMfilterworks,you'llbeabletofocusyourimageswithouteverfeelingunclear.

Themeaningbehindthename

Youmaybewonderingwhywe'reusingafiltercalledUnsharpMasktosharpenthings.Well,thetermactuallystemsfrompre-Photoshoptime,whenpeopleworkedindarkrooms.Aseparatorwouldfirstmakeacontactnegativeofanoriginal,andthen,tosoftenthemask,areproartistwouldplaceasheetoffrostedMylar®betweentheoriginalandthemaskingfilm.Thissoftmaskmadetheimagelooksharpwithoutbeingoverdone.

ThedigitalUnsharpMask

TounderstandhowtheUSMfilterworks:

1. OpenanimageinPhotoshop.Itcanbeanysizeandcolor.

ChooseFilter Sharpen UnsharpMasktodisplaytheUnsharpMaskdialogboxshowninFigureA.You'llnoticethattherearethreedifferentcontrolsyoucanadjustAmount,Radius,andThreshold.Let'stakeacloserlookateachofthese.

FigureA.

Page 160: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Amount

TheAmountslideraffectsthesharpnessofyourimage.Thehigherthepercentage,themorecontrastthereisbetweenpixels.Forhigh-resolutionprintedimages,youshouldstaywithin130to200percent.Ifyou'resharpeningfortheweb,youcanadjusttheimageuntilitlooksadequateonscreen.And,ifyou'reusingadigitaloutputdevice,settheAmountslidertoapercentagethat'slowerthanorcloseto75.

Radius

Radiusdetermineshowmanypixelssurroundingtheedgeswithinyourimageareaffected.Alowervaluesharpenstheedgepixelsandahighervaluesharpensawiderband.Forhigh-resolutionimages,werecommendaRadiusbetween1and2.AnotherwaytodeterminetheRadiusistodividetheprinter'soutputresolutionby200andthenplugthatnumberintotheRadiustextbox.IfyousettheRadiustoohigh,yourimagewillactuallylosedetailandlookasifit'soverexposed.

Threshold

Page 161: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheThresholdlevelsdeterminehowdifferentthesharpenedpixelshavetobefromthesurroundingpixelsbeforethey'resharpenedaswell.Forexample,aThresholdlevelof10won'taffectanypixelorcolorvaluethat'swithin10levelvaluesoftheedgepixels.Usingavaluebetween3and10isasafebet.BykeepingtheThresholdvaluelow,you'llavoidsharpeningareasoraddingexcessnoisetoyourimagesthatdon'twarrantit,suchasskinorshadowareas.

Applythefilter

Nowthatyouknowthenitty-grittyoftheUSMfilter,it'stimetotestitout.

1.EnteryourAmount,Radius,andThresholdvaluesintheUnsharpMaskdialogbox.

2.MakesurethePreviewcheckboxisselectedsoyoucanseehowthefilteraffectsyourimage.

3.Trydraggingtheslidersbackandforthtoseehoweachoneworksonitsownandcombinedwithoneanother.

4.Whenyou'rehappywiththeendresults,clickOKtoapplythefiltertoyourimage.

FigureBshowshowweadjustedouroriginalimageusingthepropervaluesforeachcontrolandthenhowweoverdiditbyincreasingthevalues.Ifyouover-sharpenanimage,itwillappearasiftherearehalosaroundeverything,sotakeyourtimeandprintoutsampleproofsbeforesavingthefinalimage.

FigureB.

Page 162: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Controlledsharpening

Now,we'lltakethingsastepfurtherandintroduceatechniquethatgivesyoumorecontrolastowherethesharpeningtakeshold.Tobegin:

OpenanewRGBimageinPhotoshoporanunsharpenedcopyoftheimage

Page 163: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1. youpreviouslyadjusted.

2.

ClickontheChannelspalette.(Ifthepaletteishidden,youcandisplayitbychoosingWindow Channels.)Forthistechnique,we'llmakeaspecificselectiontoapplytheUSMfilterto.

3.

ClickoneachchannelandselecttheonewiththehighestamountofcontrastandmakeacopybydraggingitontotheCreateNewChannelbutton atthebottomofthepalette.YourChannelspaletteshouldresemblethatshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

4. SelectyournewchannelandthenchooseFilter Stylize FindEdges.

5.InvertthechannelbychoosingImage Adjustments Invertorbypressing[Ctrl]I( IontheMac).

6. ChooseFilter Noise Median.

EnteraRadiusbetween1and3todefinetheelementswithinyourimageintheresultingMediandialogbox,showninFigureD.

Page 164: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

7.

FigureD.

8. ClickOK.

AdjusttheMaximum

Now,we'lladdabitofgirthtothoselineswiththeMaximumfilter.Todoso:

1. ChooseFilter Other Maximum.

EnteraRadiusof4or5intheresultingMaximumdialogbox,showninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 165: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

3. ClickOK.

Totonethingsdownabit,let'saddaGaussianBlur.

1. ChooseFilter Blur GaussianBlur.

2. EnteraRadiusof5.

3. ClickOK.

4.ClickontheRGBchannelintheChannelspaletteandloadyourchannelmaskbypressing[Ctrl][Alt]4( [option]4ontheMac).

5.MakesureyourselectionisactiveandthenapplytheUSMfilterwithsettingssimilartowhatweusedbefore.

6. ClickOK.

Deselecttheimageandsaveitasanewdocument.FigureFshowshowthistechniqueimprovesthedetailinourimage.Toseethedifference,openyouroriginalfileandplaceitnexttoyournewimage;it'ssubtlebutsignificant.

FigureF.

Page 166: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

7.

Note

ForinformationonhowtocreativelyusetheUnsharpMaskfiltertofixyourimages,seetheProblem:Solution"UseabrushwiththeUnsharpMaskfilter"attheendofthischapter.

It'scrystalclearnow

Asafinalwordofadvice,waittosharpenyourimagesuntilyou'redonewitheverythingelse.Also,alwayssaveacopyofyouroriginalunsharpenedversion,justincaseyourspecsdon'tmatchtheprinter'sspecsoryouwanttomakeanyotherfinaladjustments.And,keepinmindthatwhenitcomestothisfilter,youcandefinitely"gotoofar,"sobealittlestingy.

Page 167: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRemovenoisewithLabcolor

Problem:Noiseonthebluechannelinadigitalimage.

Solution:UsetheLabcolorspace.

Page 168: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Whenshootingwithadigitalcamera,it'sinevitablethatyou'llfindsomenoiseinyourimages.ByusingPhotoshopandtheappropriatecolorspace,youcanremovetheseunwantedartifactsandpreserveyourimagequality.

Therearemanyreasonsnoisedevelops,butthere'soneculprityoucanalmostalwayscounton.Digitalcamerasaresensitivetoultravioletlight,sousuallyabluefilterisaddedtothesensortohelpreduceUV'seffect.Theby-productofthistechniqueisthatthesensorisoverlysensitivetothebluespectrum,increasingthepossibilityfornoiseinthebluechannel.Removingartifactsfromthebluechannelcancausedestructiveeffectstotheoveralldetailoftheimage,makingitachallengetoreducethisnoiseintheRGBcolor.Forthatreason,weturntotheLabcolorspaceforthisexample.

Page 169: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Workinthelab

Theoretically,theLabcolorspacecontainseverycolorthehumaneyecanseeandtheentiregamutofRGBandCMYK.It'sanexcellentcolorspaceforeditingdigitalimages,asitdoesn'thavesomeofthecolorlimitationsoftheothercolorspaces.Labcolorcomesinquitehandywhentargetingnoise,asitbreaksdowntheimageintospecificcriteria.

TheLabcolorspaceiscomprisedofaluminositychannelandtwochromaticranges,calledaandb.Theluminositychannelrepresentstheblackandwhiteinformationinyourimage,aswellasthelightness.Theachannelbasicallycontainsyourgreensthroughred,whilethebchannelrangesfrombluetoyellow.Sincedigitalnoiseiscontainedinthechromaticchannels,wecanedittheaandbchannelswhilekeepingourblackandwhitedetailintact.Otherwise,we'dhavetoadjusteitherasinglecolorchannel(Red,Green,orBlue)ortheentireimage,makingithardertopreserveimagedetailwhilereducingnoise.

ConverttoLabmode

TheconversiontoandfromLabmodeisveryclean.WhilegoingfromRGBtoCMYKcancausemuddycolors,transformingyourcolorspacetoLabisquickandpainless.

1. OpentheimageyouwishtoworkwithinPhotoshop.

2. SelectImage Mode LabColor.

3.

OpentheChannelspalettebyselectingWindows ChannelsandviewyourLabchannels.Here,youcanseetheLightness,a,andbchannels,aswellasaLabchannelthatproducesthefullcolorcompositeimage.

Adjustthechannels

ThefirststeptofixingournoisyimageistoviewthespecificLabchannelwe'retargeting.

1. ReturntotheChannelspaletteandclickontheachanneltomakeitactive.

Pressthetildekey(~)toseethefullcolorimagewhilekeepingtheachannel

Page 170: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2. active.Nowwecanseetheentireimage,buttheadjustmentswemakeareonlyappliedtotheachannel.

3. SelectFilter Blur GaussianBlurtoopentheGaussianBlurdialogbox.

4.

Selectyourblurradius.Theamountofblurringyouapplytoyourimagedependsontheamountofnoiseandthelevelofdetailyou'rewillingtosurrender.Takeadvantageofthepreviewwindowtotestoutdifferentblurvalues.Also,beawarethatwe'llbeblurringthenoisypixelsinthebchannel,sodon'tgooverboardwhenworkingontheachannel.Inourimage,theartifactsontheachannelaremoderate,soweselectedablurradiusof3.9pixels.

5. ClickOKtoapplythefilter.

6. ReturntotheChannelspaletteandswitchtothebchannel.

7.

OpentheGaussianBlurdialogboxagainandapplyablurradiusof1.5pixels.Rememberhowwesaidthatthebchannelcontainsyourbluesthroughyellows.Thehigherradiusismoreaggressivetowardourimage,butsincethisiswherethemostnoticeablenoiseis,thisaggressiveapproachiswarranted.

Lookunsharp!

Nowthatwe'veblurredouraandbchannels,it'sagoodideatosharpenupthedetailsintheLightnesschanneltocounteracttheblurandkeeptheimagelookingcrispoverall.

1. SelecttheLightnesschannel.

2.

OpentheUnsharpMaskdialogboxbyselectingFilter Sharpen UnsharpMask.TheUnsharpMaskdialogboxalsooffersadjustablecontrolsandapreviewwindow.

Forourimage,wesettheAmountsliderto125%,theradiusto1.3,andtheThresholdto6levels.Again,eachimageisdifferent,sobeflexibleandtrydifferentcombinationstogetthebestresult.

OurProblemandSolutionimagesshowRGBversionsofanenlargedportionofourimagebeforeandafterweappliedourfilters.We'vereducedthenoisewithoutoverlyblurringtheimageandlosingdetail.Bytakingthetimetoadjustthe

Page 171: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

imageonechannelatatime,wecankeeptheimagelookinggoodwhileminimizingthedetrimentaleffectsofnoise.

Page 172: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionUseabrushwiththeUnsharpMaskfilter

Problem:Imageneedssharpfocalpointandsoftbackground.

Solution:UsetheHistoryBrushtool

Page 173: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheSharpentoolismeanttocreategreatercontrastinveryfineareas,suchasthediamondinanimageofaring,whiletheSharpenfiltersaffecttheentireimage.There'snomiddleground.So,whatdoyoudowhenyou'refacedwithanimagelikeourProblemimagewhereyouwantthesnowboardertobesharpandthebackgroundtoremainsoft?There'sasolution,andwe'llshowittoyou.

ApplytheUnsharpMaskfilter

1. Opentheimageyouwishtoworkwith.

2. ChooseFilter Sharpen UnsharpMask.

3.ClicktwiceontheplussignjustbelowthepreviewwindowintheUnsharpMaskdialogboxtoincreasethemagnificationto300percent.

4.

Placeyourmousepointeroverthepreviewwindowandclickanddragtheresultinghandicon tomovetheportionoftheimageyouwishtoworkwithintoview.

5.

Settheoptionsasnecessary.Forourexample,workingwiththesnowboarderimage,wechose161fortheAmount,1.2fortheRadius,and5fortheThreshold.

6. ClickOKtoapplyyoursettings.

Note

Theimageinyourpreviewwindowmaylookpixelated.Thisisbecauseyoursampleimageissetatamuchlowerresolutionthanourprintedversion.

Takeapicture

Asnapshotisatemporarycopyyoucanmakeofanimagetopreserveaparticularstateofitsprogress.SnapshotsarestoredintheHistorypalette.Totakeasnapshotofyourimageinitscurrentlysharpenedstate:

Page 174: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.AccesstheHistorypalette(chooseWindow Historyifitisn'talreadyopen)andclicktheCreateNewSnapshotbutton .

2.ClickontheOpenstateintheHistorypalettetostepbackwardandremovetheeffectsoftheUnsharpMaskfilter.

Paintfrommemory

ThefinalstepistousetheHistoryBrushtoolandthehistorystatesavedinyoursnapshottoapplytheUnsharpMaskfiltereffectonlytothenecessaryarea.Todothis:

1. SelecttheHistoryBrushtool fromtheToolbox.

2.ClickonthedownarrownexttotheBrushthumbnailonthetooloptionsbartoopentheBrushPresetPicker.

3. Double-clickontheSoftRound100pixelstip.

4.ChooseNormalfromtheModedropdownlistandsettheOpacityto100%andtheFlowto30%.

5.SetSnapshot1asthesourcefortheHistoryBrushtoolbyclickingintheboxtoitsleftintheHistorypalette.

6.

Clickanddragthebrushoveryourimage.Everytimeyoudragthebrushoverthearea,thefilterisreapplied;soyouonlyneedtodothisonce.Otherwise,youmightover-sharpentheimage.AsshowninourSolutionimage,yoursnowboarderisnowcrystalclearandthebackground'sdiffusedappearanceremainsintact.

Makeadifference

AsusefulastheSharpenfiltersare,sometimestoomuchofagoodthingisjustthattoomuch.Noteveryimagecallsforclean,crispedges.Andsometimes,onlypartofanimageneedssharpening.Usingthetechniquewe'veshown,youcannowcreatesubtledifferencesbetweentheforegroundandbackgroundareasinyourimages.

Page 175: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 176: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 177: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter4.RetouchingTechniques

Page 178: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CorrectimperfectionsindigitalphotoswiththeHealingBrush

Haveyouevercomeacrossanimagethatwouldbeperfecttouseexceptthere'saspotlocatedrightinthemiddleofyoursubject?Aspeckofdust,ascratchedpaintjob,orasmudgeofdirtcanallrenderyourimagelessthandesirable.Butyoudon'thavetoletalittlespotruinanentireimage.TheHealingBrushtoolisagreattoolforcorrectingthesetypesofimperfections.WiththeHealingBrush,youcantouchupaproblemarea,makingitblendintothesurroundingimage,andavoidhavingtoreshootasubjectorhavingtouseadifferentimage.

Selectapracticephoto

1.

GothroughyourarchivesandfindagoodcandidateforretouchingwiththeHealingBrushtool,suchastheexampleshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

2. LaunchPhotoshopandopenyourfile.

3. Takeafewmomentstoanalyzeyourimage.

Ourexampleisadaffodilwithanumberofdirtspotsandotherblemishes.Thesurfaceoftheflowerissmoothandwithoutbusydetail.Theflowerissoftlylit

Page 179: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

fromthetopwithonlyahintofshadowunderthepetals.Becausethelightingislow-keyandgradual,anyretouchingyoudohastocopythecolorvalueofthepetalsandmatchtheverysubtlechangeintonevalueasitgraduatesfromtoptobottom.

WhyusetheHealingBrushtool?

Ifyouweretouse,say,theBrushtool,youcouldmatchthecolorvalueatanyonepoint,butyou'dhavetoconstantlyresampleitasyoumoveacrossagraduatedarea.Theprocesswouldbeslowandtedious.IfyouweretousetheCloneStamptool,you'dbeabletostrokeyourimagefromaclonedsample.However,theCloneStampdoesn'tintegratecolorintotheimage,soitcanbehardtomakeclonedareasmatchwithitssurroundings.TheHealingBrushtoolnotonlymatchesaparticularvalue,butitalsoblendsyourstrokesintothesurroundingimage,matchinglightingaswellasshading.

Chooseyouroptions

Tostart,weneedtomakeaduplicateoftheBackgroundlayertoworkon.Byswitchingbackandforthbetweentheduplicateandoriginal,wecancheckontheprogressofourretouchingefforts.

1. ClickontheLayerspalette'spop-upmenuandselectDuplicateLayer.

2.

EnterHealingBrushintheAstextboxoftheDuplicateLayerdialogbox.Sincethedestinationfortheduplicatelayeristhefileyoucurrentlyhaveopen,leavetheDocumenttextboxunchanged.

3. ClickOK.

4.

Startatthetopofyourimageandworkyourwaydown.Whenretouchinganimagewithmanycorrections,suchasourflowerexample,it'sbesttostartatoneedgeandsystematicallyworkyourwayacrossthesubject.Thisway,youleavenothingoutthatrequiresretouching.

5.GototheToolboxandselecttheZoomtool togetacloserlookattheareayou'regoingtoworkon.

Locateyourmousepointeroverwhereyouwanttozoominandclickseveraltimesuntilyoucancomfortablyseeanareayouwanttoretouch,asshowninFigureB.

Page 180: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureB.

Beginthehealing

1.

GototheToolboxselecttheHealingBrushtool ,andinthetooloptionsbar,asshowninFigureC,setyourtooloptions.Forabreakdownofeachsettinganditspurpose,seethesidebarbelow.

FigureC.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

SelectthesamplepointinyourimagesincetheHealingBrushtoolworksbyusingapixelsampleinyourimageforretouching.Thetonevaluesinour

Page 181: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

examplebeginatthetopandgraduallydarkenastheyreachthebottom.Sincethevaluesaboveandbelowtheareatoberetoucheddiffermuchmorethanthevaluesateitherside,selectasamplepointoneithertheleftorrightoftheretoucharea,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

HealingBrushtooloptionsbar

Brush.TheBrushdropdownlistsetsavarietyofbrushpropertyvalues.TheDiameterslidersetsthediameterofyourbrushandismeasuredinpixels(px).TheHardnessslidersetstheedgehardnessorsoftnessofyourbrush.Thehigheryousetthevalue,theharderyourbrush.TheSpacingvaluesetsthedistancebetweenbrushmarksappliedtotheimage.Thehigheryousetthevalue,thegreaterthedistance.TheAnglevaluesetstheangleofthemajoraxisofthebrushmark.TheRoundnessvaluesetsthecircularshapeofthebrushmark.At100%,theshapeisaperfectcircle.At50%,theshapeisanoval.TheSizevaluesetsthewaythebrushsizevariesoverthecourseofastroke.WiththeOffvalueset,thebrushsizedoesn'tvary.WiththePenPressurevalueset,thebrushsizevariesastothesettingchosenforapressure-sensitivedigitizingtablet.WiththeStylusWheelvalueset,thesizevariesastothepositionofthepenthumbwheel.Forourexample,weusedaDiameterof20px,aHardnessof75%,aSpacingof50%,anAngleof0°,aRoundnessof100%,andtheSizeoptionsettoOff.

Mode.TheModedropdownlistsetstheblendingvalueofthebrushstroke.Forourexample,chooseReplaceto

Page 182: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

preservethetextureandfilmgrainattheedgesofthebrushstroke.

Source.TheSourceoptionssetthepixelsourceusedforretouchingyourimage.TheSampledoptionbuttonusespixelsfromthecurrentimage,andthePatternoptionbuttonusespixelsfromthePatternpalette.SettheSourceoptionforSampledtouseadjacentpixels.

Aligned.TheAlignedoptionallowsyoutoreleaseyourmousebuttonwithoutlosingyourcurrentsamplepoint,sothesampledsourcepixelsremainthesamenomatterhowmanytimesyoustopandstartyourbrushstroke.Forourexample,selecttheAlignedcheckboxtousethepixelsourcevaluesadjacenttotheimageareasyouwishtoretouch.

3.

Positionyourmousepointeronyoursampleareaand[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac)withyourmousetosettheHealingBrushsamplepoint.Now,youcanbeginretouchingwiththeHealingBrushtool,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

4.

Moveyourmousepointerovertheareayouwanttoretouchandclickonit.Whenyou'vefinishedwithonearea,movetoanother,rememberingtoresampleanadjacentpointeachtimeyoumove.

5. Continueretouchinguntilyouthinkyou'realmostfinished.

Stopandzoomoutsoyoucanseeyourentireimage,asshowninFigureF,

Page 183: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

andexaminewhatyou'vedone.There'sanaturaltendencytooverdoretouching,especiallywhenyou'rezoomedinonanarea.Aswementioned,thepurposeoftheHealingBrushtoolistocorrectblemishesandimperfectionsinyourimage.Itisn'tusedtopaintorairbrushtheimagetoperfection.Forthateffect,youuseadifferentsetofPhotoshoptools.

FigureF.

Asyouworkonyourimage,constantlyevaluateyourprogressandbecarefulnottooverworkyourretouching.Ifyoulookattheretoucheddaffodil,you'llnoticethatthedirtandblemishesaregone,butthere'sstillaslightunevennessinthegraduatedtonalityfromthetoptothebottom.That'sokay;itgivestheflowerarealisticappearance.

Note

Lookingtoretouchaportrait?CheckouttheProblem:Solution"Removelinesandwrinkles"attheendofthischapter.

Thehealingpowerofthebrush

Page 184: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Asyou'veseen,theHealingBrushtoolisaterrifichelpinghandinremovingimperfectionsfromanimageyoumightotherwisefindunusable.Notonlywillyoubenefitbyhavingawiderselectionofsubjectstochoosefrom,butyoualsowon'thavetospendadditionaltimeandexpensereshootingorbuyinganimage.It'salsogreattofiximperfectionsinportraitsandproductshots.

Page 185: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

RepairandedityourimageswiththePatchtool

Soyou'researchingthroughyourimagefilesforafewshotstouseasabackgroundphotoforaproject.Youfindwhatyou'relookingfor,atreebacklitbythelateafternoonsun,butitisn'tquiteperfectgiventhatitdoesn'thavemanyleaves.UsingPhotoshop'sPatchtool,youcanenhanceasetupthatnaturemayhaveshortchangedandmakeitlookjustasyouthinkitshould.AfewminuteswiththePatchtoolmightsaveyoutheexpenseofanothershootoranonlinestockshot.

Practice,practice

1.

Openapracticeimagethathasgoodcolorcontrastandwell-texturedareas,suchastheoneshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

2.MakeaduplicatelayerofyouroriginalimagebyselectingDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

3.

EnterpatchintheAstextboxandthenclickOK.Wewanttocreateaduplicatelayersowecancomparethetwobyswitchingbackandforthbetweenthem.

Page 186: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

SelectthePatctool fromtheToolbox,andyou'llseethetooloptionsbar,asshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

ComparedtomanyoftheothertoolsintheToolbox,thePatchtoolhasonlyafewoptionstoselectfrom,whichareasfollows:

Source.AppliesimageorpatternpixelsselectedwiththePatchtooltotheimageafterfirstselectingtheareatoberepaired.

Destination.AppliestheimagepixelsselectedwiththePatchtooltotheareatoberepaired.

UsePattern.ThisisactiveonlywhentheSourceoptionisselected.Afterselectingtheimagepixelstoberepaired,gototheUsePatterndropdownlistandselectapixelpatternwithwhichyouwanttorepairanarea.

5.

SelecttheDestinationoptionbuttonfirst,asit'seasiertounderstandtheprocessforthisoption.Inourexample,there'sanopenareaintheupper-leftquarteroftheimage,asshowninFigureC,whichwewanttofillwithafewsprayedgraffitisymbols.Ifyouweretoselectpixelsfromthearearightaboveit,itwouldberatherobviousthattheopenareahasbeenrepaired.Ifyouselectpixelsfromanothersimilararea,it'slessapparent.Thesymbolsfromthelower-rightsideoftheimagehaveasimilarcolorbalanceandwouldbeagoodareafromwhichtoselectpixels.

FigureC.

Page 187: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Clickanddragaroundthepixelsyouwanttouseforyourpatch,asshowninFigureD1,anddragtheselectiontotheareatoberepaired,asshowninFigureD2.Thepatchisapplied,andliketheHealingBrushtool,thePatchtoolmatchesthetexture,lighting,andshadingoftheareatoberepairedtotheselectedpixels,asshowninFigureD3.

FigureD1.

FigureD2.

Page 188: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureD3.

Afterapplyingthepatch,you'llnoticethemarqueearoundthepatchisstillvisible.That'sbecauseyoucanonceagainmovetheselectedpixelstoanotherareaandapplythePatchtool,asshowninFigureE.Youcandothisasmanytimesasyoulike,andeachtimethePatchtoolmatchestheselectedpixelstotheareatoberepaired.Positionyourmousepointeroutsidethemarqueeandclicktoapplythepatchwhenyou'vefinishedmakingyourselection.

FigureE.

Page 189: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

RepairingwiththePatchtool

Iftheselectedpixelshaveadistinctiveshapeandareappliedmultipletimes,asshowninFigureE,thePatchtoolrepairwillhavearubber-stampedlook.It'sbestthatwitheachrepairapplication,youselectanewsetofpixels,evenifit'sfromthesamearea.You'llalsonoticethatyoumighthavetoapplythePatchtoolanumberoftimesintheareatoberepairedtobuilduptheselectedpixelstoachievethepropervisualdensity,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Page 190: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PatchtoolcontrolwiththeFreeTransformfeature

Let'sgotothetreeexamplewementionedearlier,asshowninFigureG.Noticethatinthetopsectionoftheimage,thereareopenareasthatwe'dliketoseefilledbyleaves.Theproblemisthattherereallyaren'tmanypixelchoicesinthephotoyoucanusetorepair.Theleavesimmediatelybelowandtotheleftandrightmatchthecolorandthelighting,butifyouselectthem,thefinishedrepairwilllookasiftheleaveshavebeenrubber-stamped.Theansweristousethatareaforpixelselections,butmanipulatetheselectionsbeforeapplyingtherepairtovarytherepairusingtheFreeTransformfeature.Tostart:

1.OpentheimageyouwishtoworkwithandmakeacopyoftheBackgroundlayertoworkonaswedidforthegraffitiimage.

2.SelectthePatchtoolfromtheToolboxandselecttheDestinationoptionbuttononthetooloptionsbar.

3.

Selecttherepairpixels.Wechosethemfromthesectionbelowthebranches,asshowninFigureH1.

FigureH1.

ChooseEdit FreeTransformfromthemenubarandanobjectframeappearsaroundyourpixelselection,asshowninourexampleinFigureH2.Now,youcantransformthepixelselectionasyouwouldanyotherobject.Forourexample,werotatedtheleavesandscaledthemdownbydraggingthelower-rightframehandlewiththemousepointer,asshowninFigureH3.

Page 191: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureH2.

FigureH3.

5. Press[Enter]andtherepairpixelselectiontransforms.

Dragthepixelselectiontotheareatoberepaired,asshowninFigureI1,releaseyourmousebutton,asshowninFigureI2,andthepatchisapplied,asshowninFigureI3.Asbefore,youmayhavetomakeanumberofpixelselectionstofullyrepairthearea,asshowninFigureI4.

FigureI1.

Page 192: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureI2.

FigureI3.

Page 193: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureI4.

7.

Stepbackandviewyourphotoasawholeonceyou'vefinished.DoesthePatchtoolrepairlooknatural,matchingitssurroundings?

Istherelogictothelighting,color,andtexture?Ifso,yourrepairwillbehardtodetect,asshowninFigureJ.

FigureJ.

Page 194: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureG.

Patchingup

ThePatchtoolisagreatwaytosaveyourselfexpenseandeffortbyimprovingonexistingimages.Amissingclumpofgrassorbunchofflowers,forexample,willneveragainbeareasonforgivinguponanimage.YoucanfixsuchissueswithPhotoshoptogettheexactimageyouwant.

Page 195: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CleanupcolorproblemswiththeSpongetool

YoumayusePhotoshopforanumberofreasons:tocreatenewgraphics,alterexistingimages,orretouchproblemphotos.Onetoolthat'softenoverlookedforretouchingistheSpongetool.TheSpongetoolisusedtoworkwithcolor,usuallyinaphoto.Specifically,youcanuseittoincreaseanddecreasecolorsaturation.Colorisapowerfulsensation,especiallyinaphotograph,asshowninFigureA.Therichcolordrawstheviewerintothecomposition.Itinvitestheeyetomovefromoneareatoanotherandtoinvestigateeachsubjectindividually.Thecolorunifiesthecompositionaswellandgivesitasenseoffullness.

FigureA.

Colornotonlyenhancestheassetsofaphoto,butalsoaddstoitinwayscompositionandtexturecan't.Colorqualityisthereforeimportanttothesuccessofthefinishedwork,andachievingitisassignificantaschoosingjusttherightlocationforashot.Wheneverythingfallsintoplace,great!Whenitdoesn't,youcanusetheSpongetooltowipeawayavarietyofwoesandworries.

Understandingcolorsaturation

Page 196: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Whenwetalkaboutcolor,wegenerallyusethreeterms:hue,lightness,andsaturation.Eachdescribesadifferentpropertyofanindividualcolor.It'simportanttounderstandthedifferencesinthetermstounderstandthemeaningofcolor.

Hue.Thisisthecolorspectrumvalue,whichisdescribedintermsofred,orange,yellow,green,cyan,blue,violet,andmagenta,asshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

Lightness.Thisistheintensityvalue,whichisdescribedintermsofanyhuetoblackortowhite,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Saturation.Thisisthepurityvalue,whichisdescribedintermsofgraytofullvalue,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 197: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Saturationistherelativemixture,orproportion,ofgraytoahue.It'susuallyexpressedasapercentfrom0(fullygray)to100(fullysaturated).Animagethathasasaturationof0percentappearsblackandwhite,asshowninFigureE1.Animagethathasasaturationrangeofabout40to75percentappearsnormal,asshowninFigureE2.Animagethathasasaturationof100percentappearsalmostartificial,asshowninFigureE3.

FigureE1.

FigureE2.

FigureE3.

Page 198: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

WorkingwiththeSpongetool

Asmentionedearlier,youcanusetheSpongetooltoincreaseanddecreasecolorsaturation.OurexampleshowninFigureFisalittleflat,sowe'llusetheSpongetooltorevitalizethisbunchofgrapes.

FigureF.

Previewingimagesaturationanddesaturation

TheSpongetoolaffectstheimagecolorinanareaasdefinedbythebrushsize.Butbeforewegetintoactuallyretouching,let'sgetanideaastowhatpartsoftheimagewillbenefitmostfromourefforts.AquickwaytodothatistopreviewitusingtheHue/Saturationcommand.Todoso:

Page 199: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1. Opentheimageyouwishtoworkwith.

2. ChooseImage Adjustments Hue/Saturation.

3.

MovetheSaturationsliderto+55orsowhentheHue/Saturationdialogboxopens,asshowninFigureG.OurresultisshowninFigureH1.Aftermovingthesliderbackandforthseveraltimes,wenoticedthatthegrapesonthetopofthebunchcouldbenefitfromanincreaseinsaturation.

FigureG.

FigureH1.

Page 200: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.Movetheslidertotheleftandseeifanythinglooksbetterwitha

littlelesssaturation,saytoabout-55,asshowninFigureH2.Theleavesinourexampleappearmorenaturaland,whendesaturatedslightly,willhelptofocusmoreattentiononthegrapes.

FigureH2.

5.ClosetheHue/SaturationdialogboxbyclickingCancelwhenyou'redone.

Page 201: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ChoosingtoolsettingsfortheSpongetool

Nowthatwehaveanideaofwhatareaswewanttoworkon,let'sbeginusingtheSpongetool.Becauseitisn'tagoodideatoworkdirectlyontheoriginalorBackgroundlayer,let'smakeaduplicateofit.Ifwemessuptheduplicate,we'llcansimplydeleteitandmakeanotherone.

1. ClickontheLayerspalette'spop-upmenuandchooseDuplicateLayer.

2.EnterRetouchintheAstextboxwhentheDuplicateLayerdialogboxopensandthenclickOK.

3. ChoosetheSpongetool fromtheToolbox.

4.

ChooseabrushsizefromtheBrushPresetPickeronthetooloptionsbar,asshowninFigureI.Youshouldchooseabrushsizethatallowsyoutoeasilypaintwithintheareayouwanttoworkon.Asoft,round100-pixelbrushworkswellforourexample.

FigureI.

5. ChooseSaturatefromtheModedropdownlist.

6.

Chooseabout20%fromtheFlowsliderbymovingittotherightuntilthevalueappearsinthetextbox.LeavetheAirbrushfeaturedeselectedbecausewewanttoworkslowlyandtheAirbrushfeaturetendstoaddordecreasesaturationatanacceleratedrate.

PaintingwiththeSpongetool

Moveyourmousepointertooneoftheareasyouwishtoworkwithandbeginpaintingwithshort,circularstrokesonsmallareas,buildingupsaturationasyougo,asshowninFigureJonthepreviouspage.Typically,themidtonesofanimagerenderbestwhenincreasingsaturation.So,asyouwork,work

Page 202: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

proportionatelymorewiththemidtonesandlesswiththehighlightsandshadows.Itmaynotseemasthoughmuchishappeningatfirst,butit'simportantnottoworktoofast.

FigureJ.

2.

TogglebackandforthbetweentheRetouchandBackgroundlayersbyclickingontheEyeicon ontheLayerspalettetocheckyourbefore-and-afterprogress.

Nowthatwe'redonewiththegrapesinourexample,we'llturnourattentiontotheleavestoslightlyde-emphasizetheirappearance.Todothis:

1.

SwitchtheModedropdownlistonthetooloptionsbarfromSaturatetoDesaturate.Remember,ifyouoverdodesaturationyou'llendupwithblackandwhite.

2.SettheFlowto10%,andworkaswedidinthegrapeareas,paintingwithshort,circularstrokes.

3.

Continuecheckingyourbefore-and-afterprogress,untilfinishedasshowninFigureK.

FigureK.

Page 203: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Note

Forinformationonhowtogetevenmorecolorfromyourproblemimages,seetheProblem:Solution"Restorecolortounderexposedareas"attheendofthischapter.

It'sacooltool

TheSpongetoolisaterrificretouchingtoolyoucanusetoaddandreducecolorsaturationinaphoto.Attimeswhennaturallightingofasubjectistoointenseortoolow,theSpongetoolcanhelprevitalizeanotherwiseunusableimage.Evenincontrolledsituations,suchasinastudiosetup,whenyouthinkyou'vecoveredallthebases,thingsdohappen.Whatyougetisn'twhatyouthoughtyouhad,andtheSpongetoolcanhelpyouavoidtheadditionalworkofreshootingthephoto.

Page 204: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Fixflawedarchitecturalimages

Theworldmustbeoverflowingwithphotographsthatcouldberescuedfromtherejectbinwithjustalittlebasicretouchingsomanytwistedverticalsandlopsidedhorizontalsandsolittletime.ThebeforeimageshowninFigureAbegsforreliefinthebent-overdepartmentandthecluttercategory.It'saphotothatwithsometimespentcorrectingitsflawsyoumightuseinabrochureforacapitalimprovementinitiativeoraninvitationtojointhecongregation.Inanyevent,it'sanimageyoucantransformintoausablevisualforprintortheweb,asshownintheafterimagein,FigureA.

FigureA1.

FigureA2.

Page 205: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Accessingourimage

Let'sbeginbyaccessingaphotoanddeterminingwhatweshouldfixandwhatweshouldleavealone.Thefirstthingyou'llnoticeinourexampleimageistheextremeforeshorteningofthebuilding,especiallyontheleftsidewhereitappearsthattheeaveoftheroofisdroopingdownward.Wecanfixthis.Next,you'llnoticetheclutterofparkingmetersandstreetsignsthatdetractfromourabilitytoenjoythelinesanddetailsofthismagnificentstructure.Theseareprettyeasyfixes,too.Finally,you'llnoticeastreetsignontheleftsideoftheimage,which,ifremoved,wouldleavepartsforwhichwehavenoreadyreplacements.Wecanfixthis,too,withathoughtfulapproachandalotofpatience.Thisiswherewe'llscavengebitsandpiecesfromotherpartsoftheimageandpuzzlethemtogethertocreatetheillusionofaformwedon'thave.

Fixingtheslantyshanty

Tocorrecttheforeshorteningofabuilding:

1. Openthefileyouwishtoworkwith.

2.DuplicatethebackgroundimagebydraggingtheBackgroundlayerontotheCreateANewLayerbutton intheLayerspalette.

3.Makesuretherulersatthetopandleftsidesoftheframearevisiblebypressing[Ctrl]R( RontheMac),iftheyaren'tdisplayedalready.

4. SelecttheMovetool fromtheToolboxandpositionitabovethetopruler.

Page 206: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Clickanddragahorizontalguidelinethat'sparalleltothefrieze(ontherightside)andanotherthat'sparalleltothebasesofthecolumns(ontherightside).

6.

SelectEdit Transform Distortand,beforeyoustartadjustingthedistortbox,enlargetheboundingframeofyourimagebydraggingthelower-rightcorneroftheframe.Thishelpsyouseethecontrolpointsofthedistortbox.

Theobjectiveinourexampleistomovetheleftsideofthebuildingdownsothefriezeandthecolumnbasesrestonparallellines.Tomakethiscorrection,clickonthetop-leftcontrolpointofthedistortboxanddragitupward.Then,clickanddragthebottom-leftcontrolpointdownward.Youmayhavetogobackandforthafewtimesanddragadditionalguidelinesbeforearrivingatabuildingthathasitsx-axisonahorizontal.Youcanalsoadjusttheverticals,butit'sbesttoallowasmalldegreeofforeshorteningthatis,allowingtheendcolumnstohaveaslightinwardslantfrombottomtotoptokeepthebuildingfromappearingtooboxy.

7.

Press[Enter]ordouble-clickwithinthedistortionboxonceyouhaveyourbuildinginshapelikeoursshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

Coveringyourtracks

Next,you'llwanttoremoveanyobjectsthatdetractfromthearchitecturallinesofthestructureinyourimage.We'llbegintoclearouttheclutterwiththemost

Page 207: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

obviousoffenderinourexampletheparkingmetertotheleftofthecentertreeFortunatelyforus,itsitsnexttoasectionofstepsandsidewalkthatwecanusetoreplaceit.Tomakeasimpleobjectreplacement:

1.

ChoosethePolygonalLassotool Toolboxandselectasectionoftheimagethat'slargeenoughtocovertheoffendingobjectwithroomtospare.Forourexample,weselectedasectionofthestairsandsidewalk.

2.

ChooseSelect Feather,settheFeatherRadiusto2pixels,andclickOK.Thematchissoclosethatwedon'tneedtofeathermuchmorethan2pixelstoachieveaseamlesstransition.

3.Copyandpastethisselection.Photoshopautomaticallymakesanewlayerwiththeselectioninplace.

4.

UsetheMovetooltodragtheselectionontopoftheitemyouwishtohideuntilit'scoveredandtheselectionblendsin.FigureCshowsourimagebeforeandafterediting.

FigureC.

Usinglayersformorecomplexpatches

Thatwasarelativelyeasypatch.However,whathappensifthepiecesdon'tmatch

Page 208: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

verywell,asthoseshowninFigureDonthenextpage?Eventhoughweusedaprocessjustliketheonewejustdescribed,thispatchdoesn'tmatchaswellbecausethetonalvaluesofourpatchdon'tblend.Inthiscase,thesolutionisto:

1. SelecttheBurntool fromtheToolboxandchoosealarge,soft-edgebrush.

2.

SettheRangeslideronthetooloptionsbartoMidtonesandtheExposuresliderto20%todarkenthesegmentuntilitstonalrangeblendswithitssurroundings.

FigureD.

Buildingacolumnbaseandaplanter

We'vebeendoingwellreusingbitsandpiecesfromonepartoftheimagetopatchotherparts.And,whilethebuildingisbeginningtolookcleanerandneater,we'restillfacedwithaproblemontheleftsideoftheimagethepedestriancrossingsign,whichcoversupwhatappearstobealargerplanterandpartofacolumn.

Asluckwouldhaveit,thisbuildinghasasymmetrythatgivesusaccesstoanotherplanterandacolumnjustthepiecesweneedtoconcealthecrosswalksign.Theotherplanterisontherightside,sowecanselectit,flipithorizontally,anduseittorebuildtheplanterwedon'thaveontheleftside.Thisisatechnique

Page 209: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

thatcanoftencomeinhandywhenworkingwitharchitecturalimages.

Tip

Trytokeeptwothingsinmindasyou'repuzzlinganimagetogether.First,ifyoucanobtainandusethepatchyouneedasis,thendon'tbothertocopyandpasteitonitsownlayer.Instead,simplyholddownthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac)asyouclickanddragtheselection,butdon'treleaseituntilit'sexactlywhereyouwantit.Thisactioncopiesthepiecetothesamelayeryou'reworkinginand,whenyoureleasethemousebutton,becomespartofthatlayer,notaseparatepiecethatyoucanmovearoundoralterallbyitself.Also,youmayneedtorotateand/orscalesomepiecestofitintotheirnewlocations.Inthiscase,makeaseparatelayerforeachpieceandselectEdit Transformandwhateverfunctionyouneedtoshapethepatchintothecorrectdimensions.

Selectinganotherobjectandflippingit

1.

ChoosetheLassotool fromtheToolbox,andthenselecttheobjectyouwishtocopy.Inourexample,weselectedalittlemorethanhalfoftheplanterontherightsideoftheimage.

2.

Copyandpasteitontoanewlayer.OurresultsareshownontheleftinFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 210: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.SelectEdit Transform FlipHorizontaltopositiontheobjectsoitfacestherightdirection.

4.Movetheobjectintopositionontopoftheflawedorobscuredobject,asshowninourexampleontherightinFigureE.

5.UsetheErasertool fromtheToolbox,tocarefullyremovetheexcessimageryaroundthecopiedandflippedobject.

6.

UsealargerErasertoolata15%Opacitysettingtoblendthebodyofthereplacementobjectintotheonebelowit.YoumayneedtousetheBurntoolagain(ortheLevelscommand,ifyouprefer)tomatchthetonalqualityofthenewobjectpiecetotheexistingone.

Copyinganexistingobjectandreusingit

Inourimage,there'sausablecolumnrightnexttotheplanter.Weusedthesametechniqueweemployedtocapturetheplanter,butdidn'tflipitsincethecolumnisalreadyleaninginthecorrectdirection.Whenmakingsuchanedit,youmayneedtoadjustitscolororthecolorcastofthemiddleportionofthecolumn.Todoso:

1. Makethetargetlayeractive.

2. ChooseImage Adjustments ColorBalance.

Page 211: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.Movethecolorslidersintheresultingdialogboxtoadjustthemagentaandyellowinthemidtones.

Page 212: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionEliminateskinflaws

Problem:Skinflawsmaranotherwisegoodimage.

Solution:UsetheCloneStamp,HealingBrush,andPatchtoolstotouchuptheimage.

Page 213: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Mostpeoplewanttolookasgoodaspossiblewhentheirpicturesaretaken,andevensupermodelsgettheoccasionalblemish.Luckily,Photoshopcantackleskinconditionsbetterthananycream,powder,orcleansercurrentlyonthemarket.

YourfirstlineofdefenseagainstblemishesistheHealingBrushtool SimilartotheCloneStamptool,theHealingBrushtoolclonesthetexturefromaselectedarea,butsamplesthecolorfromtheareawhereyouapplythebrush.Specksofcolorintheaffectedarea(likepimples)arereplacedwithmoreprevalentnearbyhues.Thisisespeciallyvaluablewhenworkingwithfleshtones,wherecolormatchingcanbedicey.Inmanycases,theHealingBrushtoolcanmakefastchangesthatmakepimplesvanishlikemagic,butbesuretolookcloselyattheresult.Sometimesthepathofthebrushisvisibleundercloseexamination,especiallyifyou'vedraggeditratherthanstampeditonsmallareas.

ThePatchtool worksinmuchthesamewayastheHealingBrushtool,butit'susedtocopylargeareasallatonce.Thisisoftenusefulwhenremovinglaughlinesaroundtheeyesandmouth.

Formoreprecisecontrolovercolorselectionwhencloningpixels,usetheCloneStamptool. Whileitdoesn'thavethe"ooh-aah"effectoftheotherretouchingtools,itcangiveyouabitmorecontrol.

OurProblemimageshowsaphotothatneedsalittlework.Themodelhasseveralminorblemishesonhischeekandamarknearthebridgeofhisnose,suggestinghewearsglasseswhennotinRenaissancecostumes.

WeusedacombinationoftheCloneStamp,HealingBrush,andPatchtoolstotouchupthisimage.TousetheCloneStamporHealingBrushtool:

1.

Sampleaportionoftheimagethathasthedesiredtexture.Ifyou'relucky,therewillbealargeareathatisn'tclosetothespotyou'reediting,butmoreoftenthannotyou'llonlyfindsimilarpixelscloseby.

2.

Selectthetoolyouthinkwillbebestforthejob,holddownthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac),andclickonthedesiredsourcearea.Photoshopletsyouknowyou'redefiningthispointbychangingthepointertocrosshairs.

YoucansettheCloneStampandHealingBrushtoolstoclonepixelsthesamedistancebetweenthedefinedpointandthefirstareayouapplythebrushbyselectingtheAlignedcheckbox.OryoucansetthemtoresettothestartingpointeverytimeyouclickbydeselectingtheAlignedcheckbox.(Youcanchangethesettingsforeachoptiononthetooloptionsbar.)TheCloneStamptoolisaligned

Page 214: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

bydefault,whiletheHealingBrushtoolisnon-aligned.Whicheveralignmentsettingyouchoose,it'sbestto"stamp"withthesetoolsratherthandragthem.Thispreservesthegrainoftheimageandmakesyouralterationslessobvious.Forlargerareas:

1.UsethePatchtoolto"lasso"theelementyouwanttoremove.Photoshophighlightstheselectedarea.

2.

Dragtheselectiontoasmoothareaofskin.Whenyoureleasethemousebutton,theselectionsnapsbacktoitsoriginallocation,applyingthetextureoftheselectedarea.OurSolutionimageshowsthefinalversionoftheimage,withblemishesandwrinklesremoved.

Page 215: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRestorecolortounderexposedareas

Problem:Photographisunderexposedcausinglossofdetail.

Solution:UsetheHistoryBrushtooltorestoredetailandclarity.

Page 216: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Ifyou'veeverexaminedanunderexposedphotograph,youmightbetemptedtoeliminateitwithoutmuchthought.Unless,ofcourse,youhadreasontobelievethathidingbehindallofthatdarknesswasimagedetailandclarityand,yes,colorthatwouldmakethisphotoa"keeper,"becauseyoucouldactuallyuncoverthisimageinformationwithoutthelaboriousprocessofmasking.ThisisexactlywhatyoucandowiththeHistoryBrushtool.

Selecttheshadowareas

Thistechniqueworksbestwhenonlyaportionofaphotoisunderexposed,asshowninourProblemimage.Tobegin:

1. Openanimagewithunderexposedareas.

2. ChooseSelect ColorRangetousetheColorRangetool.

3.ChooseShadowsfromtheSelectdropdownlistintheColorRangedialogboxtomasktheshadowareasquickly.

4. ClickOK.

5. SelectEdit Filltobeginusingthefillcommandtobrightentheshadowareas.

6.Select50%GrayfromtheUsedropdownlistintheresultingdialogboxandthenchooseColorDodgefromtheModedropdownlist.

7. SettheOpacityto100%.

8. ClickOK.

Onceyou'veappliedtheColorDodgefill,theshadowareasofyourimageshouldbeconsiderablybrighter.Infact,theymaylooktoobright,butthat'sokaybecausewe'llblendthemwiththeoriginalimagelateron.

Takeasnapshot

1. DisplaytheHistorypalette,ifitisn'talreadyvisible.

ClicktheCreateNveasnapshotofthephotoinitscurrentstate.

Page 217: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

3.RestorethephototoitsoriginalconditionbyselectingtheoriginalstateintheHistorypalette.

4.ClickontheboxtotheleftofthenewsnapshottodefineitasthesourcefortheHistoryBrush.

Note

You'llloseallofyoursnapshotsandhistorystatesifyoucloseandre-openthefile,sobesuretodoalloftheretouchingworkwedescribeinasinglePhotoshopsession.

Paintinthedetails

Nowwe'rereadytoenhancetheoriginalimage.

1. SelecttheHistbrushtool

Chooseabrushsizeappropriatetoyourimage,andadjustthehardnessto0%togiveitfuzzyedges.

3. Settheopacityto50%.

4.

PaintovertheshadowareasyouwanttolightenusingtheHistoryBrushtool.Theresultissimilartoshiningalightontheaffectedarea.Toensureasmoothblend,holddownthemousebuttonuntilyoufinishbrighteningeachsectionoftheimage.Photoshoponlyappliesthelighteningeffectonceinanygivenareauntilyoureleasethemousebutton.Ifaparticularareadoesn'tbrightenasmuchasyou'dlike,clickonthesameareaandpaintoverita

Page 218: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

secondtime.

Colorwhenandwhereyouneedit

WhileyoucanproduceasimilarcolorenhancementusingtheShadow/Highlighttool(introducedinPhotoshopCS),thetechniquewedescribeinthisarticleallowsyoutoapplytheenhancementselectivelyandgivesyoumorecontrolovertheresults.ItalsofunctionsinolderversionsofPhotoshopandincolormodes,suchasCMYK,wheresomeadjustmenttoolsdon'twork.

Page 219: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRemovelinesandwrinkles

Problem:Portraitsubjecthaslinesandwrinkles.

Solution:Addasoftfocuseffect.

Page 220: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Inourworldofprecisepixels,theremaybetimeswhenyoureallydon'twanttocaptureanimagewithsharpedges.Youmayprefernottoshowthoselittlewrinklesbeginningtoappeararoundasubject'seyes.Oryoumightwanttogivetheimagearomanticsortoflook.Whateverthereason,addingasoftfocuseffecttoadigitalimagecanhelpgivethephotomorevisualappeal.AndwithPhotoshop,it'sasimpleprocess.LikeeverythingelseinPhotoshop,thereareseveralwaystoachievesimilareffects.Inthisarticle,we'llshowyouhowtotakeastandardphotoandmakeitmoreappealingbyaddingasoftfocuseffecttoitwithinPhotoshop.

Softfocustheeasyway

First,selectasuitableimageforthiseffectafterall,notallimageslookgoodwithasoftfocus.Theeffectworksbestwithclose-upnatureshotsandportraits.Forourexample,we'lluseamodelshot

1.OpenyourimageinPhotoshopanddouble-clickontheBackgroundlayerintheLayerspalettetomoveittoaworkinglayer.

2.NamethelayerOriginalandthendragthelayerontotheNewLayerbuttonatthebottomoftheLayerspalettetocreateaduplicatelayer.

3.

SelectthenewlayerandthenchooseFilter Blur GaussianBlurandsettheradiustoavariablebetween4and10,dependingontheimage.Forourimage,weused4.5.Obviously,thisistakingthesoftfocuseffectabittoofar,butwecanquicklyalterit.ClickOK.

4.ChooseLayer LayerStyle BlendingOptionsandselecttheLightenoptionfromtheBlendingModedropdownlist.

5.ChooseMergeDownfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenuwhenyou'redonewiththeimagetomaketheimagepermanent.

Gosoftly

Inaworldwhereeveryonewantsmoremegapixelstogetcrisp,sharpimages,awell-appliedsoftfocuscanmakeallthedifferenceintheoverallappearanceofaphoto.WithPhotoshop,itisn'tonlyeasytodo,it'salittlefunaswell.Andwethinkyouandyoursubjectwillliketheresults.

Note

Page 221: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

YoumightalsotryusingtheDarkenblendingmodeoptioninsteadofLighten.Doingsogivesyouatotallydifferenteffect,makingthelinesintheimagelookmorehand-drawnandthecolormorepainted.

Page 222: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 223: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter5.Optimizationandsizing

Page 224: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Choosethebestfileformatsfortheweb

Talkwithalmostanyoneinvolvedinthedesignandproductionofwebsitesandyou'reboundtobecometheproudownerofyetanotherinformedopiniondetailingthebestfileformatstouseforimagequalityandspeedofdisplay.SomewillsayGIFs,othersJPEG,andinevitablyan"earlyadopter,"atruemaverickintheworldofimagepreparationfortheweb,willhailthevirtuesofPNG.Onceandforall,let'sseewhatthecurrentintelligenceisonthesubjectsoyoucanproceedwiththebusinessofprovidingimagefilesthatloadquicklyandlookgreatontheWorldWideWeb.

Aprimeronthreepopularfileformats

Fileformatsforthewebaredesignedtouseveryfewbitsofinformationand,asaconsequence,processgraphicsquickly.That'salwaysthemainobjectivewhenworkingwithfilesforthewebspeed.Yet,theimportanceofspeedmustbebalancedwithimagequality.Isthelogolegible?Isthephotoattractive?Arethecolorsaccurate?Tomakeeffectivechoiceswithwebfiles,youneedtounderstandthebasicfeaturesandlimitationsofeachpopularfileformat.We'lllookatGIFfirst.

GIF:Itpioneeredwebgraphics

GIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)hasbeenaroundsincethelate80s.It'sdesignedtorecordimageswithflatcolorsuchaslogos,lineart,screenshots,andcartoons,asshowninFigureA,wheretherearelonghorizontalrunsofasinglecolor.Inotherwords,animagecomprisedofonlyhorizontalbarsthatrunthewidthoftheimageandwhereeachisjustonecolorwouldmakeaveryhappyandverytinyGIFfile.Ontheotherhand,evenacheckerboarddesignofindividualcolorswouldbreakupthehorizontalrunenoughthattheGIFfilesizewouldgrowsubstantially.AndacheckerboardwithdigitalnoisewouldtaxaGIFevenfurther.Here'salistofotherGIFfeaturesandlimitations:

FigureA.

Page 225: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Ideallysuitedtohandlesimplegraphicswithitspaletteof256colors.

Capableofdisplayingacolor(suchasthebackground)astransparent.

Usesalosslesscompressionalgorithm.Thatis,itreducesthefilesizewithoutlosinganyoftheoriginalpixels.

CanbeseparatedintoframesforanimatedGIFsequences.

Canbeinterlaced,whichmeans,ontheweb,itloadsalow-resolutionversionfirsttogetanimageonscreenquicklyasitcontinuestograduallyloadthefull-resolutionversion.Thisfeatureisusefulifyouraudienceusesnarrowbandwidthmodemsandslowconnectionspeeds.

JPEG:Thephoto-qualityfavorite

You'reprobablyfamiliarwiththeJPEGformatifonlybecauseit'susedforbothprintandwebapplications.TheJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)fileformatisnormallyassignedtorecordandcompressfull-color,continuous-toneimages.Colorphotos,color-richillustrations,andgraphicswithsubtlegradientandshadingeffectsarethepurviewoftheJPEG.HereareafewpointstorememberabouttheJPEGformat:

Performsexceptionallywellforphotographicandrich-colorimages.

Doesn'toffertheoptiontomakeacolortransparent.

Useslossycompression,soanytimethefileisopenedandresaved,additionalpixelinformationislost.

Page 226: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Routinelyproduceslargerfilesizesifonlybecauseit'scalledupontorenderhigherqualityandmorecomplicatedimages.

PNG:ThenewandimprovedGIF

PNG,pronouncedping,isanacronymforPortableNetworkGraphics.ItwasdevelopedinrecentyearsasanimprovedsubstitutefortheGIFformat,primarilybecausethepatentownersofGIFtechnologyhavebeguntomakenoiseaboutcharginglicensingfeesfortheirinvention.Theonlyrealproblemwiththisnewarrivaltothefileformatarenaisthatitisn'tyetwidelyacceptedorsupported.ThePNGformatprovidesthefollowing:

Losslesscompressionthat'sslightlymoreefficientthanGIF.

AccesstothecolorpalettesofGIFandJPEG,upto24-bittruecolor.

InterlacingorprogressivedisplayfasterthanGIF.

Improvedcolorrenditionwithcontrolofimagebrightness.

Variabletransparency(notjustonoroffasinGIF).

Noanimationcapabilities.

SmallerfilesizesthanGIFwithsimplegraphics,buttypicallylargerfilesizesthanJPEGwithfull-colorcontinuous-toneimages.

JPEG2000:Builtonasolidhistory

JPEG2000isanewformatthat'sonitswaytoreplacingtheoriginalJPEGcodecinventedbytheJointPhotographicExpertsGroup.JPEG2000improvesoncompressionandimagequality,but,asofthiswriting,requiresaplug-inatboththepointoforiginandthepointofviewingorprinting.Someofitsfeaturesareasfollows:2535percentsmallerfilesizesatcomparableimagequality;supportfor16-bitcolor/grayscale;8-bittransparency;alphaandspotchannels;region-of-interestenhancement;andoptionallosslesscompression.

PhotoshopCSsupportsbothformats,sowethinkit'ssafetoassumethatPNGandJPEG2000willsurviveandbecomethenextgenerationofimagearchivinganddistribution.Fornow,we'llfocusonthetwoformatsthatarestilltightlywoven

Page 227: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

intoourworkprocesses.

AlookbackattheoriginsofGIF

In1987,CompuServe(acompanynowownedbyAOLthatprovidesinformationservices,email,andspecializedinternetcontent)developedafileformat,knownasGIF,forarchivingandexchangingcomputerimages.CompuServedevelopersincorporatedaUnisyscompressionalgorithm,knownasLZW,intothedesignofthisfileformat.Thisnewfreeformatquicklybecameaworldstandard.However,in1994,bothCompuServeandUnisysannouncedtothesoftwaretradethatdeveloperswouldhavetopayalicenseefeeforusingtheGIFtechnology.FearandconsternationspawnedPNGapatent-freereplacementforGIFthatofferslossless,portable,andwell-compressedstorageofrasterimages.

Narrowyourchoicebyconsideringthecontent

RememberthatwedescribedtheGIFformatasbeingideallysuitedforsimple,flat-colorgraphics.Ifthatdescribestheimageyou'reconsidering,thenGIFisagoodstartingpoint.Ontheotherhand,iftheimageisarichlycoloredphotographorafull-colorgraphicorillustrationwithgradientsandsubtledetail,thenJPEGshouldbeyourfirstchoice.Buttherealdeterminantishowtheimagetranslatesinyourchosenformat.Theguidelineswejustdescribedarejustthatguidelinesnothardandfastrules.Here'sanexample.

FigureBshowsaphotographthatmightleadustoleantowardJPEGbecauseit'saphoto.However,takeacloserlook:It'saposterizedphoto,leavingalimitednumberofcolorsandtonesandproducingflatareasofcolor.WhenyouexperimentwithGIF,you'llfindthatittendstoposterizeacontinuous-tonephotoasaresultofitslimitedcolorpalette.

FigureB.

Page 228: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

WhynotcapitalizeonthispredictablebehaviorandGIF'sexcellentcompressiontomakethisphotoaGIFratherthanourfirstchoice,JPEG?UsingPhotoshop'sSaveForWebdialogbox,wesetouttokeepthesameimagequalitywithtwodifferentfileformatsGIFandJPEG.Wediscovered,asshowninFigureConthenextpage,thatalthoughtheGIFformat(top)approximatedtheposterizedeffectandcolorseparation,ittendedtodullthecolorsascomparedtotheJPEGversion(bottom).TheGIFsizewas90K,using64adaptivecolors.TheJPEGwassettoaQualitylevelof60andproduceda94Kfile.Thesmalldifferenceinfilesizewould,inouropinion,pointtoJPEGasthepreferredchoicebecauseofitsimagequality.

FigureC1.

Page 229: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureC2.

Now,takealookatasimplegraphicthatwemightinitiallyassumeshouldusetheGIFformat.It'sagraphic,andithasafewcolorsthatareflatwithoutmuchdetail.WeusedGIFwithitslimitedcolorpaletteandrenderedafilesizeofnearly96K,asshownontherightinFigureD.WithJPEG,shownontheleft,wewereabletomaintainthesameimagequalitybutreducethefilesizetoabout74K.Inthiscase,GIFwasn'tthebestchoicebecauseoftheimagecontent.

FigureD.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 230: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Fivemorewaystoshavedatafromthefile

Thereseemstobenoendtothewaysinwhichprogrammersanddesignersslidefilesizesdownonepixelatatime.Herearejustafewofthemorepopulartechniquesyoucanuseinyourquestforsmallfilesfortheweb:

1.

Everypixelcountswhentheobjectiveistoshedunnecessarybitsofinformation.Forexample,insteadofkeepingthatmarginofnothingnessaroundyourimageespeciallyodd-sizedgraphicscropintotheveryedgeoftheliveimage.Leavelittleornoborder,whichyoudon'tneedanyway,toreducethenumberofpixelsrecordedinthefile.ThisappliestobothGIFandJPEGfileformats.

2.

Ditheringhelpstoconcealtheroughlookofalimitedcolorpalettebyaddingbackcolorstoachieveablendedappearanceandconsequentlyincreasefilesize.Ifyoucanlivewithoutit,turnoffditheringwhensavingaGIFfile.

3.

Anti-aliasingtextmayalsoaddtofilesize.Anti-aliasingaddspixelsofvaryingvaluetotheedgesoftypeinanefforttoconcealthestair-stepeffectontheedgesofsolid-colorletterforms.Tryturningoffanti-aliasingtoseeifyoucanachievethelookyouwantwhilecuttingbitsofinformationoffthesizeofyourGIFfile.

Page 231: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.UsealossyGIFcompressioninsteadofthenormallosslesscompression.Alossycompressioneliminatesanystraypixels,whichincreasesfilesize.

5.

Whileyou'reevaluatingaGIFimageintheSaveForWebdialogbox,trydeletingfromtheGIFpaletteonecoloratatimetograduallyeliminatecolorsyouwon'teasilynoticeintheimage.ClickonthecolorswatchandclicktheTrasthebutton atthebottomofthepalette.Thisprocesscanactuallyreducefilesizeafractionofakilobyteeverytimeyouloseacolor.

Note

Forinformationonoptimizingyourimagesfortheweb,seetheProblem:Solution"Improveblurringincompressedwebimages"attheendofthischapter.

Optimizequalityandminimizefilesize

Preparingfilesforthewebwillbelessofachallengenowthatyouknowmoreaboutthewayfileformatsworkandwhichoptionsareavailable.Photoshop'sSaveForWebdialogboxgivesyouthefreedomtoexperimentwithavarietyofsettingsquicklyandeasily.Trypracticingwithafileinavarietyofwaysandcompareyourresults.Thebehaviorofcomputercodeoftensurprisesusandsometimespleasantlysurprisesusespeciallywhenwediscoverhowsmallwecantrimanimagefileandstillhaveitdisplaythewayitwasoriginallyintended.

Page 232: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Optimizeyourimagestogetthebestwebresults

Whenanimageisoptimizedfordisplayontheweb,thesmallestfilesizetodisplayanimagewiththehighestqualitypossibleisused.Pixelsandcolorsarecompressedtoformanimagethatlooksasgoodastheoriginal,butatafractionofthefilesize.Thismayinvolvemanytechniques,suchasfiletypeselection,colormapping,selectivecompression,ditheringtheoptionsarevastintheworldofPhotoshopandcanbeconfusing.Knowinghowtoapproachoptimizationwhenpreparingimagesfortheweb,therefore,isthekeytogettingimagesthatlookgreatanddownloadquickly.

Getthemostfromyourimages

You'vebeenhandedtwofilesaJPEGimagetakenwithadigitalcameraandalogographicsavedasaTIFFandhavebeentoldtogettheseimagesontheweb,pronto.However,bothofthesefilesaretoolargetobeefficientlydisplayedinawebbrowserand,inthecaseoftheTIFF,probablywon'tdisplayatall.Inthisarticle,we'llshowyouhowtoapproachthisscenariousingPhotoshop'soptimizationtools.

AdjustingtheJPEGfile

OurJPEGfilewastakenusinga3.34megapixeldigitalcamera,whichproducedagreatshotwithplentyofimageinformation.Ifwewereprintingthisfile,itwouldmakeagood5x7andadecent8x10.However,theimageinformationneededtoprintahigh-qualityimageismostlyoverkillwhendisplayinganimageonacomputermonitor.

Resizetheimagedimensions

Bydefault,monitorsdisplayimagesat72dpi,meaningour8MBJPEGfiledisplaysatabout27inchesby20inches.Fewthingsaremoreannoyingthanhavingtousescrollbarstorevealanentireimageorwaitforabloatedfiletodownload,soweneedtoresizethisimagetobetterfitonawebpage.

OpenaJPEGfileinPhotoshopandselectImage ImageSizetoopentheImageSizedialogbox,showninFigureAonthepreviouspage.

Page 233: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

FigureA.

2.

ChangetheResolutionsettingfrom360pixels/inchto72pixels/inch,ifnecessary.IfyoulookatthePixelDimensionsvalueatthetopofthisdialogbox,ourfilehasdroppedfrom8.05MBto330K.Nowwe'regettingsomewhere!Nowthatwe'vechangedtheresolution,wecancheckthewidthandheightoftheimage.

3.

UsethedropdownlistsnexttotheWidthandHeightsettingsintheDocumentSizepaneltochangetheunitofmeasurementfrominchestopoints,whichareessentiallythesameaspixels.Keepinmindthat640x480pixelsisthelargestyoushouldmakeyourimagetobeweb-friendlyininches,thistranslatestoabout8x6inches.Ourexampleimagefitswithinthoseparameters,butforourneeds,theimagedoesn'thavetobethatbig.

4.

Switchbacktoinchesandchangethewidthto5inches,adecentsizeforwebviewing.Nowourfileisdownto280K,andwehaven'tevencompressedityet.

5. ClickOK.

Note

Afteryouresizeyourimage,itwillprobablyshrinkdowntoaminisculesizeonyourscreen.Don'tworrybecausethatisn'tthesizeit'sgoingtobeontheweb.Whileyouchangetheimagesize,Photoshopkeepsthesamemagnificationlevelas

Page 234: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

theoriginalimage.Toseetheactualsizeoftheimage,selectView ActualPixels.

Compresstheimage

Withourimagedimensionsandresolutionundercontrol,wecanmakeourcompressionselections.

1.

SelectFile SaveForWebtoopentheexpansiveSaveForWebdialogbox,whichisshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

2.

ClickonthePresetdropdownlistintheupper-rightcorner.Here,youcanselectthetypeofoptimizedfileformatyou'dliketouse.Foracontinuoustoneimage,stickingwithJPEGisreallytheonlywaytogo,soselectJPEGHighfromthemenu.

Page 235: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

AsshowninFigureC,thereareanumberofoptionstochoosefromwhenoptimizingaJPEG.ByselectingJPEGHigh,theoptionsarefilledwithpresetvalues.Whilethesesettingsareagoodstart,it'sbesttofine-tunethemtogetthebestpossiblequality.However,we'rejustgoingtoconcentrateonsettingtheQuality.

FigureC.

JPEGscanbecompressedatvariablelevels,with100%beingtheleastcompressedand0%beingthemostcompressed.AsyoudecreasetheQualitysetting,yousacrificeimagedetailbutcreateasmallerfile.Thetrickistofindagoodbalancebetweenfilesizeandimagequality.Thebestwaytodosoistotrustyoureyes.

1.ClickontheOptimizedtabinthePreviewwindowoftheSaveForWebdialogbox.

2.

Double-clickontheZoomtool

foundontheleftinthedialogboxtosetthemagnificationlevelto100%.

Note

Whenevaluatingcompressionlevels,alwaysworkatactualsizetogetthemostaccuraterepresentationofyourimage.

Page 236: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Setthecompressionlevel

Therearemanytechniquesfortestingcompressionlevels,buthere'sonetostartwith.

1. ChangetheQualitysettingto100usingthesliderorthetextfield.

2.ReducetheQualityvaluein10%incrementsuntilyoustarttoseetheimagequalitydegrade.

3.

Increasethevaluein5%increments(orless)untilyoufindasettingthatlooksgoodtoyou.Forourimage,wefound50%tobeagoodcompressionsetting.

TheSaveForWebdialogboxalsoincludesafeatureforviewingcompressionoptionsside-by-side.SwitchfromtheOptimizedtabtothe4-uptab,asshowninFigureD.Nowyourimagedisplayswithfourdifferentcompressionoptions,makingiteveneasiertopickawinner.Ifyoufindacompressionsettingyoulike,simplyclickontheimageandthesettingisapplied.

FigureD.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 237: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

SavetheJPEGfile

Thelastthingtodoissavethefile.

1. ClickSaveintheSaveForWebdialogbox.

2.

GiveyourfileanewnamebyenteringitintotheFileNametextbox(SaveAstextboxontheMac).Becarefulnottooverwriteyourhigherresolutionfilewiththislowerresolutionversion.

3. ClickSaveandyourimageisreadyfortheweb.

Workingwiththelogo

Optimizingthelogofileisgoingbeabitdifferent,asweneedtoconvertittoabetterfileformatfortheweb.Thebestchoiceforillustrations,lineart,orlogos,suchasourswithlargeareasofflatcoloranddetailedlines,istheGIFformat.GIFscompressimagesbylimitingthenumberofcolorsthatmakeuptheimage.Thekeytogettingagood-lookingGIFistoreducethecolorsintheimagewithoutlosingimportantimageinformation.

Page 238: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

AsshowninFigureE,ourlogofileusesonlyafewcolorsandsometext.Sincethetextcharactersarebigandbold,convertingtotheGIFformatwillworkfine.Ifyouhadsmallercharactersofmorecomplexvisualelementslikeshadowsandgradients,youmayneedtouseaJPEGtoconservethefinerdetails.

FigureE.

Sizeitup

AswiththeJPEGfile,thefirststepistoresizetheimage.Becarefulwhenresizingartworksimilartoourlogofile,asthedetailscanstarttolook"soft"whenyouresampletheimage.

1.SelectyournewimagesizeintheImageSizedialogbox.Forourexample,weresizedtheimageto4incheswideat72pixels/inch.

2. ClickOK.

3.SelectFilter Sharpen Sharpeniftheedgesofyourlogoarestartingtolookalittlesoft.Thismakesthemlookcrispagain.

OpentheSaveForWebdialogbox,andselectGIF64DitheredinthePresetdropdownlist.Again,thisdialogboxhasmanycomplexoptions,asshowninFigureF.Weonlyneedtouseafewofthemforthisexample,butyoucanusetheseoptionstoreallysqueezeanimagedowninaverytechnicalmanner.

Page 239: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.FigureF.

5.

ClickontheColorReductionAlgorithmdropdownlistandselectPerceptual.You'llnoticeawholebunchofotheroptionshere,includingonelabeledWeborRestrictive(Web).Wedidn'tusethatoptionbecausethewebcolorpaletteistoolimitedandourlogocolorswouldchange.Sinceourlogocontainsorganizationcolorsthatneedtobeaccurate,thePerceptualoptiongivesustruecolorsatonlyaslightlyhigherfilesize.It'sasmallpricetopay!

6.

SettheDitheroptionto0%intheDithertextbox.ThisoptiontellsPhotoshoptomixcolorsfromtheavailablecolorpalettetosimulateunavailablecolors.Inourcase,weonlyhavethreecolors(blackandtwoshadesofblue),soditheringwon'tbenecessary.

7.

ChecktheColorssetting,whichshouldbesetfor16.Thisisthenumberofcolorsinthepalette,whichareshownintheColorTablebelowtheoptions.Asyoucansee,therearecolorsintherewejustdon'tneed.

ClickontheColorsdropdownlistandreducethenumberofcolorsfurther.Withfewercolorsinourimage,thefilesizedropsdownandthefilecanloadmorequickly.CheckoutthePreviewwindowandyouprobablywon'tbeabletotellthedifference.However,ifyoudropthevaluetofourcolorsyou'llseethecolorsstarttoshift,asshowninFigureG.Itisn'taterriblechange,butonotherimagesyoucanhaveadramaticshiftasyoureducecolors.

FigureG1.

Page 240: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

8.

FigureG2.

9.ClickSave,giveyourGIFfileanameintheSaveOptimizedAsdialogbox,andthenclickSaveoncemoretofinishthejob.

Note

So,whatifyou'veoptimizedanimagefortheweb,butyouneedtousethatimagetomakeaprint.CheckouttheProblem:Solution"Improveresampledimagesforprint"attheendofthischapter.

Bewise,optimize

Byevaluatingthetypeoffileyou'reworkingwithandselectinganappropriatefileformat,optimizingyourimagefilesforthewebcanbeeasy.Inthisarticle,we

Page 241: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

compressedan8.05MBJPEGto17KBanda7.56MBTIFFtoa6KBGIF,bothhugesavingsinfilespace.Thisfilereductiondidn'tdegradeourimagequality,asweusedcompressionandimagedimensionswiselytooptimizethefilestodisplaythebestontheweb.Theresultisfast-loadingimagesthatlookgreatandcomplementyourwebdesign,insteadofdetractingfromit.

Page 242: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

AdjustJPEGwebqualitywiththeModifyQualitySettingcommand

Imagesareanintegralpartofjustabouteverywebsitetoday.Whetherthey'rephotosoffriendsandfamilyonapersonalsite,foodandflowersonacatalogsite,orspecimensamplesonaninstitutionalsite,theyprovideinformation,entertainment,andvariety.Imageslightenapageandprovidethesamekindofvisualreliefaswhenusedinprintpublications.Withoutthem,awebsitewouldsimplybepageafterpageoftext,whichwouldturnawaypotentialvisitorssinceinternetuserstypicallydon'tliketospendalotoftimewadingthroughtext.

Amajorconcernwhenworkingwithimagesintendedforthewebisfilesize.Thelargerthefilesizeis,thelongerthedownloadtime.Reducingimagefilesizesissimple,butitalwayscomeswithaprice:thelowerthesize,thelowerthequality.You'dthinkbynowthere'dbeawaytomaintainqualityandreducefilesize.Well,thereis.ByusingPhotoshop'sModifyQualitySettingcommand,youcanmaintainthequalityinamaskedsubjectarea,andlowerfilesize.

WorkingwiththeModifyQualitySettingcommand

Mostimages,especiallyphotos,containtwodistinctareasofvisualfocus:thatofthesubjectandthatofeverythingelse.Sincethesubjectareaistheprimaryfocus,itsdetailqualityshouldbeashighaspossible.Becauseeverythingelse(suchasthebackground)issecondary,thatdetailqualityneedn'tbeasgreat.Byfirstselectingthetwoareasthroughuseofamask,youcanthenusetheModifyQualitySettingcommandtoadjustthemaximumandminimumqualitylevelofeacharea,andinsodoing,adjustthefilesize.

Tobegin,opentheJPEGimageyouwishtoworkwithinPhotoshop.

Inourexampleimage,thelampistheprimaryfocusoftheimage,andthebackgroundandtableit'ssittingonaresecondary,asshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 243: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Selectthesubjectareausingamask

1. ChoosetheMagicWandtool fromtheToolbox.

2.

EnteravalueintheTolerancetextboxonthetooloptionsbar.Becausethebackgroundandtableinourexamplearen'tallthatcloseinhue,weenteredamoderatetolerancevalueof20.

3. SelecttheAnti-aliasedandContiguouscheckboxes.

Positionyourmousepointerinthebackgroundareaofyourimageandclick.AsshowninFigureB1,aselectionbordernowappears.Toaddtotheselection,pressandholddown[Shift]andthenclickinanotherbackgroundarea,asshowninFigureB2.Continuetoaddtotheselectionuntilallthebackgroundareasareselected,asshowninFigureB3.

FigureB1.

Page 244: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureB2.

FigureB3.

Page 245: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. ChooseWindow ChannelstoopentheChannelspalette.

6. ClickontheChannelspalette'spop-upmenu,andselectNewSpot

Channel.

7.EnterBackgroundintheNametextboxwhentheNewSpotChanneldialogboxopens.

8.Enter10intheSoliditytextbox.Thiswayyoucanseethemaskaswellastheimage.

9.

ClickOK.Photoshopcreatesamask,indicatedbyaredoverlay,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Page 246: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Adjustimageareaqualitylevels

Nowthatwe'veaddedamasktoourimage,wecanusetheModifyQualitySettingcommand.

1. ChooseFile SaveForWeb,andtheSaveForWebdialogboxopens.

2.

Clickonthe2-Uptab,andtwoviewsoftheimageappear,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 247: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.ClickontheOptimizedFileFormatdropdownlistandselectJPEGinthePresetsection.

4.

ClicktheUseAChannelToModifyQualitySettingbutton foundjusttotherightoftheQualitydropdownlist.TheModifyQualitySettingdialogboxnowappears,asshowninFigureE1.

FigureE1.

5. MakesurethePreviewcheckboxisselected.

Page 248: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

ClickontheChanneldropdownlist,andselectBackground.Whenyoudo,theQualitysectionbecomesactive,andathumbnailofthemaskappearsinthethumbnailboxinthelower-rightcornerofthedialogbox,asshowninFigureE2.

FigureE2.

Whensaved,theimagesectionsshowninwhitewillcontainthehighest,ormaximum,qualityareas,andtheblacksectionswillcontainthelowest,orminimum.YoucanadjustthelevelofqualityofeachwiththetwoQualitysliders.ThewhitesliderontherightadjuststheMaximumqualitylevel,whichisshowninthethumbnailasthewhitesubjectarea.TheblacksliderontheleftadjuststheMinimumqualitylevel,whichisshownastheblackbackgroundarea.

Comparequalitylevelsettings

1.

SelectthewhitemaximumsliderandmoveitallthewaytotheleftuntiltheMaximumlevelreads0%.Nowboththesubjectandthebackgroundareatthesamelevelof0percent.Theleftimageinthedialogboxisouroriginalexampleandhasafilesizeof1.26MB,asindicatedbythetitleshownbelowtheimage.TherightimageisthepreviewSaveForWebJPEGandhasamuchsmallerfilesizeofabout14.3KB.Notetheimagequalityofboththesubjectandthebackground.

2.

Resetthewhitesliderto100%,andthenmovetheblackminimumsliderallthewaytotherightuntiltheMinimumlevelreads100%.Boththesubjectandthebackgroundareatthesamelevelof100%.ThepreviewSaveForWeb

Page 249: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

JPEGhasafilesizeofabout224.9KBinourexample.Asbefore,notetheimagequalityofboththesubjectandthebackground.

3.

Movetheblacksliderbackto0%.Thesubjectisatthemaximumqualityof100%,andthebackgroundisat0%.ThepreviewSaveForWebJPEGhasafilesizeofabout186.2KBinourexample.

4.

Movethewhitesliderslowlytotheleftagainuntilyoujustbegintonoticeanyappreciabledifferenceinthequalityofthebackground.Thishappensatabout55%inourexample,andthefilesizeisabout49.6KB.Atthissetting,boththehighqualityinthesubjectareaandthelowfilesizeareacceptable.

5. ClickOKonceyou'rehappywithyouradjustments.

6. ClickSave.TheSavedOptimizedAsdialogboxopens.

7.

Navigatetothelocationwhereyouwanttosaveyourfile,enteranameintheFileNametextbox(SaveAstextboxontheMac),andclickSave.OurresultsareshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Page 250: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Twoinone

TheModifyQualitySettingcommand,throughuseofamask,permitsyoutoapplydifferentimagequalitysettingstodifferentareasofaJPEGimageintendedforuseonawebsite.Indoingso,thesubjectarearemainshigh,andyoucansetallelseataslowalevelasisdesirable.

Page 251: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Makeprecisecroppingselectionsusingguides

TheabilitytoselectpartofanimageandthenmodifytheselectioninonewayoranotherisbasictomosteverythingyoudoinPhotoshop.Youcanuseselectionstocreatemasks,definefill-ins,andadjustimagevalues,asshowninFigureA.Sometimes,asyoubeginhoninginonaworkinprogress,selectionsneedonlybegeneral.Butatothertimes,asyoufinishediting,youmustmakepreciseimageselections.

FigureA.

Measuringimages

Inmanysoftwareprograms,whenanimage,suchasaphotoorillustration,appearsonamonitorthere'snowaytotellitsdimensionssimplybylookingatit.Theonlythingyoucanseeisitsaspectratio;thatis,theratioofitsheighttowidth.Thesizeofanimage,however,isoftenimportanttoknow,especiallyifit'sintendedforusespecificallyasaposter,exhibit,orbanner,forinstance.

Page 252: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

InPhotoshop,changingthesizeofanimageisaneasythingtodo.Let'sstartwithaphotosuchastheoneshowninFigureBonthenextpage.We'dliketousethisaspartofatradeshowdisplay.Thephotowillbeperfectforthedisplay,ifitssizeislargeenough.Toseethesizeofanimage,selectView Rulers.Asetofrulersthenappearsalongthetophorizontalandleftverticalsidesofyourcanvas.Thesizeofthephotois12inchesby8inches,whichisplentylargeenoughforourpurposes.

FigureB.

Usingguides

Next,wewanttocropoutsomeoftheskyandwatertostrengthenthecompositionofthesummerhomeanditsreflection.Beforewedo,we'dliketoknowhowthecroppedsizewillimpactthelayoutofthedisplay.Wecanuseguidestomarkwherewewanttocropourphoto,andthenmeasurethenewsize.Guidesarehorizontalorverticallinesthatappearoveranimageonscreen,buttheydon'tprint.Youcanmove,delete,andlockguides.

Creatingaguide

Page 253: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Withrulersdisplayed,we'rereadytocreateaguide.Youhavetwooptionsfordoingso:usingtheNewGuidecommandordraggingaguidefromaruler.

CreateaguidewiththeNewGuidecommand

1.

ChooseView NewGuide.TheNewGuidedialogboxappears,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

2.

ChoosewhetheryouwishtocreateanewhorizontaloraverticalguidebyselectingeithertheHorizontalorVerticaloptionbutton.Bydefaultthenewguideappearsintheimagewhereverzero(0in)isset.

3.EnteranewamountinthePositiontextboxifyouwishtocreateanewguideatasettingotherthan0.

4. ClickOKandanewguideappearsonyourcanvas.

Createaguidebydragging

Moveyourmousepointertoeitherahorizontalorverticalruler,clickonit,andwhileholdingdownthemousebutton,dragoutaguideandrelease,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 254: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

2.

Tomoveaguide,positionyourmousepointerovertheguide,clickonit,andwhileholdingdownyourmousepointer,dragtheguidetowhereyouwantitpositioned.

Todeleteaguide,dragitbacktoaruler.Tolockallguides,chooseView LockGuides;toremoveallguides,chooseView ClearGuides.

Indicatingexactlocations

Let'snowindicatewherewewanttocropourphoto.Todoso,moveyourmousepointertothehorizontalruleranddragouttwohorizontalguides,positioningthemwhereyouwanttohorizontallycropyourimage,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 255: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Resettingtheruleroriginpoint

Now,let'sdeterminethesizeofthephoto.Thehorizontaldistancehasn'tchanged,buttheverticaldistanceisshorter.Wecouldsubtractoneguidemeasurementfromtheother,orwecouldsimplyresettheruleroriginpoint.Moveyourmousepointertotheupper-leftcornerofyourcanvaswherethehorizontalandverticalrulersintersect,clickontherulers,andwhileholdingdownyourmousebutton,dragtherulerorigintothetophorizontalguide.Nowyoucanseethattheverticallengthofthephotois6andalittleoverone-quarterinches.

TakingareadingwiththeInfopalette

Ifyouwanttheexactmeasurement,youcaneasilyfinditintheInfopalette.

1. ChooseWindow Info.

2.

Positionyourmousepointeroverthebottomguideandlookatthey-coordinateandyou'llseeareadingsimilartothatofY:6.300,meaning6.3inches.

Preciselypositioningaguide

Page 256: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Whilecheckingthedisplaylayout,wediscoveredthatthephotowouldworkbestifcroppedto6inchesverticallyslightlyshorterthantheguidesindicate.Welikewherethebottomcroppingis,solet'smovethetopguidedownuntilit's6inchesfromthebottomguide.

1. Resettherulerorigintothebottomguide.

2.

Moveyourmousepointertothetopguideandclickonit.Whileholdingdownyourmousebutton,andwhilewatchingtheYvalueintheInfopalette,dragtheguidedownuntiltheYvaluereadsaboutY:-6.000,andrelease.Theminusisonlyarelativevaluewiththe6beinganabsolute6inches.Wecannowcropourphototoaprecisesize.

3. ChoosetheCroptool fromtheToolbox.

4.ChooseView SnapsincetheprocessismucheasieriftheselectionborderoftheCroptoolsnapstotheguides.

5.Movethemousepointertotheupper-leftcornerofthetopguideandtheleftsideofthecanvas.

Clickanddragittothelower-rightcornerofthebottomguideandtherightsideofthecanvas,andrelease,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF1.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 257: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureF2.

7.Press[Enter],andyounowhaveaphotothatispreciselycroppedto12by6inches.

Guidedbytheline

Asyou'veseen,makingaprecisecroppingselectionusingguidesisbotheasyandexact.Youcanuseguidestodetermineareasneedingcropping,aswellasto

Page 258: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

determinethefinishedsizeofacroppedimage.Youcanalsouseguidestolocateexactpointsonyourimagetomakeselectionsandpositiondrawingandeditingtools,too.

Page 259: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

OptimizeyourimagesforuseinMicrosoftPowerPoint

Afewyearsago,youcouldshootawaywithyourdigitalcameraandinsertthoseimagesdirectlyintoaPowerPointpresentationwithouttoomuchworry.However,today'shigh-resolutioncamerasproduceimagesthataresimplytoobigforthisformat,whichcancausesystemcrashes,filecorruption,andPowerPointfilesthatareslowandhardtoedit.Byoptimizingyourdigitalimagestofityourpresentation,youcanensureyourpictureslookgreatwhileyourpresentationrunssmoothly.

Preppingyourimages

UsingyourdigitalimagessuccessfullyinPowerPointstartswithunderstandingyourtargetimagesize.Thedefault(andmostpopular)PowerPointslidedimensionsare10inchesby7.5inches(Landscapeorientation)atascreenresolutionof72dpi.Youcancreateapresentationofanysize,butthevastmajorityofPowerPointuserssticktothisdefaultsizeasitbestfillsmostdisplays.

Ifthisdefaultsizeweretranslatedintopixels,itwouldbe722.7by542pixelsat72dpi,givingyouatargetmaximumdimensionandresolution.Anydimensionthat'ssmallerisacceptable,butyou'llneedtostickwiththe72dpiresolutiontomakesureyourimagesdon'tstarttogeteitherblurryorpixelated(orboth).

Alwaysresizefirst

A3.3-megapixeldigitalcameraproducesanimagefileof2048by1536pixelsat72dpiforafilesizeofawhopping9MB.Whilehigherresolutionisbetterforprinting,it'stotaloverkillwhendisplayingimagesonscreen.Sincewehaveagoodtargettoworkwith,wecanresizetheimageandoptimizeitforthispurpose.

1. LaunchPhotoshopandopenyourimagefile.

SelectImage ImageSizetodisplaytheImageSizedialogbox,asshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 260: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

3.

MakesurethattheConstrainProportionscheckboxisselectedandtheResampleImagedropdownlistissetforBicubic.Thisensuresthatyourimageisresizedproportionallyandatthebestpossiblequality.

4.

EnteryourdesiredimagesizeinthePixelDimensionstextboxes.Weentered640intheWidthtextbox,andPhotoshopautomaticallycalculatedaheightof480tokeeptheimageproportional.Wecouldhavegoneallthewayuptoawidthof722pixels,butrememberthatthisisjustaguideline.AlwaysresizeyourimagestotheexactsizeyouwantthemtodisplayinPowerPoint.YoucanscaleimageswithinPowerPoint,butyou'llendupdegradingtheimagequality.Byplanningahead,yourimagewillalwayslookgreatonscreen.

Notethatourimageisnowonly900KB,aspreviewedintheImageSizedialogboxandshowninFigureB.Thisnumberdecreasesevenmoreaswecompressthefile,soourimageswillbeeasytoworkwithandloadquicklywheninsertedintoPowerPoint.

FigureB.

Page 261: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Savetheimage

1. ClickOKtoapplytheadjustment.

2.

SelectFile SaveAs,soasnottosaveoveryouroriginal,sinceyouwanttokeepthehigh-resolutionversionforotherpurposes.It'sagoodpracticetosaveyouradjustedimagesinaseparatefolderoraddinformationtothefilenamesuchas"lores"or"edited."

3.

SelectJPEGfromtheFormatmenuandclickOK(SaveontheMac).Youcaninsertmanydifferentfileformats,butJPEGoffersthesmallfilesizeandhigh-qualitydisplayyou'llneedfordigitalimages.TheJPEGOptionsdialogboxopens.

4.

Selectthecompressionoptionsforyourfile.WecouldwriteawholebookaboutJPEGcompression,butjustkeepinmindthatyouwanttobalanceimagequalitywithfilesize.Typically,weuseaQualitysettingof8,butyoucanexperimentandseewhichsettingworksbestforyou.

5. ClickOKoncemoreandwe'rereadytomovetoPowerPoint.

WorkwithdigitalimagesinPowerPoint

1. LaunchPowerPoint(2000/XP/v.X/2003).

2. CreateanewBlankPresentation.

3.SelectInsert Picture FromFile,locateyourfileontheharddrive,andclickInserttoplacetheimageonyourslide.

Bydefault,theimagecomesinat100%andiscenteredontheslide.Ifwehadn'tresizedtheimage,theimagefilewouldhavecompletelyoverruntheboundariesoftheslideandwe'dprobablyonlybeabletoseeaportionoftheimage.Plus,we'dhavethathefty9MBfiletodealwith,sooureffortshavecertainlypaidoff.

AdjustingimageswithinPowerPoint

Page 262: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

AsshowninFigureC,ourimageappearsonourslidewiththePicturetoolbaratthetop.Ifthistoolbardoesn'tautomaticallyappearwhenyouselectyourimage,chooseView Toolbars Picture.Thistoolbarallowsyoutoadjustcontrastandbrightness,croptheimage,addaborder,andperformabunchofotherusefulimage-editingtasks.Youcanevenconvertacolorimagetograyscaleormakeitintoawatermarkwithoutleavingtheapplication.Whilethesefeaturesarenice,theywon'treplacethelevelofcontrolofferedinyourimage-editingprogram.However,PowerPointdoesadecentjobwithsomeofthesimplereditingtasksandsavesyoufromhavingtojumpbetweenapplications.

FigureC.

ThebigbrotherofthePicturetoolbaristheFormatPicturedialogbox,whichyoucanopenbyselectingFormatpicturebutton onthePicturetoolbar.Ifthisoptionisn'tavailabletoyou,makesureyouhaveyourimageselected.AsshowninFigureD,youhavemoreoptionsandcontroloveryourimages,withfivecontroltabsforarangeofimagetasks.

FigureD.

Page 263: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Creatingatemplate

OneofthemostcommonusesfordigitalimagesinPowerPointisasabackgroundfortheslide.ThebestwaytocreateaconsistenttemplateforyourpresentationusingadigitalimageistomakeaSlideMaster.

1.CreateanewblankpresentationandthenselectView Master SlideMaster,whichcontainsalloftheplaceholders,butnotmuchelse.

2.SelectInsert Picture FromFileandplaceyourimageontheslideaswedidearlier.

3.

Right-click([control]-clickinv.X)ontheimageandselectOrder(Arrangeinv.X) SendToBackfromthecontextmenutoputtheimageundertheplaceholdertext.

4.MakeanyadjustmentstoyourimageorplaceholdersandthenselectViewNormaltoreturntoyourslide.

YourimageispartoftheMasterSlidenow,soyoucan'tedititwheninNormalview.Toeditit,simplyreturntotheSlideMasterandmakeyourchanges.

Page 264: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Inthecaseofourexample,itsimagedimensionsaresmallerthanthesizeoftheslide.Ifyouwanttobleedyourimagesrighttotheedges,you'llhavetoresizetothepixelsizeoftheslide(722.7x542)orslightlylarger.Anythingoutsidetheboundariesoftheslidewon'tdisplay,sodon'tgooverboardwiththeoverlap.Itjustaddsunnecessaryfilesizetoyourpresentation.

Presenting…yourimages!

PowerPointisagreattoolforcreatingpresentationsusingyourdigitalimagesorevensettingupslideshowstodisplayyourwork.Bycreatingimagesfilesthatareoptimizedtothescreen,youcanmakeyourimageslookgoodwhileavoidinglargefilesizesandpoor-performingpresentations.

Page 265: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionImproveblurringincompressedwebimages

Problem:TheBluroptionintheSaveForWebdialogboxproduceslessthanstellarresults

Solution:Useselectiveblurring.

Page 266: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 267: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Imagecompressioncanbeatrickything;afterall,youwantthebestqualityandthelowestfilesizepossible.Thataloneisacontradictioninterms.However,peopledoitallthetimeusingvarioustechniques.Granted,blurringanimageisn'tusuallythewaytogo,butdependingontheimage,itcanbealegitimatesolutiontoreducingthesizeofafile.Let'stakealookatagreatbuilt-infeaturePhotoshophasforsavingwebimages:theSaveForWebfeature.

LookingattheSaveForWebfeature

WiththeSaveForWebfeature,locatedintheFilemenu,youcancompressanimageforthewebwithagreatdealofcontrol.Thisfeatureallowsyoutocomparemultiplecompressionsettingsinonedialogbox.TousetheSaveForWebfeature,openanimageyouwanttocompress.Then,chooseFile SaveForWebtoopentheSaveForWebdialogbox,whichshowsfourversionsofyourimage.(Ifthispreviewwindowisn'tshowing,clickonthe4-Uptab.)Fromhere,youcanadjustthesettingsofyourimagetocreateyourfinalcompressedimage.Choosefromhigh,medium,andlowJPEGsettingsintheSavedSetsOfOptimizationSettingsdropdownlisttopreviewhowthesesettingswillaffectyourimage.

ThePreset(Settings)sectionoftheSaveForWebdialogboxalsohasaBluroption.YoucanusethistoapplyaGaussian-typeblurovertheentireimage,whichhelpsreducetheartifactsthatcanappeararoundsharplines.TheBluroptionhasarangeof0to2;Adoberecommendsasettingof0.1to0.5ifyouneedtouseit.Blurringyourimagereducesthefilesizewithoutapplyingmorecompression.Thiscanbeagoodthingorabadthing.

OurProblemimageshowsourimagewiththemaximumBluramountataJPEGHighqualitysetting.Asyoucansee,allelementsintheimagelosedetail,whilewe'dpreferthattheboatstayinfocus.So,ingeneral,werecommendstayingawayfromusingtheBluroptionoronlyapplyingtheslightestamount.You'rebetteroffapplyingmorecompression.However,ifyouwanttotryusingablur,wehaveanothersuggestion.

Applyingselectiveblurring

RatherthanapplyingtheBluroptionintheSaveForWebdialogbox,youshouldapplyablurdirectlyinPhotoshop.Forexample,weselectedeverythingintheimageexcepttheboat,andthenweappliedaGaussianBlurwithaRadiusof1.5.Thiskeepstheboatinfocusandallowsthebackgroundtoblur.WethenchoseFileSaveForWeb.Theresultinghigh-qualityJPEGfilesize,showninourSolutionimage,isalmost13timessmallerthantheoriginal(1.54MBto121K).This

Page 268: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

techniqueisgreatforlargeareasofsolidcolors,textures,orbackgrounds,suchasskyandlandscaping,wherethereisn'tmuchdetailtobeginwith.

Compressionatitsfinest

CompressingimagesisalittleeasierwhenyouusetheSaveForWebfeature.Thisfeatureofferssomeofthemostsophisticatedtoolsavailableonthemarket.Dependingonyourimage,youmayalsowanttoexperimentwiththeblurfactor.

Page 269: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionImproveresampledimagesforprint

Problem:Resampledlow-resolutionimagedoesn'tlookitsbest.

Solution:Usesharpening.

Page 270: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 271: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Resizingalow-resolutionimagetomakeitsmalleriseasy.Resizingalow-resolutionimagetomakeitlargerismorecomplicatedbecauseresamplingisnecessarytogainenoughresolutionforprinting.Resamplingisn'tabadword,butitcanlowerimagequality.Thekeyistobeconservative.Youcanonlypushanimagesofarbeforeitstartstolookbad,soyoumightnotbeabletoturna72ppiimageintoa300ppiimage.Instead,trytogetascloseaspossiblewithoutaffectingimagequality.

Note

ToresampleinPhotoshopistosampleexistingcolorinanimageandthenaddorsubtractsimilarcolorpixelsuntilyoureachthedesiredresolution.

Giveitatry!

1. Opentheimageyouwishtoworkwith.

2.

ChooseImage ImageSize,andtakealookattheImageSizedialogbox.Forourexampleimage,thisdialogboxtellsusourimageis5.653incheswideby8.333incheshighwitharesolutionof72ppi.Let'ssayweneedtheimagetobe3incheswideandweneedtoprintwitharesolutionof300dpi.

3.

EnteranamountintheWidthtextboxwiththeResampleImagecheckboxdeselected.Weentered3.Photoshopautomaticallyadjuststheheightandresolution.Forourexample,theseadjustmentswere4.423inchesinheightand135ppiforresolution(roughly).

Theseadjustmentsmakeourimagebetter,butnotgoodenough.Therefore,weneedtoresampletheimagetogaintheremainingresolutionnecessaryforprint.(Yourotheroptionistorescantheimageatthepropersizeandresolution.)

Toresampletheimage:

1. SelecttheResampleImagecheckbox.

2.

LeaveBicubic,thedefaultmethodforresampling,selectedtoproducethebestresults.TheConstrainProportionscheckboxisalsoselectedbydefaultandensuresthatPhotoshopmaintainstheproportionofourimage.

Page 272: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

Enter300intheResolutiontextbox.Theheightandwidthremainthesame,buttheincreaseinresolutionhasalsogreatlyincreasedthepixeldimensions(andfilesize)asymptomofresampling.

Viewandevaluateyourchanges

Atthispoint,clickOKandlet'sviewourimageat100percent(View ActualPixels).We'relookingforexcessiveresampling,whichoftenresultsinpixelationashowingoftheactualsquarepixelsandblurring.Ifit'sdistractingonscreen,it'sevenmoreevidentonpaper.AsshowninourProblemimage,ourimagedoesn'tlooktoobadnothingafewminoradjustmentscan'tfix.

Improveuponyourimage

Afterresizingalow-resolutionimage,thenextstepistomakeanyimageadjustmentsthatcanimprovepicturequality.Thismayincludeadjustingthebrightnessandcontrastintheimage,boostingsaturationtocompensateforanywashedoutcolors,andusingLevelstobetterdefinethetonalrangeoftheimage.

Resampledimagesalmostalwaysneedsomesortofsharpeningtoimprovecontrastsandedgedetails.Tosharpenyourimage:

1. ChooseFilter Sharpen UnsharpMask.

2.Entertheappropriatesettingsintheresultingdialogbox.Forourexample,weentered184fortheAmount,1.3fortheRadius,and10fortheThreshold.

3. ClickOK.TheresultofoursharpeningisshowninourSolutionimage.

Makethemostofwhatyouhave

There'snomagicpotiontoturnalow-resolutionimageintoahigh-resolutionprint.However,ifyoufollowthestepswe'veprovidedandmakecreativeattemptstoimprovethequalityofyourimages,you'llmakethemostofwhatyouhaveandputthosepixelsonpaperwithgoodresults.

Page 273: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 274: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Part3:ImageManipulationandAlteration

Whiletonalandcolorcorrectionsareimportanttotheoverallqualityofyourimage,thechancetoreallymakethemshinecomeswhenyoustartpushingaroundthosepixels.Typicallycalledimagemanipulationorimagealteration,Photoshopgivesyouallthetoolsyouneedtomakeeachpicturetrulyyourown.Don'tlikethattreeinthebackground?Removeit!Unhappywiththecolorofapurpleshirt?Makeitblue!Withalittleplanningandanunderstandingofhowthesetoolswork,you'llneverhavetosettleforrealityagain.

Chapter6:ArtisticApproaches

Burntheedgesofyourphotostoaddmood

Page 275: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PaintgradualtoneswiththeAirbrushoption

Createconvincingreflections

ControlvisualfocuswiththeGradienttool

CombineimageswiththeExtractcommand

Enhanceyourimageswithwell-placedlight

Problem:SolutionRemoveacompleximagefromitsbackground

Problem:SolutionRemoveanobjectfromaphoto

Chapter7:Filters

UsingtheFilterGallery

Combiningfilterlayers

Filteryourportraits

Addtexturewithsimulatedfilmgrain

Problem:SolutionCorrectcolorcasts

Problem:SolutionModifyfacialfeatures

Chapter8:Masks

UseQuickMaskmodetomakeaselection

Createvignetteswithlayermasks

Cutoutpartsofimageswithlayermasks

Editingwithvectormasks

Problem:SolutionFixaccidentalsilhouettes

Problem:SolutionRestorelosthighlightdetail

Page 276: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 277: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter6.ArtisticApproaches

Page 278: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Burntheedgesofyourphotostoaddmood

Forsomereason,photographswithburntedges,liketheoneshowninFigureA,areintriguing.Maybeit'sthedarkcoloringcausedbytheburningembersormaybeit'stheglimmerofwhatwasalmostlost.Whateverthereason,ifyou'dliketoemulatethesortofmoodburnt-edgedphotographscreate,youdon'thavetodamageanyofyourvaluedphotographstoproduceit.We'llshowyouhowtosimulatethelookofburntedgeswithoutsomuchasstrikingamatch.

FigureA.

Prepareyourdocument

1. OpentheimageyouwanttomodifyinPhotoshop.

2. MakesureyourimageisinRGBorCMYKColormode(Image Mode).

3. MakeacopyofyourdocumentbychoosingImage Duplicate.

Page 279: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.EnterafilenameintheresultingDuplicateImagedialogbox,andthenclickOK.

5.ClosetheoriginaldocumentanddisplaytheLayerspalette(Window Layers)inyourduplicateddocument.

6.

Double-clickontheBackgroundlayerandnamethelayerburntedgesintheresultingdialogbox.ClickOKandthelayerisrenamed,asshowninFigureB.

FigureB.

7.ClickOKtomakeitaworkinglayer.You'renowreadytocreateyourbaseframe.

Createabaseframe

Tocreatethebaseframe,we'llfirstscorchtheedgesofourimageusingtheBrushtoolandsomepaint.Then,wecanusetheErasertooltocreatethelookoftatterededges.

Scorchtheedges

1. SelecttheBrushtool fromtheToolbox.

ClickontheDarkerWarmBrownswatchintheSwatchespalette(WindowSwatches),asshowninFigureC.

Page 280: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

FigureC.

3.

ClickonthearrownexttotheBrushpreviewwindowonthetooloptionsbartodisplaytheBrushPresetPickerandselectasoftroundbrushthesizedependsonthesizeofyourimageandmonitor.WechosetheSoftRound200Pixelsbrush,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

ChooseMultiplyfromtheModedropdownlistandsettheOpacityto40%.

Page 281: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

5.

ClickanddragtheBrushtoolovertheedgesofyourimage,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Erasetheedges

Now,tomaketheedgesofourimagelookmorerealistic,let'sroughenthemupusingtheErasertool.

1. SelecttheErasertool fromtheToolbox.

2.DisplaytheBrushPresetPickerandselectthe100pxRoughRoundBristlebrush.

ChooseBrushfromtheModedropdownlistandsettheOpacityto100%,asshowninFigureF.

Page 282: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

FigureF.

4.

Graduallyeraseportionsoftheimage'souteredge,asshowninFigureG.

FigureG.

SettheOpacityto20%andrunyourbrushovertheedgesagaininjustafew

Page 283: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. areastocompletethelook.

Note

Tohidethedocumentrulersandavoidinadvertentlydraggingrulerguidesontoyourcanvas,chooseView Rulersorpress[Ctrl]R( RontheMac).

Burninthecolor

Whenyou'resatisfiedwiththeframingofyourimage,youcanthenbegindarkeningtheedgestomakethemlookburned.YoucandothiseasilyusingtheBurntool.

1.SelecttheBurntool fromtheToolbox(it'slocatedontheDodgetoolflyoutmenu).

2.SelectalargeroundfeatheredbrushfromtheBrushPresetPickeronthetooloptionsbar.

3.

SelectHighlightsfromtheRangedropdownlistifyourimageislightincolor;chooseMidtonesifitconsistsofmoremediumtones;orchooseShadowsifit'sdark.

4.SettheExposuredropdownlistto50%.Forourexample,wechosetheSoftRound200PixelsbrushandsettheRangedropdownlisttoHighlights.

Paintoverjusttheedgesofyourimage,asshowninFigureH.Themoreyoupaintoveranarea,thedarkeritbecomes.YoumayhavetoexperimentabitwiththedifferentRangeoptions.Testouteachonetoseewhatworksbestforyourimage.Also,youmighttryusingoneRangeandthenselectingadifferentonetofine-tuneyouredges.

FigureH.

Page 284: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Aburningdesire

Whetheryou'relookingtoaddasubtleframingelementtoyourdesignsoryouwanttosetthemonfire,youcanreallymakeanimpactusingthetechniqueswedescribedinthisarticle.Tryusingthistechniqueontextalongwithimages.Andexperimentwithdifferentbrushesandfilterstocreateuniqueedgepatterns.

Page 285: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PaintgradualtoneswiththeAirbrushoption

Sincethelate1870s,theairbrush,asanartist'sandphotographer'spaintandretouchingtool,hashadalongstandingandprominentplaceintheworldofcommercialart,design,andphotography.Tofullymasterthistoolcantakemanyyearsoftrialanderror,practice,andpatience.Buttheresultsareoftenrealistic,aswellasbreathtaking.

Photoshopprovideswhat'scalledtheAirbrushoption,whichallowsyoutousetheBrushtoolasanairbrush.Whetheryou'recreatinganimagefromscratch,addingtoanexistingimage,orretouchingaphoto,you'llbeamazedatnotonlyhowwelltheoptionsimulatesthespraystrokesoftherealthing,buthoweasyitistouseaswell.Inaddition,youcaneasilycorrectordeleteamisplacedstrokeorwrongcolor;thisisafeaturetherealdealdoesn'thave.

UnderstandingthePhotoshopAirbrushoption

AlthoughtheAirbrushoption,ofcourse,doesn'tusepaintordye,theairbrushstrokeeffectlooksandreactsinmuchthesamewayastherealthing.Thestrokecolorisconcentratedinthecenter,andthinsasitreachestheedges,asshowninFiguresA1andA2.Whenwefirstapplythestroke,thecoloristransparent.Thecolorthenbecomesopaqueasweaddmoreandmorecolor.Thelongerthestrokeisheldinoneplace,ortheslowerthestrokeisdraggedacrossthecanvas,thegreaterthecolorbuildupthatappears,asshowninFiguresA3andA4onthepreviouspage.

FigureA1.

Page 286: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureA2.

Asthestrokeisdragged,colorbecomesmoreandmoreopaque.

FigureA3.

FigureA4.

Page 287: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UsingtheBrushtoolasanairbrush

Totryyourhandatairbrushing:

1. OpentheimageyouwanttoworkwithinPhotoshop.

2.CreateanewlayerbychoosingNewLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

3. WhentheNewLayerdialogboxappears,enterAirbrushintheNametextbox.

4.KeeptheotheroptionsintheNewLayerdialogboxsetattheirdefaultsandclickOK.

5. ChoosetheBrushtoolfromtheToolboxandthetooloptionsbarappears.

6. ChoosetheSoftRound65PixelsbrushfromtheBrushPresetPicker.

7.KeepboththeOpacityandFlowsetto100%forthemoment,andleavetheothersettingsastheyare.

SettingtheAirbrushoption

1.

EnabletheAirbrushoptionbyclickingtheSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbutton onthetooloptionsbar.It'simportanttonotethateverytimeyouchangebrushsettings,youhavetoclicktheAirbrushoptionagain.

Moveyourmousepointertoyourcanvas,andtogetthefeelforhowtheAirbrushoptionfeels,trydoodlingalittle,asshowninFigureB.

Page 288: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

FigureB.

WorkingwiththeBrushespalette

YoucanusetheBrushespalette,locatedontherightsideofthetooloptionsbar,tosetadditionaloptionsthatcontrolthewayinwhichtheBrushtoolappliesastroke.OpenthepalettebyclickingontheBrushestabinthepalettewell.Whenthepaletteopens,asshowninFigureC,you'llnoticethattheShapeDynamicsandAirbrushoptionsarealreadyselectedundertheBrushPresetslist.That'sbecausetheseoptionscorrespondtothesameoptionsfoundonthetooloptionsbaritself,andthere'snodifferencebetweensettingthemonthetooloptionsbarortheBrushespalette.EachoftheBrushTipShapeoptionscontainsadditionaloptionsettings,whichyoucandisplaybyclickingonaBrushTipShapeoption.There'soneoption,theScatteringoption,that'sworthtakingacloserlookatbecauseitbestcopiesthespattereffectachievedbyanactualairbrush.

FigureC.

Page 289: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PracticingwiththeScatteringoption

TheScatteringoptionproducesastrokeofrandomlyplacedspatteredcolorthatyoucanusetopainttexturedlinesandgritty-orsandy-lookingsurfaces,amongotherthings.Let'stryitoutnow.

1. ClickontheScatteringoption.

2. Enter235intheScattertextboxwhentheScatteringoptionmenuappears.

3.KeeptheCountsetat1,theCountJittersetat0,andtheControlsetatOffforthepurposeofclarity.

4.DisablethevisibilityfortheAirbrushlayerbyclickingontheIndicatesLayerVisibilityicon intheLayerspalette.

5. CreateanewlayerandnameitScattering.

Moveyourmousepointertothecenterofyourcanvasandtryoutafewstrokesjustforfun,aswedidinFigureDonthepreviouspage.

Page 290: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureD.

Now,let'saddasandy-lookingtexturetothebackgroundofthephoto.

1. ChooseasmallBrushsizesuchastheSoftRound5Pixelsbrush.

2.ClickontheBrushespalette,andenteralargevaluesuchas790intheScattertextbox.

3. CreateanewlayerintheLayerspalette,andnameitSandy.

4.ChoosetheEyedroppertool fromtheToolboxandthenclickintheimagebackgroundtoselectoneofthedarkercolorstopaintwith.

5.ChoosetheBrushtool fromtheToolboxandclicktheSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbuttononthetooloptionsbar.

Moveyourmousepointertoalighterbackgroundareainyourimageandbeginpainting.Byvaryingthespeedanddirectionofyourstrokes,youcandecreaseandincreasethecolorbuildupintheimage,achievingastucco-liketexture,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 291: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

RetouchingwiththeAirbrushoption

Besidesbeingabletopaintallsortsofvaryingtonesonyourimage,youcanusetheAirbrushoptiontoretouchanimageaswell.Retouchingcanbeassimpleasremovingafewdustspotsandscratchesfromaphototore-creatingthesideofanimagebecauseitwascroppedincorrectly.Let'strysomethinginbetween;we'llretouchasmallareaofourphotoshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Inthelower-leftcornerofthephoto,afallenleaflooksoutofplacesowewanttoremoveit.Surroundingtheleafisacoverofpurple-bluespringflowers,andthephotowouldlookgoodifwecontinuedthemthroughtheareawheretheleafis.

Page 292: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Sincethepurple-blueflowersareoutoffocus,theirshapesare,forthemostpart,circularblobs.Thismeansthatsincewedon'thavetoaddagreatdealoffinedetail,theretouchingwon'tbeallthatdifficulttodo.

Whenapproachingajobsuchasthis,youhavetothinkinlayersofcolor.Forourimage,thebottomlayeristheshadowlayerofblackandverydarkgrays.Thenextlayerupisthemidtonelayerofpurple-blues.Thetoplayeristhehighlightlayerofpalepurplesandlightblues.Mixedhereandthereareafewsplashesofgreen.

Addingthebasecolor

Let'sactuallyworkonlayerssowecaneasilycheckourprogressbytogglinglayerviewsaswego.

1. Opentheimageyouwishtoworkwith.

2. ChooseNewLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

3.EnterShadowsintheNametextboxoftheNewLayerdialogbox,andclickOK.

4.SelectashadowcolorbychoosingtheEyedroppertoolfromtheToolboxandclickingonashadowareaintheimage.

5. ChoosetheBrushtoolfromtheToolbox.

6.SelecttheSoftRound21PixelsbrushfromtheBrushPresetPickerandclicktheSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbuttononthetooloptionsbar.

SettheFlow,whichistherateatwhichcolorisapplied,toabout20%andleaveOpacityandModesetastheyare.Thisway,wecangraduallybuildupthecolor.Beginpaintingontheareayouwishtocover,workingupthecoloruntiltheareaiscoveredbutstillpartiallyvisible,asshownintheenlargedsectionofourexampleinFigureGonthepreviouspage.Asyoucansee,thisalonemakesquiteadifference.

FigureG1.

Page 293: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

7.

FigureG2.

Addingthemid-tonecolor

1. CreateanewlayerintheLayerspaletteandnameitMidtones.

2.PickoutanappropriatecolorinyourimagewiththeEyedroppertool.Wechoseamidpurple-bluecolorforourexample.

3.

ChooseabrushfromtheBrushPresetPickeronthetooloptionsbar.Sincewewantedtoworkinsmallerareas,buildingupthepurple,wechosetheSoftRound9Pixelsbrush.

4. ClicktheSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbutton.

5.Paintoveronlythemid-grayareasintheareayouwishtocoverbecauseyoudon'twanttocoveruptheshadows.

Page 294: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

Workinsmallcircularstrokesofvaryingsizesandshapes.Asyougo,lookatareasinthephotoyou'retryingtomatchforcluesastohowyourstrokesshouldlook,asshowninFigureH.

FigureH.

Addingthehighlightcolor

Thefinalstepistoaddthehighlights.

1. CreateanewlayerintheLayerspalette.

2. NamethenewlayerHighlights.

3. SelectahighlightcolorwiththeEyedroppertool.

4.ChooseabrushfromtheBrushPresetPicker.WereducedthebrushsizeagainbychoosingtheSoftRound5Pixelsbrush.

5.ReduceyourFlowtoabout7%,sinceevensmallamountsofalightcolorappliedoveramidordarkcolorareverynoticeable.

ClicktheSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbuttonandaddafewhighlights,takingcarenottooverdoit.Forourexample,withalltheoptionsandbrushsettingsleftthesame,wenextpickedoutamid-greencolorfromthephoto,andaddedafewsmallblobsofgreenhereandthere,asshowninFigureI.

Page 295: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

FigureI.

7. TakeamomenttozoomoutbychoosingtheZoomtool fromtheToolbox.

8.

Lookatyourphotoasawhole,asshowninFigureJ.Doestheretouchedarealooknaturalandfitintoitssurroundings?Ifso,you'redone;itwasn'tallthatdifficult,wasit?Iftheretouchedareadoesn'tnaturallyblendintoitssurroundings,continueaddingtotheappropriatelayer,butbecarefulnottooverworkit.

FigureJ.

Subtleshadesofcolor

TheAirbrushoptionchangestheBrushtoolintoapaintingtoolthatallowsyoutoapplystrokesofgradienttones.Thismakesitpossibletoeasilyaddsubtleshadesandrichcolorswiththesmoothestoftransitions.WhencoupledwithaBrushes

Page 296: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

palettethatfurtheraddsamultitudeofstrokeandbrushtipsettings,theresultingpossibilitiesarelimitless.

Page 297: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Createconvincingreflections

OneofthegreatestbenefitsofPhotoshopistheabilitytoaddobjectstophotosthatweren'tthereatthetimeoftheshoot.Itemsareoftenaddedafterthefact,suchascloudstoskies,grasstolawns,andleavestotrees.AnothergreatbenefitofPhotoshopistheabilitytoaddsurfacetreatmentstophotographsthatwereeitherimpossibletoachieveatthetimeoftheshot,ornotthoughtofuntilwellafterthefact.Shadows,ripples,andreflectionsareallexamplesoftreatmentsthatcanaddalittlepizzazztoanotherwiseless-than-awesomeimage.We'llputtheseabilitiestoworkandshowyouhowtocreatearealistic-lookingreflectionliketheoneshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Creatingareflection

Let'screateareflectionforanobjectbyselectingaphotothatwastakenfromamediumangleviewpoint,asshowninFigureB.Lookingatthephoto,you'llnoticethatnotmuchofthetopandbottomofthecarisseen,makingitagoodcandidateforaddingareflection.Youcanaddareflectiontoeithersideortothe

Page 298: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

bottomofthephotoandmakeitrealisticinappearance.Wewanttoaddittothebottomtogivetheimpressionthattheautoissittingonahighlypolishedfloor.

FigureB.

Enlargingthecanvas

Sincewewanttobeabletoseetheentirereflection,wehavetomakethecanvaslarger.Rightnowthecanvasmeasures93/8"by6".Ifwedoublethedepth(length)oftheimage,we'llhaveplentyofroomtoworkin.

1. SelectImage CanvasSize.

SelectPercentintheHeightdropdownlist,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Page 299: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

3.Enter200intheHeighttextbox.TheAnchorselectionshowsthedirectionthecanvaswillbeexpandeddownward.

4.

Selectthetop-middlebutton,asshowninFigureD,andthecanvasexpandsinthedirectionshown.

FigureD.

ClickOKandthecanvasenlarges,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 300: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Fillinginthefloor

Wenowwanttofillintheexpandedcanvaswithacolorthatvisuallycontinuesthefloorintotheforeground.

1.

SelecttheEyedroppertool fromtheToolboxandclickinthebottom-middleoftheimagetoselectafloorcolor.Now,we'llfillintheareawiththecolorwejustselected.

2.

ChoosethePaintBuckettool fromtheToolbox,positionyourmousepointerinthetransparentareaoftheimage,click,andthefloorimagefillsin,asshowninFigureFonthenextpage.

FigureF.

Page 301: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Copyingandflippingthereflectionimage

Next,weneedtocopyandfliptheautoimage.

1.

ChoosetheRectangularMarqueetool fromtheToolboxanddragoutaselectionborderthatonlyincludestheauto,asshownintheexampleinFigureG.

FigureG.

2.

Press[Ctrl]C( ContheMac)tocopytheautoimage,andthenpress[Ctrl]V(VontheMac)topastetheimage.IntheLayerspalette,anewlayerisautomaticallycreatedthatincludestheselection.

Renamethelayerbydouble-clickingonthenameLayer1andentering

Page 302: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3. Reflectioninthetextbox.

4.

SelectEdit Transform FlipVerticalfromthemenubarandthereflectionimageisflipped,asshowninFigureH.

FigureH.

Positioningthereflectionimage

Next,we'llmovethereflectionimagedowntojustunderthewheelsoftheauto.

1. MakecertainthattheReflectionlayerintheLayerspaletteisstillselected.

2. SelecttheMovetool fromtheToolbox.

Clickonthereflectionimage,anddragitintoposition,asshowninFigureI.

FigureI.

Page 303: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

Adjustingtheopacityofthereflectionimage

Thereflectionimagenowhasanaturallooktoit.Buttofine-tuneit,let'smakethereflectionsomewhattransparent,sincenoreflectionisasbrightastheoriginalobject.IntheLayerspalette,enter60intheOpacitytextbox.Theresultisamorerealisticreflection,asshowninFigureA.

Modifyingthereflectionimage

Sincethereflectionimageisalayer,youcanmodifyitusinganumberofinterestingeffectswithoutaffectingtheoriginalautoimage.We'llbrieflystepthroughusingtheLiquifyandGlassfilterstoshowacoupleofuniqueeffects.Thepossibilitieswithvariousfilters,however,areendless.

ApplyingtheLiquifyfilter

1. ChooseFilter Liquifyfromthemenubar.

2. SelecttheForwardWarptool fromtheLiquifyToolboxlocatedalongtheleftsideofthedialogbox.

Page 304: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.SettheBrushSizepop-upsliderboxtoabout65pxinthetooloptionssectionlocatedalongtherightsideofthedialogbox.

4.Moveyourmousepointertothecenterpreviewsection,anddragitusingshortstrokesupanddownoverthereflectionimagetoproducearippleeffect.

5.

ClickOKwhenyou'vefinishedandtheLiquifyfiltereffectisappliedtoyourreflection,asshowninFigureJ.

FigureJ.

ApplyingtheGlassfilter

1. ChooseFilter Distort Glassfromthemenubar.

2.

Enter7intheDistortiontextbox,enter3intheSmoothnesstextbox,selectFrostedfromtheTexturedropdownlist,andenter100intheScalingtextboxtofollowourexample.

ClickOKandthat'sallthereistogettingaglasseffect,asshowninFigureK.

Page 305: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

FigureK.

Reflectonthis

Surfacetreatments,suchasreflections,canaddgreatinterestandexcitementtoimages.They'requick,easytodo,andcanaddavisualfeaturetoanimagethatwasn'tpossiblewhenphotographingthesubject.

Lookingatreflectionsindetail

Areflectionissimplyavisualcopyofanimagethat'sflippedupsidedown.Thatstatementiscorrect,butthere'salittlemoretoit.Byunderstandingalittleofwhat'sgoingon,you'llbeabletocreatemorerealisticreflections.Whenlighthitsanobject,itbouncesoffinalldirections.Ifpartofitbouncesoffdirectlytooureyes,weseeanimage.Ifpartofitbouncesoff,hitsasurface,andthenbouncesoffthatsurfacetooureyes,weseeareflectionoftheimage.Whatthereflectionlookslikedependsonthepositionofthesurfacerelativetous.

Positioningofthereflectingsurface

Ifthesurfaceispositionedbehindtheobject,thereflectionweseeisthebackoftheobject.If

Page 306: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

it'sbelow,weseethebottomoftheobject,andifit'sattheside,weseethesideoftheobject,asshowninFigureA.

FigureA1.

FigureA2.

FigureA3.

Testingitout

Let'sdoavisualtestandtryoutthenotionthatareflectionissimplyacopyofanimagethat'sflippedupsidedown.TheexampleinFigureB1isanimageandareflectionthat'sbouncingoffasurfacelocatedbelowtheobject.TheexampleinFigureB2isanimageandacopyofjusttheimageflippedupsidedownandpositionedbelowtheobject.Now,comparethetwoexamples.Asyoucansee,areflectionisn'tjustanupsidedowncopyofanoriginalimage.

FigureB1.

Page 307: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureB2.

Reflectingaviewpoint

Studyjustthereflectionoftheobject,asshowninFigureC.Noticethatyounotonlyseethefrontoftheobjectbuttheundersideaswell.Wherewouldyouhavetopositionyourselftoseethesamething?You'dactuallyhavetobebelowtheobjectinthesamelocationasthereflectingsurfacetohavethesameviewpoint.Whatthismeans,then,isthatareflectionisactuallyavisualcopyofanimageasseenfromtheviewpointofthereflectingsurface.

FigureC.

Changingyourviewpoint

Let'sdoonemorequickvisualtest.Let'skeeptheobjectthesame,thereflectingsurfacethesame,butchangetheviewpointoftheobservertoahigh,medium,andlowangle,asshowninFigureD.Eachviewpointshowsarealreflectionoftheobject,andonemadebycopyingitandflippingitupsidedown.Whichpairlooksmostalike?Theansweristhemediumangleset,becausefromthatviewpointthesmallestamountofthetopandbottomoftheobjectisseen.

FigureD1.

Page 308: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureD2.

FigureD3.

Page 309: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ControlvisualfocuswiththeGradienttool

Therearetimeswhenvisualclutterinadigitalphotoisgood,especiallywhenit'susedtoconveyasenseofcomplexityordisorder.Butgenerally,justasitsnamesuggests,visualcluttertendstoconfusetheviewerandmuddleyourmessage.Thisiswhywetrytoavoiditwhencomposingaphoto.

Buttherearetimeswhennoamountofframing,cropping,orselectivefocuswillkeepyourcompositionsimple.Thiscanbeduetoanynumberoffactors,suchasavailablelighting,lackofsetuptime,orevensubjectlocation,asshowninFigureA.Butwhateveryourobstacles,onewayyoucancontrolthevisualfocusinyourimagesiswithPhotoshop'sGradienttool.Notonlyisiteasytouse,butitprovidesaverynaturalisticresult,asshowninFigureB.

FigureA.

FigureB.

Page 310: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Findingyourfocus

Aprominentforegroundsubjectsetagainstanincreasinglysoftermiddlegroundandbackgroundhasbeenatechniqueusednotonlybyphotographersofthelasttwocenturies,butalsobymasterpaintersthroughoutthehistoryofWesternEuropetoadddramaandperspectivetotheirartwork.

Let'sstartbylaunchingPhotoshopandopeninganimagethathasanobviousforeground,middleground,andbackground,butdoesn'thaveanapparentvisualfocus,suchastheoneshowninFigureA.

Planningyourmoves

Thefirstthingyoumustdoisdetermineexactlywhatyourvisualfocusisand,inturn,whichsubjectareasyouwantmoreclearlyidentifiedasfore-,mid-,andbackground.Thevisualorderofareasinourexampleimageistheclumpofaspenleavesintheforeground;thetreetrunkandbranchesinthemidground,andthedistantsetofleavesandskyinthebackground,asshowninFigureC.Asis,it'sdifficulttodiscernthisorder,sowe'llisolatetheminawaytodifferentiatethatthethreesubjectareasareintheforeground,midground,andbackground.

Page 311: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureC.

Splittingyourareas

Next,we'llneedtosplitoffthevariousareasofthephotosowecanapplyagradienttoeachusingtheGradienttool.Thereareacoupleofwaysyoucanaccomplishthis.YoucanmakeduplicatelayersoftheBackgroundlayer,oneforeachinterestarea,anderasethepartyoudon'twant.Or,byusingthePentool,youcancreateapathyoucanusetoselectandcopyeachareaontoaseparatelayer.SincethePentoolmethodismoreflexibleandprecise,we'llusethat.

Plottingyourpaths

1.

ClickonthePathspalette,orchooseWindow Pathsfromthemenubar,ifitisn'talreadyshowing,andselectNewPathfromthePathspalette'spop-upmenu.

2.EnterbackgroundintheNametextboxwhentheNewPathdialogboxappears,andthenclickOK.

Page 312: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

SelectthePentool fromtheToolboxandplaceyourmousepointeronyourcanvas.Theareayoustartwithisuptoyou,butforthisexample,beginwiththebackgroundandmoveforward.Thebackgroundinourexampleistheskyandthemostdistantsetofleaves.

4.

MovethePentooloffthecanvas,setananchorpoint,andthenmovebackontothecanvasandsetanchorpointsatplaceswherethebackgroundandmidgroundmeet,asshowninFigureDonthepreviouspage.

FigureD.

5. Closethepathbyclickingonthefirstanchorpointyoumade.

6. Repeattheprocessagainforthemidgroundarea.Namethispathmidground.

Convertingapathtoaselectionborder

Page 313: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Nowwe'llapplyagradienttoanewlayerusingapathconvertedtoaselectionborderasamask.Youcanchangetheselectionborderatanytimebychangingthepathandconvertingittoaselectionborderagain.Let'sfirstworkwiththebackgroundarea.

1. SelectNewLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

2.EnterbackgroundareaintheNametextboxintheNewLayerdialogbox,andthenclickOK.

3. SelectthebackgroundareapathfromthePathspalette.

4.

ClicktheLoadPathAsASelectionbuttonandyou'llnoticethatinyourcanvas,thebackgroundpathoutlinehaschangedtoamarqueeoutline,indicatingthatit'snowaselectionborder.

Applyingagradienttoalayer

1.SelecttheGradienttool fromtheToolbox,andonthetooloptionsbar,clicktheLinearGradientbuttontoselectit.

2.

SelecttheForegroundToTransparentpresetgradientfillswatchfromtheGradientPickerdropdownlist,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

GototheSwatchespaletteandselectthewhiteswatch.

Page 314: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

4.ChooseSelect Inverse,thenSelect Feather,andintheFeatherSelectiondialogbox,enter1intheFeatherRadiusxPixelstextboxandclickOK.

5.

Positionyourmousepointeroffthecanvasaboveyourimage,andwhileholdingdownyourmousebutton,dragagradientfillstraightdowntoapointjustpasttheselectionborder,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Releasethemousebutton;you'venowappliedagradienttothebackgroundarealayer,asshowninFigureG.

FigureG.

Page 315: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

Note

Whystartoffthecanvas?WhenyoudrawalineargradientusingthepresetForegroundToTransparentgradient,it's100%opaqueatitsstartingpointand100%transparentatitsendpoint.Sinceyouonlywanttoincludeaportionofthetransparentsection,youstartyourgradientfilloffthecanvas.

Atthispoint,let'sworkonthemidgroundarea,repeatingthesameprocessweusedforthebackgroundarea.

1. SelectNewLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenu.

2.EntermidgroundareaintheNametextboxoftheNewLayerdialogbox,andthenclickOK.

3. SelectthemidgroundareapathinthePathspalette.

4. ClicktheLoadPathAsASelectionbutton.

Positionyourmousepointeroffcanvasaboveyourimageanddragagradient

Page 316: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. fillstraightdowntoapointjustpasttheselectionborder.

6.

Releaseandagradientisappliedtothemidgroundlayer,asshowninFigureH.

FigureH.

Makingthefinaladjustments

Thelastthingyoumustdoisstepback,lookatyourphoto,andchecktoseeifyou'veaccomplishedtheresultyou'relookingfor.Ourphotoexampleisclose,butnotquitethereyet.Boththemidgroundgradientandthebackgroundgradientaretoostrong.Sincethegradientsareonindividuallayers,eachiseasytoadjustbychangingtheOpacitysettingsintheLayerspalette.

Tocutbackonthemidgroundareagradient:

1. SelectthemidgroundlayerfromtheLayerspalette.

Page 317: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

AdjusttheOpacityslidertoabout80%,asshowninFigureI.

FigureI.

3.

Repeatforthebackgroundarealayer,aswedidforFigureJ.

FigureJ.

Page 318: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Greatgradients

Gradientsareagreatwaytocontrolthevisualfocusinyourphotos.UsingPhotoshop'sGradienttool,selectionborders,andlayers,gradientsarequicktomake,easytoapply,andnicelycontrollable,whichgivesyouapowerfulwaytostrengthenotherwiseless-than-idealimages.

Page 319: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CombineimageswiththeExtractcommand

Ibetthissoundsfamiliar:You'reoutshootingasubjectthatneverstandsstill,suchasyourkidsoryourpets.Whenyouframeforthekids,thebackgroundisn'tright;whenyouframeforthebackground,thekidsare,well,neverentirelyintheforeground.So,doyouwaituntilyourkidsorpetsmovetojusttherightspot?Probablynot.Ifyou'reusingadigitalcamera,theinclinationistotakethephoto,hopeforthebest,andmoveon.Butifyoureallywanttheperfectphoto,whatdoyoudo?Theanswerissimpleandeasy.Takeaphotographofthekids(orthedogorthecat),andoneofthebackground,andthencombinethetwo,aswedidinFigureA,withPhotoshop'sExtractcommand.

FigureA.

Preparingyourimages

Page 320: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Beforewebegin,selecttwophotosthatwillworkwelltogether.Forourexample,we'llcombineaphotoofacat,asshowninFigureB1,withabackgroundphotooftrees,asshowninFigureB2.LaunchPhotoshopandopenthetwoimagesyouplantoworkwith.

FigureB1.

FigureB2.

Page 321: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Wewanttoselectandcopythebackgroundimage(inourexample,theimageofthetree),andthenpasteitasanewlayerintotheimageofoursubject(inourexample,thecat).Todoso:

1. Press[Ctrl]A( AontheMac),then[Ctrl]C( ContheMac).

2. SelectWindow cat.jpg,andthenpress[Ctrl]V( VontheMac)topaste.

3. Namethenewlayer.WecalledourlayerTrees.

Now,wewanttomakeaduplicateofourforegroundlayer.

1.Renametheforegroundlayer,changingthenamefromBackgroundtosomethingmoredescriptivesuchasCat.

2.SelectDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspalette'spop-upmenuandenteranewnamesuchasCat2intheAstextbox,andthenclickOK.

Next,wewanttoreorderourlayers.Inourexample,wewanttheCat2layerabovetheTreeslayer.Todoso:

Selectthebackgroundlayer(Treesinourexample)anddragitdownbetweentheduplicateforegroundlayer(Cat2inourexample)andtheforegroundlayer(Catinourexample),asshowninFigureC.Thiswaywe'llbeabletoseethetreesasabackgroundoncewe'veextractedthecatfromtheCat2layer.

Page 322: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

FigureC.

2. SelecttheCat2layerwhenyou'vefinished.

PuttingtheExtractcommandtouse

1.

SelectFilter ExtracttoopentheExtractdialogbox,asshowninFigureDonthenextpage.

FigureD.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 323: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Takeafewmomentstolookitoverandbecomefamiliarwiththetoolsandoptionsfoundthere.TheExtracttool'sToolboxisontheleftside;theoptiondropdownlistsareontherightside.Theoptionscontrolhowthetoolsperform.

Selectingyourtooloptions

1. SelecttheEdgeHighlightertool .

Settheoptionsforthetoolinthepanelsontherightsideofthedialogbox.We'llreviewavailableoptions,butwon'tsetallofthem:

BrushSize.TheBrushSizeslidersetsthebrushsizeoftheEdgeHighlighter,Eraser, Cleanup ,andEdgeTouchup .Forourexample,setthebrushsizeto65.

HighlightandFill.TheHighlightandFilldropdownlistssetthecolorsfortheEdgeHighlightertoolandFilltool .Thecolordoesn'taffectyourimage,butmerelyshowsthepartofyourimageyou'vechosentoextract.Fornow,usetheHighlightandFilldefaultcolorsofGreenandBlue,sincethey'llshowupwellagainsttheimageedgecolors.

SmartHighlighting.You'llusetheSmartHighlightingoptionwhenyou'rehighlightingawell-definededge.Theoptionhelpsyoutokeepthehighlightonthesubject'simageedgeandappliesahighlightthat'sjust

Page 324: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

wideenoughtocovertheedge,regardlessofthecurrentselectedbrushsize.SelecttheSmartHighlightingcheckbox.

Smooth.TheSmoothslidersetstheamountofedgesmoothingduringtheextractionprocess.Thehigherthevalue,thegreatertheedgedetailissmoothedorblurred.It'sbestatfirsttokeepitsetat0oraverylownumberuntilyouseetheeffecttheextractionprocesshasonyoursubjectimage.

Channel.TheChanneldropdownlistselectsachannelifyouchoosetobaseyourhighlightselectiononaparticularchannel.

ForceForeground.YoucanusetheForceForegroundoptionwiththeEyedroppertool toselectthecoloronwhichyourhighlightselectionwillbebased.

Show.TheShowdropdownlistisactiveonlyaftertheforegroundsubjecthasbeenextracted.Youcanuseittotoggleyourviewofeitheryouroriginalimageoryourextractedimage.

Display.TheDisplaydropdownlistchangesthebackgroundcoloragainstwhichyourextractedforegroundisviewed.WithNoneselected,thebackgroundisthedefaultcheckerboard(transparent).OtherselectionsincludeBlackMatte,GrayMatte,WhiteMatte,Other,andMask.Maskshowstheimageareathatisn'tselectedtobeextracted.

ShowHighlightandShowFill.TheShowHighlightandShowFilloptionsshowtheareasinyourextractedimagethatyouhighlightedandfilledwithyourEdgeHighlighterandFilltools.

Highlightingtheextractionedge

Oncewe'vesetthetool'soptions,wecanbegintheprocessofhighlightingtheextractionedge.Duringtheprocess,wecanchangetheoptionsatanytimetosuitourneeds.

SelecttheEdgeHighlightertoolandbegintohighlighttheedgeareaintheimagethatwillformtheboundarybetweenwhatisandisn'textracted,asshowninFigureE.

Page 325: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

FigureE.

2.

Completethehighlightingofyoursubject.Ifyoucometoanareathatcontainsintricateedgedetail,andyouneedtouseasmallerbrushsize,simplygototheToolOptionsBrushSizedropdownlist,changethesize,andresumehighlightingyourextractionedge.

Fillingintheextractionarea

1. SelecttheFilltool.

2.

Positionthepointerwithintheextractionarea,andclick.Theareainyourimagecoveredwiththehighlightandfillcolorwillbetheforegroundareaextractedfromyourimage,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Page 326: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Alteringtheextraction

Aspreviouslymentioned,youcanchangeyoursettingsatanypointintheprocess.Ifyouwanttoincludemoreareainthehighlightextractionedge,youcandoso.

SelecttheEdgeHighlightertoolagainandmakethechanges.Whenyoudoso,theselectedfillcolordisappears.Thismeansthatonceyou'vefinishedmakingchangestotheextractionedge,youmustfillintheextractionareaagain.

Ifyourextractionedgecoverstoomuchofyourimage,youcaneraseasectionofitwiththeErasertool.Asbefore,whenmakingachange,thefillcolordisappears,andyoumustfillintheextractionareaagain.

Previewingtheprogress

Onceyou'veselectedtheentireedgeandfilledtheextractionarea,youcanpreviewourprogress.

ClickthePreviewbutton,andtheextractedsubjectappears,asshowninFigureG.

Page 327: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

FigureG.

2.

SelecttheZoomtool andenlargethesubjectareatoexamineitmoreclosely.Iftheextractedsubjectisn'twell-definedagainstthecheckeredbackground,changeitbychoosingadifferentbackgroundfromtheDisplaydropdownlist.

Ifthepreviewoftheextractedsubjectisn'texactlywhatyouwant,youcanusetheCleanuptoolandtheEdgeTouchuptooltotouchupyourwork.TheCleanuptoolremovesbackgroundtracesfromtheextractedsubjectandhasacumulativeeffect.YoucanalsousetheCleanuptooltofillgapsandholesintheextractedsubjectbyholdingdownthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac)whiledraggingtorestoretheimagetotheextractedsubject.TheEdgeTouchuptoolsharpenstheedgeoftheextractedsubjectandalsohasacumulativeeffect.

Extractingtheimage

Wheneverythingisasyouwantit,clickOK,andtheextractedimageofthecatnowappearsintheduplicatelayeroftheforegroundimage(Cat2inourexample)oftheLayerspalette.YoucanmodifyitasyounormallywouldusingtoolsintheToolbox.

Adjustingtheforegroundandbackgroundlayers

Page 328: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheCat2layerisnowaregularlayer,soyoucanadjustandworkonit,justasyoucantheTreeslayer.Forexample,ifyouwanttorepositiontheTreelayerrelativetotheCat2layer,youcanfirstselecttheTreelayer,choosetheHandtool fromtheToolbox,clickonthetreeimage,andfinallydragitintoposition.

Asis,thebackgroundtreesareabittoobrightanddetractsomewhatfromthecat.Toadjustthebrightness:

1. Selectthebackgroundlayer(theTreelayerinourexample).

2. ChooseImage Adjustments Brightness/Contrast.

3.

MovetheBrightnessslidertotherighttoavalueofabout+45intheBrightness/Contrastdialogbox,theContrastslidertothelefttoavalueofabout25,andthenclickOK.Thecatnowstaresoutthewindowatamuchmorepleasingbackground,asshowninFigureA.

Note

Ifyourgoalistoremovethingsfromyourimages,seetheProblem:Solution"Removeanobjectfromaphoto,"attheendofthischapter.

Asyoulikeit

ByusingtheExtractcommand,youcaneasilyandquicklycombineaforegroundwithabackgroundandgetaresultjustasyouwantit.So,thenexttimeyouwanttheshotwiththeperfectbackgroundandcan'twaitarounduntilthekidsorthecatcooperate,takeaseparatephotoofeachandputthemtogetherwithPhotoshop.

Page 329: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Enhanceyourimageswithwell-placedlight

Whetheryou'reretouchinganunderexposedimageoryousimplywanttoaddabitoflighttoanimage,Photoshopistheperfecttool.Bymakingbroadlightingadjustmentstoanimage,andthenusingtheHistoryBrushtooltopaintinspecificareasoflight,youcanquicklyalterthewaytheimageappears.Thistechniqueisgreatforcreatingfauxfocalpointsinimages,aswellasfordetailedphotoretouching,asdemonstratedinFigureA.Let'stakeacloserlook.

FigureA1.

Page 330: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureA2.

Preptheimage

1. OpenanRGBimageinPhotoshopthatyouwanttoaddlightto.

2. ChooseImage Duplicatetomakeaduplicatetoworkon.

3. Namethefileintheresultingdialogbox,andthenclickOK.

4. Closetheoriginalimage.

Selectingthedarks

Page 331: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Next,we'llselectthedarkareaswithintheimage.YoucanusetheColorRangecommandtoselectthedarkareasoryoucanselectthemmanuallyusinganyofPhotoshop'sSelectiontools.Howyouchoosetomakeyourselectiondependsontheareasyouwanttolighten.

UsingtheColorRangecommand

Toselectalloftheshadowsordarkareaswithinyourimage:

1. ChooseSelect ColorRange.

2.

ChooseShadowsfromtheSelectdropdownlistintheresultingdialogbox,showninFigureB.

FigureB.

ClickOK.Upondoingso,Photoshopautomaticallyselectstheshadowsinyourimageforyou,asshowninFigureC.

Page 332: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

FigureC.

Manuallymakingtheselection

Now,ifyouwanttoaddastreamoflightorilluminatedesignatedareasofyourimagethatdon'tconsistofshadowareas,youcandosobymakingyourownselection.Aquickandeasywaytodosoistoselecttheentiredocumentandlightenitall.ThisgivesyouthemostflexibilitylaterwhenyoupaintinthelightusingtheHistoryBrushtool.

Addinglight

Onceyoumakeyourselection,it'stimetoaddsomelight.So,withyourselectionactive:

Page 333: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1. ChooseEdit Fill.

2.

Choose50%GrayfromtheUsedropdownlistintheresultingFilldialogbox,showninFigureD.

FigureD.

3. SelectColorDodgefromtheModedropdownlist.

LeavetheOpacitytextboxat100andclickOK.Upondoingso,Photoshoplightensandbrightenstheselectedareasofyourimage,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 334: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Note

Ifyouwanttolightentheselectionevenmore,applyanadditionalfilltoyourselectionusingthesamesettings.Ifyouwanttolessentheeffect,chooseEditFadeFillandthenlowertheOpacityintheresultingFadeFilldialogbox.

WorkingintheHistorypalette

1. Deselectyourimagebypressing[Ctrl]D( DontheMac).

2.

ClicktheCreateNewSnapshotbutton atthebaseoftheHistorypalette.Thistakesaphotoofyourimage,whichPhotoshopthenstoresintheHistorypalette.

SelecttheoriginalimagethumbnailintheHistorypalette,andthensetthe

Page 335: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

sourceoftheHistoryBrushtothenewsnapshotbyclickingontheemptyboxnexttotheSnapshot1thumbnail,asshowninFigureF.Finally,you'rereadytopaintinsomelight.

FigureF.

Paintinginhistory

Toaddlighttoyourimage:

1. SelecttheHistoryBrushtool fromtheToolbox.

2.ChooseasoftroundbrushtopaintwithfromtheBrushpop-upwindowonthetooloptionsbar.

3. SettheOpacityofthebrushto45%.

UsetheHistoryBrushtooltopaintovertheareasinyourimagethatyouwanttolighten,asshowninFigureG.

FigureG.

Page 336: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Comingupwithbrightideas

UsingtheHistoryBrushtool,youcanaddlighttoyourimageswithoutworryingaboutwashingoutalready-litareas.Youcanalsocreatesomeamazingdramaticsceneswithsurreallightingeffects.Havefunandexperimenttoseehowyoucanshedsomelightonyourimages.

Page 337: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRemoveacompleximagefromitsbackground

Problem:Difficultyremovingahighlydetailedobjectfromanimage.

Solution:Paintinthedetails.

Page 338: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Whenremovingapersonfromtheoriginalbackground,hairusuallyposesthebiggestproblem.Thisissimplybecausehairisveryfineandflowsinalldirections.Iftheimagehasarelativelyneutralbackgroundtheprocessofremovalcanbesimplifiedgreatly,butifthebackgroundvaluesmatchthoseofthehair,you'reinforawildride.

Take,forexample,theimageshowninourProblemimage.Thewoman'shairgetslostinthebackground.It'sbasicallyimpossibletoextractthisimagewithoutlosingsomeoftheouterfringe,butyoucanremovethelarger,morepronouncedsectionsofhairandstillgetgreat-lookingresults.

Makingacustommask

Toremoveourpersonfromtheoriginalimage,we'llcreateacustommask.Tofollowalong,openanimageinPhotoshopthatyouwanttoworkwith.IftheoriginalimageisontheBackgroundlayerintheLayerspalette,double-clickonittomakeitaregularlayerandclickOKintheresultingNewLayerdialogbox.Nowyou'rereadytostarttheextractionprocess.

Usingcontrast

Todistinguishtheedgesofyourimagefromthebackground,selectthemainbackgroundcolorinyouroriginalimageandthennegateit.

1.SelecttheEyedroppertool fromtheToolboxandsampleanareaofyourbackground.Wesampledthebeigeareatotheleftofthewoman.

2.CreateanewlayerbyclickingtheCreateANewLayerbutton intheLayerspalette.

3. NamethelayerColorFill,andthenfilltheentirelayerwithyourcolor.

4.Changethelayer'sblendingmodefromNormaltoDifferenceintheLayerspalette.

Now,we'llboostthecontrastevenmoreusingaLevelsAdjustmentlayer.

1.

ClicktheCreateNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbutton intheLayerspaletteandchooseLevelsfromitspop-upmenu.

Page 339: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

DragtherighttriangletowardtheleftintheresultingLevelsdialogboxuntilyoucaneasilydistinguishthehairinyourimagefromthebackground.Then,clickOK.

Paintingwithapurpose

1. MakeanewlayerintheLayerspaletteasyoudidpreviously.

2. NamethelayerOutline.

3.ChangetheSetForegroundColorswatchtowhiteintheToolbox,andselecttheBrushtool .

4.Useamediumbrushtopaintawaythecenterofyoursubject,gettingasclosetotheedgesofthehairaspossible.

5.Selectasmall,featheredbrushtouseforpaintingoverthehairstrandsyouwanttopreserve.3pixelsisusuallyagoodstartingpoint.

6.Startpainting.Keepinmindthatthemoredetailedworkyoudo,thebetterthefinalimagewilllook.

Maskingitout

1. SelectthewhiteimagewiththeMagicWandtool .

2.FeathertheselectionbychoosingSelect Featherandentering3intheFeatherRadiustextboxintheresultingdialogbox.

3. ChooseSelect Inverseandfillthenewselectionwithblack.

4. Deselecttheimage.

5. Press[Ctrl][Alt][~]( [option][~]ontheMac)toselecttheluminositymask.

SelectthelayercontainingyouroriginalimageintheLayerspalette.

Page 340: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

6.

7. ClicktheAddLayerMaskbutton atthebaseofthepalette.

8.HideallofthelayersintheLayerspalettethatareaboveyouroriginallayer.Yourimageappearsonatransparentbackground.

9.

Placeyourimageonitsnewbackgroundbydraggingitanddroppingitontoanewdocument.Youmayfindthatyoustillhavetocleanupafewareasofthemask,butoverallitshouldbefine.OurfinalimageisshownintheSolutionimage.

Page 341: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRemoveanobjectfromaphoto

Problem:Unwantedobjectinanimage.

Solution:UsetheErase,Copy,andPastecommands.

Page 342: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Youneedaphotoofafrontporchforabrochureandyoufoundagreatone,exceptforoneproblem:Man'sbestfrienddecidedtoposeforthepictureaswell.Youcancry"Here,boy!"allyouwant,butthat'snotgoingtosolvethedilemma.Thephotowastakenlastsummerandcan'tbereshot.Whattodo?It'serase,copy,paste,andtonetotherescue.

Removinganobject

Beforewebeginremovinganything,weshouldcreateaduplicatelayertoworkonandzoominontheobjectwewishtoremove.Let'salsodisablethevisibilityoftheBackgroundlayerbyclickingontheIndicatesLayerVisibilityicon intheLayerspalettesowecanseewhatwe'veerasedintheBackgroundCopylayeraswego.Nowyou'rereadytostarterasing.

1.ChoosetheErasertool fromtheToolboxandsetyouroptionsonthetooloptionsbar.

2.ChooseSoftRound17PixelsfromtheBrushPresetPicker.SelectBrushfromtheModedropdownlisttogiveasofterasingedge.

3.

KeeptheOpacitysetat100%,andleavetheEraseToHistorybuttondeselectedbecausewearen'terasingtoasavedstateorsnapshotoftheimage.

4.

Movethemousepointertothecenteroftheobjectthatyouwishtoerase,andwhileholdingdownthemousebutton,begintoerase.It'sbesttostartinthecenteroftheobjectandmoveoutclosetotheedges.Zoominforanevencloserviewwhenyou'refinished.

5.ChooseSoftRound5PixelsfromtheBrushPresetPickersoyoucanerasethefinedetailsalongtheedgesoftheobject.

FillinginemptyimageareasusingCopyandPaste

First,let'sstudywhat'smissinganddecidehowwe'regoingtoreplaceit.Inourexample,imageareastotheleftandrightofthedoorlookcompatibleincolorandtextureaswellasareastotheleftandrightofthekickboard,thefiberdoormat,andtheslatetiles.

Page 343: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Selectingimageareastocopy

1.

Dragoutafewguidestohelpselectanareatocopyfromandpastetobymovingyourmousepointertofirstaverticalandthenahorizontalruler,clickingonit,andwhileholdingdownyourmousebutton,dragginghorizontalandverticalguidesintoposition.

2. ChooseView Snap.

3.

ChoosetheRectangularMarqueetool fromtheToolbox,positionyourmousepointerontheupper-leftcorneroftherectangle,dragitacrossanddowntothelower-rightcorner,andreleaseyourmousebutton.WiththeRectangularMarqueetoolstillselected,moveyourmousepointertothecenteroftherectangularselectionborder,clickontheborder,andwhileholdingdownyourmousebutton,dragthebordertotheleftoftheleftverticalguide.

Copyingandpastingimageareas

1.Press[Ctrl]C( ContheMac)tocopyandthen[Ctrl]V( VontheMac)topasteit.

2. NamethenewpastedlayerbyselectingLayer1intheLayerspalette.

3.

ChoosetheMovetool fromToolboxandmoveyourmousepointertothecenterofthepastedimage.Clickonitandwhileholdingdownyourmousebutton,dragtheimagetoinsidetheguides.

Adjustingthepastedimagetoitssurroundings

Tohelpevaluateandadjustthepastedimage,orpatch,asit'ssometimesknown(andcertainlyeasiertosay),let'smoveitdownalayersoit'sfillingtheerasedarearatherthancoveringit.

1.

SelectthepastedimagelayerintheLayerspalette,andwhileholdingdownthemousebutton,movethelayerdownonepositionbelowtheBackgroundCopylayer,thenrelease.

Page 344: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Erasealittlemoreoftheedge,usingtheErasertool,intheBackgroundCopylayertosoftenthetransitionbetweenthedoorandthepatch,usingtheSoftRound21Pixelsbrush.

3.

Darkenthepatch,ifneeded,bychoosingImage AdjustmentsBrightness/Contrast.TheBrightness/Contrastdialogboxappears.MovetheBrightnessslidertotheleftuntilthepatchdisappearsintoitssurroundings.

4.

Selectivelydarkenanyareasasneeded,byusingtheBurntool.Todoso,choosetheBurntool fromtheToolbox,andonthetooloptionsbar,selecttheSoftRound45Pixelsbrush,settheRangeforHighlights,andanExposureof1%.Moveyourmousepointertotheareayouwishtoadjustandbeginburninggradually.Ifanareaisalittledark,graduallylightenitwiththeDodgetool.

Page 345: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 346: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter7.Filters

Page 347: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UsingtheFilterGallery

WhenworkinginPhotoshop,youcaneasilyspendhoursexperimentingwiththenumerousfilterslistedundertheFiltermenu.However,attimesthesefilterscanprovetobeabitfrustrating,especiallywhenyouwanttoapplymorethanonefiltertoanimageorwhenyouwanttopreviewtheresults.That'swheretheFilterGallerycomesinhandy.Usingthisfeature,youcanpreviewallofyourfilteringworkandapplymorethanonefiltertoanimageatatime.Itdoesn'tgetanybetterthanthis!

ExposingtheFilterGallery

YoucanaccesstheFilterGallery,showninFigureA,inoneoftwoways.EitherchooseFilter FilterGallery,orchooseFilterandselectanyofthe47galleryeffectslistedinthemenu.OncetheFilterGallerydisplays,you'representedwithalargepreviewarea,alistofthefilterstochoosefrom,andtherespectivefilters'options.TheFilterGalleryalwaysshowsthefilterselectedatthetopofthedialogbox.Evenso,you'reworkingwithinthegallery.

FigureA.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 348: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Previewingwithstyle

Ontheleftsideofthedialogbox,you'llseeanoversizedpreviewwindow.Youcanadjustthesizeofthepreviewimagebyclickingthe+andbuttonslocatedinthebottom-leftcornerofthedialogbox.Youcanalsoclickonthenumericpercentageofthepreviewandchoosefromanyofthesizeslistedintheresultingpop-upmenu,showninFigureB.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

Page 349: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Filtersurfing

Thecenterpanelinthedialogboxallowsyoutoselectanyofthe47galleryeffectsPhotoshophastooffer.Thefiltersarebrokendownintosixdifferentgroupswithinsixfolders.Theyareasfollows:Artistic,BrushStrokes,Distort,Sketch,Stylize,andTexture.Uponopeningafolder,you'llseethateacheffecthasanaccompanyingthumbnailimagenexttothename,asshowninFigureC.Thisissoyoucanseewhattheeffectisbeforeyouapplyit.

FigureC.

Ifyouwanttohidethelistoffilters,youcandosobyclickingtheupwardpointingarrowiconlocatedtotheleftoftheOKbutton.Thismakesyourpreviewareatwiceitscurrentsize.Then,todisplaythefiltersagain,clickonthedownwardpointingarrow.

Page 350: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Optionsetting

Therightsideofthedialogboxshouldlookprettysimilartowhatyou'reusedtowhenopeningafilterdialogboxinpreviousversions.Here,youcanadjustthesettingsoftheselectedfilter.It'sthesectionbelowthefilteroptionsthatmakesthisnewfeaturetrulynoteworthy.Let'stakeacloserlook.

Stackingfilters

WithintheFilterGallerydialogbox,younowhavetheoptionofapplyingmultiplefilterstoyourimage.Toseehowitworks:

1. OpenanyimageinPhotoshop.

2.ChooseImage Mode RGBColortomakesureit'ssettoRGBmodeasfiltersonlyworkonRGBimages.

3. ChooseFilter FilterGallery.

4. Setyourpreviewtothesizeyoudesire.

5.ClickonthearrowiconnexttotheArtisticfoldertodisplayalloftheArtisticgalleryeffects.

6. SelectthePaintDaubsfilter.Upondoingso,aneffectlayeriscreated.

7.

ClicktheNewEffectLayerbutton locatedonthebottom-rightoftheFilterGallerydialogboxtoaddanadditionaleffectlayerusingthesamegalleryeffect,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 351: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

8.

Makeanyadjustmentstothefiltersettingsthatyouwant.Photo-shopautomaticallyappliestheadditionalfiltereffecttoyourimage.Ifyouwanttohideanyoftheeffectlayers,justclickontheEyeicon nexttothatlayer.Then,tomakethelayervisibleagain,clickontheEyeicon'spreviouslocation.

Inadditiontoapplyingthesamefiltertoanimagenumeroustimes,youcanalsoapplydifferentfilterstoanimage.Todoso:

1. ClicktheNewEffectLayerbuttonagain.

2. Chooseadifferentfilterfromtheeffectsgallery.

3.

Repeatthisprocessasmanytimesasyouwant.Youcanevenclickanddragthefilterlayersaround,toseehowtheylookwhenstackedinadifferentorder.

4. ClickOKwhenyou'rehappywiththeresultstoapplythemtoyourimage.

Ifyouwanttoeditanyoftheappliedfilterslater:

1. ChooseFilter FilterGallery.

2. Gototheeffectlayersandmakeanynecessaryadjustments.

3.ClickOKtoexitthedialogboxagain.Youreffectlayerswillremaineditableuntilyouflattentheimage.

Afilteringfrenzy

Page 352: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Photoshop'sFilterGalleryisreallyalotoffuntouse.Takesometimeandexperimentwithallofthedifferentfiltersandtheircombinations.Also,takeadvantageofthatamazinglylargepreviewwindowtoexperimentwithdifferentfiltersandfiltercombinations.

Page 353: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Combiningfilterlayers

Youaren'taloneifyou'vetriedanartisticeffectsuchaswatercoloronlytogiveupbecauseitjustdidn'tproduceconvincingresults.Wehappentoknowfromexperiencethatasinglefiltereffectcanfallshortofourexpectations.Andaddingmoreeffectsontopofitjustopensthedoortochaos.Westartthrowingwhateverwecanthinkofatanimagehopingforthebest.It'safree-for-alland,whileexperimentingisgreat,it'salsosmarttoknowhowwegotthere,howtorepeatthecombinedeffect,andhowtochangejustthepartsthatbotherusandaccomplishallofthisinaneasy,organized,andspeedyfashion.

EntertheFilterGallerywitheffectlayers.Ifyouhaven'ttriedthisfeatureyet,you'remissingoutonanelegantworkprocessthatwillopenupnewwaysforyoutocreatecaptivatingillustrations.

Mixandmatchwithfilterlayers

Workingwithfilterlayersisn'tdifficult.Togetstarted:

1. Openthefileyouwishtoworkwith.

2.DuplicatetheBackgroundlayertopreservetheoriginalbydraggingitontotheCreateANewLayerbutton intheLayerspalette.

3. ChooseFilter FilterGallerytoaccesstheFilterGallery.

Note

Somefiltersrequirealotofprocessingpower,soifyoufindthatyou'rewaitingmorethanafewsecondstoseetheresultsofyourfilterinthepreviewpane,here'saworkaroundthatwillsavetimeandaggravation.MakeasmallselectiononarepresentativeportionoftheimagebeforeyouaccesstheFilterGallery.Now,asyouviewthefilterresults,Photoshopmodifiesasmallersectionand,consequently,doesitmorequickly.TakenoteofyoursettingsandthenclickCancel.Now,removetheselectionmarqueeandre-createyourfiltersandsettingstoapplytheeffecttotheentireimage.

Page 354: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

MakeaCutoutfilterandapplyitonce

1. SelectCutoutintheArtisticfolderinthecenterlistoffilters.

2.SettheNumberOfLevelssliderto5,theEdgeSimplicitysliderto5,andtheEdgeFidelitysliderto3.

3.

MakesurethattheCutoutfilterislistedinthelayerssectionanditsEyeiconisturnedon.Thesevaluesgivetheappearanceofindividualpiecesofpaperpastedintoamontage.

4.

ClicktheNewEffectLayerbuttonatthebottomofthepalettetokeepthischoice.Photoshopcopiesthiseffectinthefilterlayerslist,makingitvisible,butkeepsthefirstlayerentrywhichisstillCutouthighlightedandvisible.So,untilyouturnofftheEyeicon,you'relookingatthefilterappliedtwice.

5.

ClickontheEyeicon(turningitoff)inthetopfilterentrytopreviewtheeffectofoneapplicationoftheCutoutfilter,asshowninFigureA.

FigureA.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

AddaTexturizerfilterontopofCutout

Page 355: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Atexturewouldworknicelyinourexampleimage.Toaddone:

1. ChoosetheTexturizerfilter(intheTexturefolder).

2.SelectatexturefromthefirstdropdownlistintheTexturepanelontherightside.WechosetheSandstonetexture.

3.SettheScalingsliderto110andtheReliefsliderto5.Thisisagoodplacetostart,butyourimagemayrequirecustomsettingstooptimizetheeffect.

4.

Clickonceonthearrowbuttonnexttothepanelthatdisplaysthethumbnailfiltersamplesifyou'rerunningoutofroomonyourmonitor,orifyousimplywanttopreviewalargerportionoftheimagethat'sbeingfiltered.Althoughthesamplesdisappear,youcanstillaccessthefiltersinthedropdownlistintherightpanel,asshowninFigureB.NoticetheTexturizereffectabovetheCutouteffect.

FigureB.

[Viewfullsizeimage]

5. ClicktheNewEffectLayerbuttononcetoaddthisfiltertothegroup.

6. ClickontheEyeiconinthetopentryofthelayerlisttohideit.

Page 356: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CreateaDiffuseGlowfilterforvariety

Let'sexperimentwithonemorefilter.Thistime,dothis:

1. SelectDiffuseGlowfromtheDistortfolder.

2.SettheGraininesssliderto3,theGlowAmountsliderto6,andtheClearAmountsliderto16.

3.

ClickontheEyeicontomakeitvisible.TheresultsforourexampleareshowninFigureC1.

FigureC1.

Note

ThebackgroundcolorintheToolboxaffectsthecoloroftheDiffuseGlowfilter.ChecktobesurethatthecolorswatchesintheToolboxaresettotheirdefaults:blackastheforegroundcolorandwhiteasthebackgroundcolor,unlessyouwantthediffuseglowtotakeonaparticularcolorcast,asshowninFigureC2.

FigureC2.

Page 357: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Trybeforeyoucommit

Let'sassumethatthethreefilterstogetheraremorethanthisimageneeds.

1.

TurnofftheEyeiconnexttoCutoutinthelayerslisttoseetheeffectofjusttwofilters:DiffuseGlowandTexturizer.You'llseeasubtletextureeffectthroughthetopmostDiffuseGlowfilter.However,inourexampleimage,italmostdisappearswheretheglowisstrongest,namelyinthecenterportionsofthesnowclumps.

2.DragtheTexturizerlayeraboveDiffuseGlowandnoticethatthetexturebecomesmorepronouncedandmoreevenlydistributed.

Thisistheadvantageoffilterlayers.Beforeyoucommit,youcandothefollowing:

Seetheeffectofmorethanonefilteratonetime.

Experimentwithboththestackingorderandthecombinationoffilters.

Eliminatefiltersthatdon'twork.

Fine-tuneeachindividualfilteruntilitsuitsyourneeds.

Page 358: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Inourexample,wethinkDiffuseGlowaboveTexturizermakesacharmingphotoillustrationfornotecards.AndTexturizeraboveCutoutmakesanequallyinterestingrenditionofthiswintryscene,againfornotecardsorforthetitleimageforapresentationofphotographs,orevenaframedprintfromavacationvisittotheRockyMountainfoothills.

SaveyourFilterGallerysettings

CanyousaveFilterGallerysettings?Yesandno.Photoshopsavesyourlastcombinationoffilterswiththevaluesandstackingorderinplace.So,whenyouopenFilterGalleryinanothersession,yourprevioussettingsaretherewaitingforyou.Whichbringsupanimportantsuggestion:If,inyourexplorationoffiltercombinations,youfindaroutinethatyou'dliketokeepforfutureuse,youshouldmakeanactionofthefiltersandsettingsandsaveit.(Ofcourse,youcanalsotakenotesonthefiltersequenceandvaluesandrepeattheprocessmanually,ifyouprefer.)

FilterGalleryremembersthelastsettings

Asyou'reworkingwithfiltersintheFilterGallery,youcaneitherchoosetokeepallofthefiltersyou'veaddedtothelayerlist,trashtheonesyoudon'twant,orpressthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac),whichcausestheCancelbuttontochangetoReset.ClickResetandthelayerlistrevertstothestateitwasinwhenyoulaunchedPhotoshop.

InWindows,pressingthe[Ctrl]keychangestheCancelbuttontoDefault,which,whenyouclickit,returnsthelayerlisttoitsdefaultconditionwherenofilterfoldersarelistedinthelayerslist.OntheMac,Photoshopapparentlyalwaysretainsonefilterfolderinitslayerlist,whichyoucan'tdiscard.Todeactivateit,simplyclickonitsEyeicontoturnitoff.

Note

Youcanadjustyourfilteringwithanadditionalfunction:theFadeFilterundertheEditmenu.Assoonasyoucommittoafiltereffector,inourexample,acombinationofeffectsfromtheFilterGallery,youcanmodifythedegreeofeffectand/orapplyanyoneof23blendingmodesbychoosingEdit FadeFilterGallery.

Page 359: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Filterlayersplusone

Beforewefinishup,let'stryonemoremodificationroutinewithwhichyoucanexperimenttoyourheart'scontent.We'llusetheFilterGallerylayersplusanextralayerthatwecan'taccessintheFilterGallerydialogbox.

1.

Openthefileyouwishtoworkwith.WechosetheimageshowninFigureD1forourexample.

FigureD1.

2.PreserveyouroriginalbycopyingtheBackgroundimage.DragtheBackgroundlayerontotheCreateANewLayerbuttonatthebottomoftheLayerspalette.

3.OpentheFilterGallerywiththeBackgroundCopylayeractive,andchoosetheWatercolorfilterfromtheArtisticfolder.

4.SettheBrushDetailsliderto3,theShadowIntensitysliderto0,andtheTexturesliderto1.Thisgivesyourimageapainterlylook.

5. ClicktheNewEffectLayerbuttonatthebottomofthepalettetosetthatfilter.

Next,we'lladdacanvastexturetosimulatethestretchedcloththatpaintersoftenusefortheirwork.

1.

ChooseTexturizerfromthedropdownlistoffiltersatthetopoftherightpanel.

Page 360: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.SettheTexturedropdownlisttoCanvas,theScalingsliderto143,andtheReliefsliderto12.

3.

Observetheresults,asshowninFigureD2.IfyoufliptheorderofthefiltersbyplacingTexturizerbelowWatercolor,theTexturizerfiltertakesovertheimage,sowe'llkeepTexturizeraboveWatercolor.

FigureD2.

4. ClicktheNewEffectLayerbuttontosettheTexturizereffect.

5.

ClickofftheEyeiconofoneoftheTexturizerentriesordeleteitbydraggingoneTexturizerlayertotheDeleteEffectLayerbutton atthebottomofthepalette.

6. ClickOKintheFilterGallerydialogbox.

Adjustlevelstocompensateforfiltereffects

Usingthefilters,particularlyTexturizer,hasdarkenedourimage,sowe'llcompensatebyadjustingtheLevels.

1.

ChooseImage Adjustments Levels,andmovethemidtoneandhighlightsliderssotheirvaluesare215and0.90,respectively.Theblackpointshouldremainat0.

Page 361: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2. ClickOK.

Finally,wecanenhancethepainterlyqualityofthisimagebysuggestingpaintthickness:aqualityofoilpaintingwherethethicknessofthepaintstrokescreateshighlightsandshadowsonthecanvassurface.Sincewecan'teasilyaccomplishthisintheFilterGallery,we'llmakeaseparatelayerintheLayerspalette.

Addaseparatelayerformorerealism

1.DragtheBackgroundlayerintheLayerspaletteontotheCreateANewLayerbutton.

2.Press[Ctrl][RightBracket] [rightbracket]ontheMac)withthatlayeractivetomovethenewlayertothetopofthelayerstack.

3.

Press[Ctrl][Shift]U [shift]UontheMac)toremoveallcolorfromthislayer.Alternatively,youcanchooseImage Adjustments Desaturate.ChooseFilterStylize Emboss.

4.SettheAngletextboxto135,theHeighttextboxto5,andtheAmounttextboxto500.

5. ClickOK.

6.

ChangetheblendingmodeforthislayertoOverlayandtheFillvalueto65%intheLayerspalette.Thisfinalfiltergivestheillusionofbrushstrokesinadditiontothetextureofthecanvasandthesimplifiedrenderingofthefeathersandbeak,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 362: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Usefilterlayersforcreativefreedom

Photoshop'sFilterGalleryfeatureoffersamethodofcontrolthatmeanseasierexperimentationandfasterresults.PriortoPhotoshopCS,youwereforcedtouselabor-intensiveandtime-consumingmethodsofcombiningfiltereffects.But,asyoucanseefromoursimpleexamples,bothtrialsandresultscomemuchmoreeasilyandinafractionofthetime.Thenexttimeyou'relookingforthatone-of-a-kindartistictreatmentforyourimage,rememberhowthelayersfeatureintheFilterGallerycangiveyouthecreativeadvantageyouwant.

Page 363: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Filteryourportraits

It'ssotemptingtousefiltereffectsinPhotoshoptoachieveunusual,eyecatchingtreatments.Afterall,Photoshopofferssomanypowerfulandsophisticatedspecialeffects,it'shardnottoresorttotheeaseofsimplyapplyingafilter.However,inportraiture,genericallyapplyingfilterscanoftenruinourbestintentions.It'smoresuitabletoapplysubtleandmoderateenhancementstoanimageofaperson,asshowninFigureA.We'llshowyouhowtomakethesedelicatechanges.

FigureA1.

FigureA2.

Page 364: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 365: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Adjusttheimagefortonalquality

1. OpenthefileyouwishtoworkwithinPhotoshop.

2.DuplicatetheBackgroundlayerbydraggingitontotheCreateANewLayerbutton intheLayerspalette.

3.ClickontheEyeicon tomaketheBackgroundlayerinvisible(sincewewon'tbeusingit).

4. SelectImage Adjustments LevelswiththeBackgroundCopylayeractive.

5.Movethewhitepointsliderto235.Asyoumakethisadjustment,noticethatthegraypointslideralsomovestoopenthemidtonesoftheimage.

6. ClickOK.

7.

ChangethenameofthislayertoOptimizedbydouble-clickingonthenameintheLayerspaletteandtypingthenewname.Thisoptimizedversionoftheportraitistheonewe'llduplicateforthetwofilterlayers:SoftenandSharpen.

Sharpenareasthataretoosoft

1.ClickontheOptimizedlayerintheLayerspaletteanddragitontotheCreateANewLayerbuttontoduplicateit.Dothisonemoretime.

2. NamethetwonewlayersSoftenandSharpen.

3.ArrangethelayersintheLayerspalettesoSoftenisatthetop,followedbySharpen,andthenOptimized.

We'reduplicatinglayersandmodifyingthemratherthanusingmasks,neutralfilllayers,oreventheFadefilterfortworeasons.First,wewantyoutoseewhichpartsoftheimage,andtowhatdegree,we'lleliminatewiththeErasertool,andthat'smosteasilyseenontheimageitself.Second,it'salittleeasierforustobothcontrolandvisualizetheeffectofourtechniquebywatchingtheactualimage.

Page 366: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1. MaketheSoftenlayerinvisiblebyclickingonitsEyeicon.

2.ClickontheSharpenlayertomakeitactiveandselectFilter SharpenUnsharpMask.

3.

SetthevaluesintheresultingUnsharpMaskdialogboxtothefollowing:Amount=85,Radius=5,andThreshold=0.

Note

TheUnsharpMaskfilter'sAmountvaluerelatestothecontrastofpixels;85%isrelativelyconservativebutnoticeable.TheRadiuscontrolmeasuresthepixelsaroundtheedgepixelsandcontrolstheappearanceofsharpeningaccordingly.Avalueof5sharpensawiderbandofpixels,butislessnoticeableinahigh-resolutionprint.AlowervaluefortheThresholdslidersharpensallpixels,whileahighervaluedecreasestheappearanceofsharpening.Wechoseavalueof0tosharpeneverythingbecausewe'llbeselectivelaterinourremovalofcertainpartsoftheimage.

4.

TogglethePreviewcheckboxonandofftoseethesharpeningeffect.Wewanttoenhancethesharpnessofourmodel'seyesandeyelashes,thehighlightedsectionsofherhair,especiallyattheforeheadandbothsidesofherface,aswellasthehighlightonherlowerlip.ClickOKtoclosetheUnsharpMaskdialogbox.

5.SelecttheErasmtheToolbox. ChooseBrushfromtheModedropdownlistonthetooloptionsbar,andsettheOpacityto85%.

6.SettheMasterDiametersliderto77pxandtheHardnesssliderto0%intheBrushdropdownlist.

7.UsethebrushontheSharpenlayertoeliminateeverythingexceptthefeaturesyouwishtoenhance.

ClickontheEyeiconoftheOptimizedlayertoseewhichpartoftheSharpenlayerremains.OurexampleimageisshownatthisstageinFigureB.

FigureB.

Page 367: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

8.

9.

ClickontheEyeiconoftheOptimizedlayeragainsoit'svisible,andclickontheEyeiconoftheSharpenlayertotoggletheeffectonandoff.Ifitstilllooksnatural,it'ssubtleandcorrect.Ifit'stoomuch,itappearsunnatural.UsetheOpacitysliderintheLayerspaletteontheSharpenlayertominimizetheeffect.

Softenareasthatshowtoomuchdetail

Thesecondstepinthisportraitenhancementinvolvessoftening.Theonlyareasthatwillbenefitfromsofteningarethemodel'sfacialtextureandneck.Forthisadjustment:

1. MaketheSharpenlayerinvisibleandtheSoftenandOptimizedlayersvisible.

2.ClickontheSoftenlayertomakeitactiveandchooseFilter Blur GaussianBlur.

3. SettheRadiusto2pixelsandclickOK.

Theobjectivenow,ofcourse,istoremoveeverythingwedon'twantblurred;inourexample,thisincludeseverythingexceptthemodel'sfacefromhereyesdowntoherneck.

SettheErasertoolsoyoucanquicklyremovetheportionsofthislayeryoudon'twant.TheresultshouldlooksomethinglikethatshowninFigureC.Again,youcanmaketheOptimizedlayervisibleandhideandshowtheSoftenlayertoseetheeffectoftheBlurfilter.Withtheblurlayeron,thetextureandblemishesonthefacearesoftenedandlessvisible.

Page 368: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

FigureC.

2.

MakeallthreelayersvisibleandexaminetheeffectbyclickinganddraggingthemousepointerovertheEyeiconsintheLayerspalettetoseetheportraitwithandwithoutthefiltereffects.

Note

Formoreonworkingwithportraits,seetheProblem:Solution"Modifyfacialfeatures"attheendofthischapter.

Improveaportraitwithsubtleenhancements

Filteringinmoderateamountsaddsvisualappealtoaportraitineffective,yetunderstated,ways.Particularlywhenaprintsuchasourexampleishighresolutionatasizeof8by10inchesormore,thefinalresultiswellworththecarefulandthoughtfulapplicationofPhotoshopfilters.

Page 369: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Addtexturewithsimulatedfilmgrain

It'sironichowthemomentdigitalcameratechnologyovercomesaphotographicproblem,photographersstarttryingtofindawaytore-createtheeffectusingimage-editingsoftware.Oneofthebenefitsofusinganimagesensorinsteadoffilmisthattheimageismadeupofpixels,nottinygrainsofsilverhalideinthephotographicemulsion,sotheresultingimagesaresmoothandfreeofgraininess.Butthegrainyeffectisatreasuredelementofphotography,asprovenbycountlessgrittyblackandwhitephotoscharacterizedbyarawandhonestpointofview.So,eventhoughyourdigitalimagesmaybesilkysmooth,wecanshowyouhowtoapplythiscreativeeffectandaddtotheatmosphereanddepthofyourphotography,aswedidinFigureA.

FigureA1.

FigureA2.

Page 370: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Thephotographicnatureofgrain

Whenaphotographershootingwithfilmwantstogeta"grainy"image,sheusesfastISOsettings(ISO800andabove)orupratesherfilmwhenshooting.UpratinginvolvesshootingatahigherISOspeedthanthefilmisdesignedfor,whichinitiallyunderexposesthefilm,andthenpushes(overexposes)thenegativesduringtheprintingprocess.Theeffectisincreasedgrainsizeandcontrast,similartotheeffecthigherISOsettingshaveondigitalcameras.Insteadoffilmgrain,thepixelsbecomemoreevidentintheformofnoise.Justasdigitalnoisedegradesyourimagequality,graincanoverwhelmanimage(ifnotapproachedthoughtfully)whetheryou'readdingitphotographicallyordigitally.

Note

Ofcourse,thereareotherwaystoproducegrainphotographically,whetherthatbethroughenlargementsorbyusingdilutedprintdeveloper,butusingfastISOsandupratingofferthebestparallelstothedigitalimagingprocess.

AddinggrainwithPhotoshop

Page 371: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Wecan'ttellyouwhyPhotoshophasthreedifferentgrainfilters,butwewilltellyouhoweachoneworksandhowyoucancontrolthemtogetthegrainyimagesyouwant.We'vechosentousegrayscaleimagesforourexample,butfilmgrainworksjustaswellwithfullcolorimages.MakesureyourimageisinRGBorGrayscalemode,asthefilterswe'llbeusingdon'tworkinCMYKorLabmode.

TheFilmGrainfilter

It'sfunnythattheonefilterthatshoulddoexactlywhatwewantittoisourleastfavoriteoption.Originallydesignedtohelpalleviatetheeffectsofbandingfromafilmscanner,theFilmGrainfilteraddsanevenamountofnoisetotheshadowsandmidtonesofanimagewhileapplyingamoreobviouspatterntothehighlights.Tousethisfilter:

1. OpentheimageyouwanttomodifyinPhotoshop.

2.

Next,selectFilter Artistic FilmGraintoopentheFilmGraindialogboxshowninFigureB.HereyoucancontrolthesizeofyourGrain,thesensitivityoftheHighlightArea,andtheoverallIntensityoftheeffect.TheGrainsizerangesfrom0to20,butanythingover5tendstolookverypixelated.YoushouldalsokeeptheIntensitysettinglow,buttheHighlightsettingcangoeitherwaydependingonthetonalrangeofyourimage.ToachievethegraineffectshowninthecloseupinFigureConthenextpage,wesettheGrainto3,theHighlightto4,andtheIntensitytoamodestsettingof1.

FigureB.

Page 372: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

FigureC.

3.Saveyourimageasanewfile.Then,youcanreopentheoriginalfileandapplytheotherfiltersusingthesameimageeachtime.

TheFilmGrainfiltercanaddadecentandveryuniformgrainacrossyourimage.However,it'sdifficulttocontrolandthelackofalivepreviewmakesitevenhardertofine-tuneyourgraineffect.Ifyouwereapplyingthisfiltertoagroupofimagesasabatchprocess,wecouldfindsomeuseforit,butoveralltheothertwooptionsgiveyoumorecontrolwithabetterresult.

TheTextureGrainfilter

TheTextureGrainfilterofferslotsofchoicesforaddingdifferentstylesofgraintoyourimage.Toaccessit:

SelectFilter Texture GrainandtheGraindialogboxopens,asshowninFigureD.

FigureD.

Page 373: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

2.

ClickontheGrainTypedropdownmenutoviewyouroptions,whichareRegular,Soft,Sprinkles,Clumped,Contrasty,Enlarged,Stippled,Horizontal,Vertical,andSpeckle.Inouropinion,mostoftheseoptionsfallunderthespecialeffectscategoryratherthanasimplegraineffect,butyoucangetanicegrainpatternusingtheRegularGrainType.

Inthisfilter,theIntensityoptioncontrolsthestrengthoftheeffectandthesizeoftheGrain,solowernumbersproduceamorepleasing,subtleeffect.TheContrastoptionadjuststhetonalrangeofyourimageonascaleof0to100,withlowernumbersdecreasingthecontrastandhighernumberscreatingmorepronouncedeffects.IfyousettheContrastto50,there'snochangeintheimage.TheeffectshowninFigureEwascreated.usingtheRegularFilmTypewithanIntensityvalueof20andaContrastvalueof55

FigureE.

Page 374: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Again,thedialogboxlackedthelivepreviewthatmakesadjustmentssomucheasier,butthewiderangeofoptionsmakestheGrainfilteralotoffuntoplaywith.Ifyou'relookingforagrittylookwithlotsofcontrast,thisfilterisyourbestchoice.

TheAddNoisefilter

Withcameramakersbendingoverbackwardtoremovenoisewhenanimageiscaptured,itmayseemironictousetheAddNoisefiltertosubverttheirefforts.However,theAddNoisefilterisourchoiceforthebestoptionforaddinggraintoanimage.Itincludesalivepreviewnecessaryforcarefuladjustments,precisecontrolsdowntothehundredthofapercent,andtheabilitytosetthedistributionofthenoisepatterns.Whiletheothertwoeffectsaddnoisetoyourimage,theycan'tmimictheindiscriminatenatureofrealfilmgrain.However,theAddNoisefiltercan.

TousetheNoisefilter,selectFilter Noise AddNoiseandtheAddNoisedialogboxopens,asshowninFigureF.TheAmountsliderissimplytheintensityoftheeffect,buttheinterestingchoiceiswhethertoselectUniformorGaussianDistribution.Uniformproducesresultsinacompletelyrandommannerandisbestusedforfullcolorimages.Forgrayscaleimageslikeoursample,Gaussianisamuchbetterchoiceasitusesaspecialcurvetoproduceawiderrangeoflightanddarkpixels.

FigureF.

Page 375: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TheMonochromaticoptiondistributesnoiseevenlyacrossyourchannels,whichcanbeusefulincolorimages,butnotforgrayscale.

ToachievetheeffectshowninFigureG,weselectedanAmountvalueof10.72%withGaussianDistribution.Theresultisanimagethatactuallylookslikeitwasshotwithhigh-speedfilm,notwithadigitalcamera.

FigureG.

Page 376: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Note

Onceyouapplyanyofthegrainfilterswe'vementioned,consideraddingaslightGaussianBlur(Filter Blur GaussianBlur)tosmoothoutanyharshedgesproducedandmaketheeffectseemmorenatural.

Gowiththegrain

Addinggraintoyourdigitalimagesisagreatwaytoaddatmosphereandtexturetoyourphotography.WepreferusingtheAddNoisefilter,butexperimentwithyourownimagesandseewhichoneworksbestforyou.Inanycase,it'snicetohavechoicesandPhotoshopcertainlydelivers.

Page 377: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionCorrectcolorcasts

Problem:Unwantedcolorcastsinanimage.

Solution:UsethePhotoFiltercommand.

Page 378: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 379: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ThephotoFiltercommandisdesignedtocorrectcommoncolorbalanceproblemsyouquicklyaswellashelpyoueasilyaddawarningorcoolingeffecttoyourimages.Onceyoulearnhowtouseit,you'llfindittobeaperfectwaytocontrolcolorcasts,whetheryouwanttoaddthemorgetridofthem.

Asimplifieddialogboxmakesiteasy

1. OpenanRGBorCMYKimage.

2.

CreateaPhotoFilteradjustmentlayerbyclickingtheCreateNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbutton ontheLayerspaletteandselectingPhotoFilterfromthedropdownlist.ThePhotoFilterdialogboxappears.

Addingacolorfilter

1.

SelectapresethueadjustmentfromtheFilterdropdownlistorselecttheColoroptionbuttontoapplyacustomcolorfilter.ClickingonthecolorswatchtotherightoftheColoroptionbuttondisplaysthestandardColorPickerdialogbox,whereyoucanchooseacolorbyclickingonthepickerorenteringthedesiredvaluesforthecolorspaceofyourchoice.Whetheryouchooseapresetordefineyourowncolor,theDensitysliderdeterminestheamountofcoloryouapplytotheimage.

2.MakesurethePreviewcheckboxisselectedasyouexperimentwiththeslidersoyoucanseeyourchangesonthefly.

3.

SelectthePreserveLuminositycheckbox.Luminositymaintainsthetonalbalanceofanimage,whichmeansthehighlights,shadows,andmidtonesmaintaintheirrelativevaluestooneanother.Thealternative(withPreserveLuminositydeselected)istoapplyaflatcoloroveralland,intheprocess,losetherangeoftoneorcontrastthatalreadyexistsintheimage.Unlessyou'repurposelyattemptingaflateffect,it'spreferabletomaintainluminosityinanimage.

Easilyfixthemostcommoncolorproblems

Page 380: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ThePhotoFiltercommandisdesignedtocorrectcommoncolorbalanceproblemsquicklyaswellashelpyoueasilyaddawarmingorcoolingeffecttoyourimages.Onceyoulearnhowtouseit,you'llfindittobeaperfectwaytocontrolcolorcasts,whetheryouwanttoaddthemorgetridofthem.ThefirstfouroptionsintheFilterdropdownlistarethewarmingandcoolingfilters,whicharedesignedtocompensateorre-createcolortintscausedbyambientlightingconditions.Thewarmingfiltersshiftthecolorsofanimagetowardyellowtocompensateforanabundanceofblue,asshowninourProblemimage.Coolingfiltersshifteverycolorinanimagetowardblue.TheWarmingFilter(85)andCoolingFilter(80)seemtoapplytheiradjustmentstothewhitebalance,whileWarmingFilter(81)andCoolingFilter(82)makeminoradjustmentstotheoverallcolorqualityofanimage.Forexample,youmayfindthatusingCoolingFilter(80)doesn'thaveanadequateeffectontheshadowsormidtones.Inthatcase,thecolorqualityfilters(81or82)mightbethebetterchoice.Asalways,experimentwithvariousfilteranddensitycombinationstofindtheidealsettingsforyourimage.

Bettercolorinlesstime

ThePhotoFilterprovidesaneasytoolforworkingwithcolorbalance.Ingeneral,youcanenhancecolorcastsinanimagebychoosingasimilarcolorfilteroryoucanlessenacolorcastbychoosingafilterofacomplementarycolor.Itwon'treplaceyourregularsuiteofcolor-correctiontools,butit'sgreatforquickcolorshiftsandspecialeffects.

Page 381: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionModifyfacialfeatures

Problem:Subject'sfacialfeaturesarelessthanperfect.

Solution:UsetheLiquifyfilter.

Page 382: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Portraitretouchingiswithoutadoubtanartforminitself.Justglancingthroughamagazine,youhavetowonderwhethertherereallyarethatmanyperfectpeoplewhoalwaysphotographwithoutflaws.Theperfectsmile,botheyesequallyopen,smoothskinit'sratherintimidatingtotheaveragepersonwhoonoccasionmightsay,"Nowthat'sagreatpictureofme!"Ofcourse,withthehelpofPhotoshop,youcouldpotentiallymakeeveryportraittakenofyouorthatyou'vetakenofsomeoneelselooklikepagesinamagazine.

UsingtheLiquifyfilter,youcanadjustfacialfeaturesforamazingresults.Youcanadjustthesizeofsomeone'snoseorlips,openorenlargehereyes,thinouthercheeks,orliterallyturnherfrownupsidedown.And,ifyou'refeelingabitpunchy,youcanevenmakesomeonelookabitalien-like.Eitherway,thisfilteroffersalotofrazzle-dazzletoPhotoshopusers,solet'stapintoit.

Partbypart

1. Openaportraittoworkwith.

2. MakeacopyofthefiletoworkonbychoosingImage Duplicate.

3.NamethenewfileandclickOK.Nowwe'rereadytoperformourdigitalface-lift.

Adjustingtheeyes

We'llbeginbymakingadjustmentstoourmodel'srighteye.Asyoucanseeintheoriginalimage,showninourProblemimage,therighteyeisabitsmallerthanthelefteye,whichdetractsfromtheoverallimage.

1. OpentheLiquifydialogboxbychoosingFilter Liquify.

2.SelecttheZoomtool fromthetofilter'sToolboxandzoominonthemodel'seyes.

3. SelecttheBloattool .

4.theBrushSizesettingsoitencompassestheentireeye.Leavetheremainingsettingsattheirdefaults.

Page 383: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.Clickdirectlyontheeye.Continuetoclickuntiltherighteyeisthesamesizeasthelefteye.Don'tdragthepointer;itwillwarptheimagetoomuch.

Reducingthenose

Next,let'sreducethemodel'snoseabitusingthepuckertool .

1.SelectthePuckertoolfromthefilter'sToolboxandsetthebrushsizesoit'sapproximatelythesizeoftheendofthesubject'snose.

2. Clickthepointerondifferentareasofthenosetoreducethesize.

Makingthemouthmoredefined

Atthispoint,let'sadjustthemodel'ssmiletomakeitabitmorepronounced.Todothis,we'llhavetopushsomepixelsaround.

1. SelecttheForwardwarptool .

2.

UsingarelativelysmallbrushwithaBrushPressureof25,graduallypushthepixelsintoplace.Ifyoudon'tliketheresultsastrokecreated,justselecttheReconstructtool andpaintovertheareayouwanttoundo.Then,tryagainwiththeForwardWarptool.

Leavingalastingimpression

OnceyoustartexperimentingwiththeLiquifyfilter,youmayfindthatit'sprettyaddictive.Byreducing,enlarging,andmovingpixelsaround,youcancreateawidevarietyofdifferentfacialexpressions.Ifyourimageisn'tperfect,youcanquicklymakeitasflawlessasamagazinecover.

Page 384: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 385: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Chapter8.Masks

Page 386: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UseQuickMaskmodetomakeaselection

Therearemanyreasonswhyyoumaywanttoselectanareainanimage,andPhotoshopprovidesacoupleofselectiontoolsthatenableyoutodoso.Whichselectiontoolyouusedependsontheimage,itscomplexity,andwhatyouintendtodotoit.Alltheselectiontoolsenableyoutomakefairlyaccurateselections,buttomaketheprocessofselectingaspecificareaeasierandtheactualselectionmorerefined,you'llalsoneedtouseQuickMaskmodetoensurethebestpossibleresults.

Theselectionprocess

ThereareseveralexamplesofwhenQuickMaskmodecanbeuseful,suchaswhenaselectionneedstobeextremelyaccurateandwhenwewanttoapplyafiltertoaspecificareawhilepreservingtherestoftheimage.ExplaininghowQuickMaskmodeworksiseasierdonethansaid,sowe'llskiptheintroductionandgetrighttowork.Inthisarticle,we'lluseQuickMaskmodetomakearefinedselectionaroundthechildreninouroriginalimage,shownontheleftinFigureA,sothatwedon'tgiveeitherchildahaircutwhenweremovethebackgroundaroundthem,asshownintheimageontherightinFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 387: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Step1:Choosinganimage

Weneedtoselectanimageonwhichtoperformourtechnique.Rememberthatthisisjustpractice,sochooseanimagethathassomevaryingshapesandabitofcomplexity(likethecurlsinthegirl'shairinourimage).

Page 388: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Tip

Don'tforgetthatthefirstrealstepinanyprojectistomakeaduplicateoftheimage(Image Duplicate),soyouaren'tworkingontheoriginal.ThankstotheHistorypaletteinPhotoshop,thereisn'tmuchchanceofnotbeingabletoundoamistake,butit'sbettertobesafethansorry.

Step2:Makingyourselection

Weneedtochooseaselectiontoolthatwe'llusetomakeapreliminaryselectionaroundtheareaintheimagewewanttoeitheralterorpreserve.Theselectiontoolyouchoosedependsontheareayouwanttoselectandyourpastexperiencewiththetoolstherearenowrongchoicesifyougetagoodselection.Ifit'salargeareathat'ssimilarlycoloredandgeometricallyshaped,theMarqueetoolsaregood.Iftheareaisanoddshapeandsimilarlycolored,theMagicWandtoolwilldothejobwell.Formoreintricateareasthataredissimilarincolor,theLassotoolwillworkbest.

WeselectedtheLassotool fromtheToolboxanddrewaselectionaroundthetwokidsinourimage.IfyouneedtoliftthemousewhiledrawingyourselectionwiththeLassotool,pressthe[Alt]key([option]keyontheMac)topreventtheselectionfromclosingprematurely.AsyoucanseeinFigureB,theselectiondoesn'tneedtobeperfectatthispoint.

FigureB.

Page 389: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Step3:Hidingbehindamask

AsshowninFigureConthenextpage,theEditInQuickMaskModebuttonresidesatthebottomsectionoftheToolbox.NexttoitsitstheEditInStandardModebutton,whichtakesyououtofQuickMaskmode.

FigureC.

Page 390: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

ClicktheEditInQuickMaskModebutton andyou'llseetheselectionyoumademoreclearly,asshowninFigureD.Bydefault,thesemitransparentredoverlayindicatesthemaskedareatheareaoutsidetheselectionthat'sprotected.Forthisexample,however,wewanttoprotecttheselectedarea.

FigureD.

Page 391: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Double-clickontheEditInQuickMaskModebuttontoopentheQuickMaskOptionsdialogbox,asshowninFigureE.

FigureE.

3.

MakesurethattheSelectedAreasoptionbuttonisselectedsothatthemaskcolorindicatestheselectedarea.You'llfindthatselectingintricatedetails,suchashair,iseasierwhenthemaskisinversedthisway.Inthisdialogbox,youcanalsochangethecolorandopacityoftheoverlaytoofferbettercontrastbetweenitandtheimage.

Page 392: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.ClickontheColorboxtoopentheColorPickerdialogbox;pickacolorandclickOK.YoucanadjusttheopacityoftheoverlaybyenteringavalueintheOpacitytextboxfrom0to100%.

5.

AdjustthesesettingsifyouwishandthenclickOK.Withthecolorindicatingtheselectedareas,thered(orwhatevercoloryoumayhavechangeditto)overlaynowindicatesandprotectstheselectedarea,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

6.Adjustthecolorandopacitydependingonthecomplexityandcolorofyourselection.

Step4:Editingamask

WhileinQuickMaskmode,youcanaddto,removefrom,andrefineamaskusingthevariouspaintingandeditingtools.Aswiththeselectiontools,whichtoolyouusedependsonyourimage,yourexperience,andtheintendedpurposeofyour

Page 393: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

selection.

Torefineyourmask:

1.

ChoosetheBrushtool fromtheToolboxandthenchooseabrushsizefromtheBrushdropdownlistonthetooloptionsbar.Weliketousethistoolforthistechniquebecausewecanchoosealargebrushtopaintwide,openareasandasmallbrushforpaintinginthenooksandcrannies.TheBrushtoolalsoprovidesuswiththeoptionofhard-orsoft-edgebrushes.Wechoseasoft-edgebrushtomakeourselectionlessharsh.Wealsowanttobesurethemaskcompletelyprotectsourselectionfromanythingwemaydotothenon-protectedarea.

2.

CheckthetooloptionsbartomakesureyourbrushisinNormalmodeandtheOpacityvalueissetat100%.Nowwe'rereadytorefineourmaskinQuickMaskmode.Becauseouroverlayisinversed,wewanttosubtractfromthemask,ratherthanaddtoit.

3.

MakesurewhiteistheforemostcolorintheSetForegroundColoriconintheToolbox.(IfblackisintheSetForegroundColoricon,ourtoolwouldaddtothemask.)

4.Paintovertheareasoftheoverlayyouwanttoremovechangingbrushsizesasneededuntilonlythechildrenarecoveredintheredoverlay.

AsshowninFigureG,thecloseryouzoominwiththeZoomtool ,themorepreciseyourmaskwillbe,resultinginamorepreciseselection.Ifyouaccidentallypaintoveranareainyourmask,simplyclickontheSwitchForegroundAndBackgroundColorsiconintheToolboxtomakeblacktheforegroundcolor,paintoverthegoof,andthenswitchbacktowhiteastheforegroundcolor.

FigureG.

Page 394: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Onceyou'vefinishedrefiningyourmask,clicktheEditInStandardModebutton.Themarchingantsindicateourimprovedselection,asshowninFigureH.Iftheselectionisn'tquiterightyet,youcanreturntoQuickMaskmode,refineitsomemore,andthenreturntoStandardmode.It'sthateasy;flipbackandforthbetweenmodesasmuchasyouneedto.

FigureH.

Page 395: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Tip

TotoggleinandoutofQuickMaskmode,pressQonthekeyboard.TotogglebetweentheMaskedAreasandSelectedAreasoptionsforquickmasks,[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac)ontheEditInQuickMaskModebutton.

Step5:Makinguseofthemask

Withtheselectioncomplete,nowwecandowithitwhatweoriginallyintendedremovethebackgroundaroundthechildren.Currently,though,thechildrenareselectedandanythingwedototheimagewillonlyapplytotheselectedarea.Tomakeanychangestothebackground,weneedtoinversetheselectionagain.Todothis:

Page 396: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

ChooseSelect Inverse.Althoughitlookslikenothinghappened,thebackgroundisnowselectedandanythingwedototheimagewillonlyapplytothebackground.Thefinalstepistoremovethebackground,asshowninFigureA.

2. Pressthe[Delete]key.Voilà!Nomorebackground.

Tip

Thistechniqueremovesthebackgroundcolor,butnottheactualbackground.Ifyouplacedtheimageinapagelayoutapplication,awhitebackgroundwouldremain.Torenderthebackgroundtransparent,you'dneedtoinversetheselectionagainandthencreateaclippingpatharoundthechildren.

Step6:Savingyourwork

Aftercompletingtheselectionprocessbutbeforeyouclosethefile,youhavetheoptiontosavetheselectionifyouthinkyou'lleverneeditagain.Tosaveyourselection,though,youfirstneedtorestoretheoriginalselectionrememberthatyouinversedtheselectioninthepreviousstepsoyoucoulddeletethebackground.

Tosaveyourselection:

1. ChooseSelect Inversetorestoretheselectionaroundthechildren.

2. ChooseSelect SaveSelection.

NametheselectionintheSaveSelectiondialogbox,andthenclickOKtosaveitintheChannelspalette,asshowninFigureI.Ifyouchoosenottosaveyourselection,Photoshopconsidersitatemporarymask,meaningitwilldeleteitfromtheChannelspaletteafteryouclosethefile.

FigureI.

Page 397: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

Last,butcertainlynotleast,youneedtosaveyourfinishedimagefile.Tosodo:

1. SelectFile Saveandthenenterafilenameandchoosealocationtosaveit.

2. ClickSave.Yourduplicateimageisnowsavedandtheoriginalremainsintact.

Note

Formoreonusingmaskstoperformtrickedits,checkout"Fixaccidentalsilhouettes"and"Restorelosthighlightdetail"attheendofthischapter.

Unmasktheopportunities

Whenyoucreateaselection,theoptimumresultshouldbeasmoothoutlineofthepixelsyouwantwithoutanysurroundingedgepixels.TheselectiontoolsinPhotoshopdoaprettygoodjobofthisbut,oftentimes,needsomeassistance.QuickMaskmodeprovidestheenvironmentnecessarytoachievetheperfectselection!

Page 398: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Createvignetteswithlayermasks

Whenyouneedtocreateadesignwithmultipleimages,thereareanumberofwaysyoucanintegratethemintoonepiece.Inthisarticle,we'llshowyouhowtofadeoneimageintoanother,aswedidinFigureA.AswithmanyPhotoshoptechniques,thereareseveralwaystodothis,butourmethodgivesyouthemostflexibilityformakingchangesasyourdesignprogresses.

FigureA.

Selectingsuitableimages

Tosuccessfullyfadeimagesintooneanother,it'shelpfuliftheimageshavecommoncolorschemesoracommontheme.InFigureA,you'llnoticethatmostofourimageshavequitealotofgreenery,whichhelpswithblendingthedifferentimagestogether.Ifyoucan,trytoselectimagesthathaveacommoncolortheme.Wedidn'ttrytofadeadenselytreedimageintoanimagewithalotofblueskybecausethosetypesoffadesaren'tusuallyassuccessfulaesthetically.

Page 399: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Settinguptheimages

Beforeyoujumpintocreatingyourdesign,youneedtoprepareyourimagefile.Todoso:

1.CreateanewdocumentinPhotoshopofthesizeandresolutionyouwantyourmontagetobe.

2. Copyandpastealltheimagesyouwanttoworkwithintothenewdocument.

3. SelectanimagelayerandchooseEdit FreeTransform.

4.Holddownthe[Shift]keyandusetheTransformboundstoscaleyourimagesoitoverlapstheonenexttoitbyhalfaninch,andthenpress[Enter].

5.

Repeatthesestepsonalltheimagesinyourmontage.Besuretodoallcolorcorrectingandsharpeningatthisstageaswell.Onceyouarrangeallofyourimages,youcanmoveontomasking.

Creatingthemask

Tomakethemontage,youfirstneedtoaddalayermasktoeachimage.Todothis:

1.Selectalayerandthen[Ctrl]-click( -clickontheMac)onthelayerthumbnailtoloadthelayer'sselection.

2. ChooseSelect Modify Contract.

3.

Enter20intheContractBytextboxintheresultingContractSelectiondialogbox,andclickOK.(Keepinmindthatallpixelsettingsdependontheresolutionatwhichyou'reworking,soyoumayneedtousedifferentsettingsthantheoneswe'veusedforour200-ppiimage.)Theselectionshrinks.

4.

ClicktheAddLayerMaskbutton atthebottomoftheLayerspalette.Amaskgeneratesbasedonyourselectionandyourimageisclipped.Repeatthisprocessforallofyourimages.Now,we'llshowyouhowtomanipulatethelayermasksforthedesiredeffect.

Page 400: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Modifyingthemask

Atthispoint,yourmaskisalittlesmallerthanyourimage,butithashardedges.Tosoftentheedges:

1.Makesurethatthemaskthumbnailisselectedonthelayer,andthenchooseFilter Blur GaussianBlur.

2.Enter40intheRadiustextboxintheresultingdialogbox,andthenclickOK.Yourimageshouldnowfadeoutonallfoursides.

3.

Repeatthisprocessforeachimage.Ifyoulikehowyourimagelooks,thenyou'redone.Ifnot,youcaneasilymodifythemaskofeachimageinanumberofways.We'llshowyouhowtoadjustitusingtheLevelscommandandtheBrushtool.

UsingLevels

OneoftheeasiestwaystoadjusttheamountoffadeistousetheLevelscommand.Toadjustthefade:

1. SelectyourmaskandthenchooseImage Adjustments Levels.

2.SlidetheblacktriangletotherightintheresultingLevelsdialogboxtotightenuptheamountoffadebetweentheblackandthewhite.

3.

SelectthePreviewcheckboxtoseehowyourLevelssettingsaffectthemaskedimageanditsrelationshipwithsurroundingimages.ThisisillustratedinFigureB.Youwon'tactuallyseethiswhileyou'reworkingthough.You'lljustseeyourimagefademoreorlessintothesurroundingimages.

FigureB.

Page 401: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4. ClickOKonceyoufindtherightsetting.

Makingspotcorrections

TheLevelscommandisagreatgeneral-purposetooltouseforadjustingyourimage.However,anytimeyoublendmultipleimagestogether,you'llusuallyneedtoadjustafewdetailsaswell.InourimageinFigureA,wedidn'twanttheangel'swingtofadeoutliketherestoftheimage,soweadjustedonlythatareaofthemask.Withlayermasks,theeasiestwaytodothisiswiththeBrushtool.Whenyouclickonalayer'smask,theforegroundandbackgroundcolorsaresettoblackandwhiteautomatically.

1.SelecttheBrushtool andthenselectafeatheredbrushthat'sproportionaltotheareayouwanttoworkon.

2.ChangetheSetForegroundColorswatchtowhitetoremovesomeunwantedfade.Youcanthenpaintdirectlyontotheaffectedarea.

3.

OpentheChannelspaletteandclickontheEyeiconnexttothechannelthatsaysLayerXMaskifyouwanttoviewthemaskaswellastheimage.Yourmaskappearsredontopoftheimage.

StartrefiningyourmaskintheLayerspalette.Youcanseehowwe'reremovinganysignsofrednessontopofthewinginFigureC.

Page 402: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureC.

Keepingiteditable

We'veshownyouhowtofadeimagesintooneanothergracefully.AlthoughyoucanachieveasimilareffectbyjustusingtheErasertool,layermasksenableyoutocreatethesameeffectandstillpreserveyouroriginalimage,whichishelpfulshouldyoudecidetomakeanychangestoyourwork.

Page 403: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Cutoutpartsofimageswithlayermasks

Fordecades,artists,photographers,andprintershaveusedmaskstoisolateandmodifyspecificareasofimages.Amasksectionsoffaportionofanimagesoyoucanmanipulateitortheareasurroundingit.Watercolorartists,forexample,paintwithfrisketmasksovertheirworktoholdbackorresistpaintfrombeingabsorbedbythepaper.Later,theycanpeeloffthefrisketandcontinuetoworkontheirpaintings.Graphicartistscutoutarubylithmaskforasectionofaphototheywanttoisolateorknockoutfromabackground.Latertheyusethemaskincombinationwithahalftonenegativetoburnaplateforprinting.UsingPhotoshop'sLayerMaskstoisolateareasinanimage,youcancreatemasksthatnotonlyworkexactlyasfrisketorrubylith,butcanalsobecontrolledinwaysneverimaginedbythoseusingtraditionalmaskingmethods.We'llusemaskingtechniquestocreatetheimageusedontheprogramcovershowninFigureA.

FigureA.

Page 404: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Selectyoursubject

Thefirstthingwemustdoisfindaphotowewanttoseparatefromitsconfusingbackground,asshowninFigureBonthenextpage.

FigureB.

Createthelayermask

1. OpenyourchosenimageinPhotoshop.

MakeaduplicateofitbyselectingDuplicateLayerfromtheLayerspalette's

Page 405: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2. pop-upmenusinceit'sbestnottoworkontheBackgroundlayer.

3.EnterOrchidsintheAstextboxwhentheDuplicateLayerdialogboxappears,andthenclickOK.

TherearetwotypesofmasksyoucancreateinPhotoshop:

Vectormask.Avectormaskisaresolution-independentvectorpath,whichyoucancreatewiththePenandShapetools.

Layermask.Alayermaskisaresolution-dependentgrayscalebitmapimage,whichyoucancreatewiththepaintingandselectiontools.

Sincewe'llpaintthemaskonourimageusingtheBrushtool,we'llcreatealayermask.Tocreatethemask:

1.

MakesureyourduplicatelayerisselectedontheLayerspaletteandturnoffthevisibilityofyourBackgroundlayerbyclickingontheEyeiconnexttothelayer.

2.

ClicktheAddLayerMaskbutton locatedatthebottomofthepalette.Alayermaskthumbnailappearsinthelayer,asdoesaLayerMaskLinkiconandaLayerMaskSelectedicon,asshowninFigureC.

FigureC.

Whenyouaddalayermasktoalayer,thebitmapmaskcreatedisagrayscaleimagestoredinthealphachannel.Sinceit'sanimage,youcaneditandmoveitlikeanyotherimage.Normally,amaskispositionedconcentricwiththeimage

Page 406: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

areaitmasks.Ifyouneedtomoveit,youcanunlinkitbyclickingontheLayerMaskLinkicontoremovethelinksymbol.

Changethelayermaskoptions

1.SelecttheareasyouwanttomaskusingtheBrushtool topaint,oredit,thelayermask.

2.ClickontheEditInQuickMaskModeicon intheToolboxtodisplayarubylithoverlayasyouworkonyourimage.

3.Double-clickonthelayermaskthumbnailtoadjusttherubylithdisplay.TheLayerMaskDisplayOptionsdialogboxdisplays.

4.Changethecoloroftheoverlaybydouble-clickingonthecolorswatchandselectinganewcolorintheColorPickerdialogbox.

5.

ChangetheopacityoftheoverlaybyenteringavalueintheOpacitytextbox,asshowninFigureD,orjustkeepthedefaultvalueof50%.

FigureD.

6.

ClickOKwhenyou'redone.Sincetheoverlayisonlyanindicationofthemaskandnotthemaskitself,makingchangesatanytimetotheoverlayoptionsdoesn'taffectthemask.

Editthelayermask

Now,let'sbegintoeditthelayermask.

Page 407: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

SelecttheBrushtoolfromtheToolbox.Thefirstthingyou'llnoticeisthattheSetForegroundandBackgroundColorSwatchesintheToolboxchangetograyscalevalues.Thisisbecause,aspreviouslymentioned,alayermaskisagrayscalebitmapimage.Youcaneditthelayermaskpaintinthefollowingways:

Black.Theblackgrayscalevalueaddstothelayermask.

White.Thewhitegrayscalevaluesubtracts,orerases,fromthelayermask.

Gray.Thegraygrayscalevaluespartiallyaddtothelayermaskandproduceasemitransparentmaskingeffect.Thecloserthegrayvalueistoblack,thelessthetransparency.

2. SelecttheblackswatchfromtheSwatchespalette.

3.

Selectabrushsizethatwillworkwellwiththeareasoftheimagetobemasked.Onthetooloptionsbar,clickontheBrushPresetPickerandselectasize,suchasaSoftRound35pxbrush,fromthedropdownlist.

Moveyourmousepointertoyourcanvasandbegintopaint,asshownintheexampleontheleftinFigureE.

FigureE.

Page 408: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

Continueaddingtothelayermaskuntilyouhavecompletelymaskedthearea

Page 409: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5. youwantinyourimage,asshownintheexampleontherightinFigureE.

Asyougo,youmighthavetocleanupareasofthemaskthathaveaccidentallycoveredsmallsectionsoftheimage.Toremovethem:

1.ClickontheSetForegroundColorswatchintheToolbox.TheColorPickerdialogboxappears.

2.SettheR,G,andBvaluesto255,respectively,tochangetheswatchtowhite,andtheneraseunwantedmaskedareaswithyourmousepointer.

Copyandpastethemaskedimage

Nowthatwe'vemaskedourimage,wecanselectitandthencopyandpasteitontoanewlayer.

1. SelecttheMagicWandtool fromtheToolbox.

2. SettheTolerancelevelto10onthetooloptionsbar.

Clickonyourmaskandaselectionborderappears,asshowninFigureF.

FigureF.

Page 410: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

4.SelecttheBackgroundlayerintheLayerspaletteandpress[Ctrl]C( ContheMac)tocopyyourselection.

5.CreateanewlayerbyclickingtheCreateANewLayerbutton ontheLayerspalette.

6.

Press[Ctrl]V( VontheMac)topasteyourselectionontoanewlayer,asshowninFigureG.

FigureG.

Page 411: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

7.

Double-clickonthenewlayerintheLayerspalette,andenteranameintheLayertextbox.WeenteredOrchidgroup.Yourorchidgroupselectionisreadytobeincludedinyourprogrambrochure.

Saveyourwork

Thefinalthingyoumustdoissaveyourfilesoyoucanplaceitinadocumentsuchasourprogrambrochure.IfyousaveitasaPSD(Photoshopdocument)oralayeredTIFFfile,youcangobackandmakefurtherchanges.

1.ChooseFile Save,andwhentheSaveAsdialogboxappears,enterafilenameintheSaveAstextbox.

2. SelectPhotoshoporTIFFfromtheFormatdropdownlist.

3. SelectafilestoragedestinationfromtheWheredropdownlist(Maconly).

4. SelecttheLayerscheckbox.

ClickSave,andyourfileisreadytobeincludedinapublication.

Page 412: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

5.

Marvelousmasks

Masksareaterrificwaytoselectareaswithinalayerthatyoucancopyfirstandthenfurthertransformormanipulate.SinceyoupaintlayermaskswiththeBrushtool,youbenefitfromthecontrolandprecisionderivedfromthatpaintingtool.

Page 413: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Editingwithvectormasks

Masksaregreataidsineditingphotosandartworkbecausetheyallowyoutoworkonoreditspecificareasofanimage.Asmentionedearlier,amaskisolatesanareaofanimagebyprotectingitfromediting.Forexample,ifyouwanttoapplyafiltereffectorcolortoonlyaportionofanimage,usingamaskisaperfectsolution.YoucanproducetwotypesofmasksinPhotoshop:layermasksandvectormasks.Wheneveryouneedtocreateaclean,sharp-edgedshapeforuseasamask,suchasforgeometricshapesororiginaldrawings,theVectorMaskcommandistheonetouse.

Note

Formoreaboutthedifferencesbetweenlayermasksandvectormasks,read"Layermasksvs.vectormasks,"laterinthischapter.

Greatcover-ups

Vectormasksaredefinedwithapath.YoucancreatepathsinavarietyofwaysbyusingaShapetool,thePentool,oraSelectiontool.Notonlydotheyproducesharp-edgedmaskshapes,butthey'realsoresolution-independentandeasilyeditedwiththePenandPathComponentstools.

WorkingwithaShapetool

1. LaunchPhotoshopandchooseFile Open.

2.

Navigatetoanimageyou'dliketoaddavectormaskto.Becausevectormasksareappliedtolayers,firstunlocktheoriginalimagelayer,whichbydefault,isnamedBackground.

3.DisplaytheLayerspaletteanddouble-clickontheBackgroundlayer.TheNewLayerdialogboxappears.

4. EnterSelectionintheNametextbox,andthenclickOK.

Page 414: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Makingavectorpath

1.SelectaShapetool,suchastheEllipsetoolicon,fromtheToolbox,andclickthePathsbuttonicononthetooloptionsbar.

2.

DraganellipticalpathonyourimageliketheoneshowninFigureA1onthepreviouspage.

FigureA1.

ChooseLayer AddVectorMask CurrentPath,andavectormaskisappliedintheshapeoftheellipsethatyoudrew,asshowninFigureA2.AvectormaskthumbnailisaddedtotheSelectionlayerintheLayerspalette,asshowninFigureB1.

FigureA2.

Page 415: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.

FigureB1.

Ifyouwishatanytimetodisablethevectormask,chooseLayer DisableVectorMaskandaredXappearsacrossthevectormaskthumbnail,asshowninFigureB2.Whenyoudothis,thefullimageintheSelectionlayerappearsagainwithoutthemask.Toenablethevectormaskagain,chooseLayer EnableVectorMaskandthevectormaskisrestored.Ifyouwishtoremovethevectormaskaltogether,youcaneitherselectLayer DeleteVectorMask,orselectthevectormaskthumbnailanddragitontotheDeleteLayerbutton locatedatthebottomoftheLayerspalette.WhentheDeleteVectorMaskmessageboxappears,clickOK.

FigureB2.

Page 416: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Movingthevectormask

LocatedbetweenthelayerthumbnailandthevectormaskthumbnailisaLinkedicon .Whentheiconisshowing,itmeansthatthelayerislinkedtothevectormask.IfyouselecteithericonandthenselecttheMovetool ,youcanclickanddragthelayerandthevectormaskmovesaswell,asshowninFigureC1.Ifyoudeselectthelink,selectthelayericon,andthenselecttheMovetool,youcanclickanddragthelayerwhilethemaskstaysinplace,asshowninFigureC2.

FigureC1.

FigureC2.

Page 417: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Changingtheshapeofthevectormask

Ifyouwanttochangetheshapeofthevectormask,youcanuseeithertheFreeTransformcommandortheDirectSelectiontool.TousetheFreeTransformcommand:

1.Clickonthevectormaskiconthumbnail,andthenchoosetheDirectSelectiontool fromtheToolbox.

2.

SelectEdit FreeTransformPath,chooseahandleontheboundingbox,dragittoadjustthevectormask,asshowninFigureD1>,andpress[Enter].

FigureD1.

Page 418: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

TousetheDirectSelectiontool:

1.SelecttheDirectSelectiontoolfromtheToolboxandthenchoosetheportionofthevectormaskpathyouwanttochange.

2.

Selectacontrolpoint,dragittoadjustthevectormask,asshowninFigureD2,andpress[Enter].

FigureD2.

Whenyou'vefinished,closeyourimagefile,becausewe'regoingtouseitagaintocreateavectormaskusingthePentool.Ifyouwanttosaveyourwork,youcansaveitasacopy.ChooseFile SaveAs,andwhentheSaveAsdialogboxopens,selecttheAsACopycheckbox,andthenclickSave.

MakingavectormaskwiththePentool

1.Openthefileagain,followingtheprocedurewedescribedearlier.(Don'tforgettounlockyourBackgroundlayer.)

SelectthePentool fromtheToolboxanddrawapath,asshowninFigureE1.

Page 419: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

FigureE1.

3.

ChooseLayer AddVectorMask CurrentPathandPhotoshopappliesavectormaskintheshapeofthepathyoudrewwiththePentool,asshowninFigureE2.

FigureE2.

YoucanadjustthepathyoudrewinthesamewayyouwouldanyotherpathusingtheDrawingtools,theFreeTransformcommand,andtheDirectSelectiontool.Forexample,toadjustthesectionofthevectormaskatthetopofthephoto:

1. SelecttheDirectSelectiontool,andthenselectthepath.

Page 420: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

ChoosetheConvertPointtool fromtheToolbox,selectthetopanchorpoint,anddragadirectionpoint,asshowninFigureF.Howeveryouadjustthepath,thevectormaskisalsoadjusted.

FigureF.

ProducingavectormaskwithaSelectiontool

TheSelectiontoolsincludetheMagicWand,theMarquee,andtheLassotools.YoucanusetheSelectiontoolstocreateaselectionborderthatyoucanthenconverttoapath.

1. SelecttheMagicWandtool fromtheToolbox.

2.Setatolerancebyentering15intheTolerancetextboxinthetooloptionsbar,andselectboththeAnti-AliasedandContiguouscheckboxes.

3.

Clickontheblankareaoutsidethemainobjectinyourimage.Toaddmoreareatoyourselection,[Shift]-click.Toremoveareasfromyourselection,[Alt]-click([option]-clickontheMac).

ChooseSelect Inverseandyouhaveaselectionareaofjustthemainobject,asshowninFigureG1.

Page 421: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

4.

FigureG1.

Convertingaselectionbordertoapath

Let'snextconvertourselectionbordertoapath.Beforewedo,weshouldfeathertheselectionsoourpathissmooth.

1. ChooseSelect Feather.TheFeatherSelectiondialogboxappears.

2. Enter10pixelsintheFeatherRadiustextboxandclickOK.

3. DisplaythePathspalettebychoosingWindow Paths.

4.ClicktheMakeWorkPathFromSelectionbutton locatedatthebottomofthePathspalettetochangetheselectiontoapath.

5. Double-clickonWorkPath.TheSavePathdialogboxopens.

6.

EnterSelectionPath3intheNametextbox,andthenclickOK.

Note

Workpathsaretemporarypaths,whichPhotoshopdoesn'tsavewithanimagefile.Tosaveaworkpath,usetheSaveAsoptionfromthePathspalette'spop-upmenu.

Page 422: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

7.

ChooseLayer AddVectorMask CurrentPath,andPhotoshopappliesavectormaskintheshapeofyourselectionborder,asshowninFigureG2.Toadjusttheshapeofthevectormask,applyanyofthemethodswedescribedearlierinthisdiscussionusingtheDrawingtools,theFreeTransformcommand,andtheDirectSelectiontool.

FigureG2.

Applyingalayerstyleeffecttoavectormask

Wecanapplylayerstyleeffects,suchasdropshadowsandinnershadows,tovectormasks.Theeffectsappearalongthevectormaskpath.Let'saddanouterglowlayerstyleeffect.

Todoso:

1. Double-clickontheSelectionPath3layer.TheLayerStyledialogboxdisplays.

SelecttheOuterGlowstyle.IntheElementssectionofthedialogbox,enteravaluelargeenoughsoyoucanseetheeffect,suchas160pixels,intheSizetextbox.Then,clickOKandPhotoshopappliesanoutergloweffect,asshowninFigureH.

FigureH.

Page 423: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.

Vectormasksuncovered

Applyingavectormasktoalayerisasimpleandquickwaytoisolateorprotectanareaofanimage.Avectormaskissharp-edged,resolution-independent,andeasytoadjust.Sinceavectormaskispathdefined,youcansaveitwithanimagefileanduseitatanothertime.

Layermasksvs.vectormasks

Masksareagreathelpwhenworkingwithimages.Theyprotectandisolateareasofanimagefromeditingactions,suchaspainting,drawing,anderasing.Asmentionedearlier,Photoshopincludestwotypesofmasks:layermasksandvectormasks.Althoughtheybothperformthesamefunctions,eachiscreatedinadifferentwayforadifferentpurpose.

Layermasksarerasterimagesthatyoucreateusingthepaintingtools.Likeotherrasterimagestheycanhaveareasthataresolid,transparent,andpartiallytransparent,aswellashardandsoftedges.YouuselayermaskswhenamaskrequiringintricatedetailthatcanbebestproducedutilizingtheBrushorPenciltool,asshowninFigureA,iscalledfor.

FigureA.

Page 424: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Vectormasksarevectorshapesthatyoucreateusingthedrawingtools,aswellastheshapeandselectiontools.Avectormaskcanhaveareasthataresolidandtransparent,butnotsemitransparent.Vectormaskshavehard,clean-cutedges.Youusethemwhenamaskrequiringsimple,pureshapesthatcanbebestproducedusingthePentool,aswellasaShapeorSelectiontool,asshowninFigureB,isneeded.

FigureB.

Page 425: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionFixaccidentalsilhouettes

Problem:Objectsintheforegroundofanimageappearsilhouetted.

Solution:Adjustthetonalvaluesofyourimagetobringadarkforegroundintothelightwithsomehelpfromamask.

Page 426: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Haveyouevertakenapicturedirectlyinfrontofawindow?Ifyouhave,andyoudidn'tuseeitheraflashorafill-flashtoreducethelightingratios,thenyourfinalprintwasprobablylessthandesirable.Duetostronglightingandverydarkshadows,anythinglocatedinfrontofthewindowwillbesilhouetted.Happily,Photoshopoffersthetoolsyouneedtolightenthingsup.

Makinganegative

1. OpenanimagethatyouwanttoretouchinPhotoshop.

2.MakeaseparatecopyoftheimagebychoosingImage Duplicate.TheDuplicateImagedialogboxopens.

3. NameyournewdocumentNegativeandclickOK.

4.

ChooseImage Mode GrayscaletochangethemodetoGrayscale.If,atthispoint,theAdobePhotoshopdialogboxdisplays,askingyoutodiscardcolorinformation,clickOK.

5. ChooseImage Adjustments Inverttocreateanegativeimage.

6.ChooseFilter Blur GaussianBlurtosoftentheedgesofyourimage.SettheRadiusofyourblurto5pixelsandclickOK.

7.

SaveyourfinalNegativedocumentasaPSDfile,butdon'tclosethedocument.We'renowreadytoapplythisimagetoouroriginalinordertodefinetheareasweneedtoaddlightto.

8. Clickonyouroriginalfiletomakeitactive.

Loadingyourselection

ToapplyyourNegativeimagetoyouroriginal,youhavetoloadtheselection.

1. ChooseSelect LoadSelection.TheLoadSelectiondialogboxdisplays.

2. SelectNegative.psdfromtheDocumentdropdownlist.

Page 427: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

3.MakesureGrayisselectedfromtheChanneldropdownlistandtheNewSelectionoptionbuttonisselectedaswell.

4. ClickOK.Thedarkareasofyourimageshouldnowbeselected.

Lightingshadows

1.KeepyourselectionactiveandcopythedarkportionsofyourimageontoanewlayerbychoosingLayer New LayerViaCopy.

2. NamethislayerLight.

3. ChooseEdit FilltodisplaytheFilldialogbox.

4.

Select50%GrayfromtheUsedropdownlistandselectColorDodgefromtheModedropdownlist.LeavetheOpacityofyourfillat100%andselectthePreserveTransparencycheckbox,whichwillpreventyourfillfromaffectinganyareasofthelayerthataretransparent.

5. ClickOK.Atthispoint,yourimageshouldlookmuchlighter.

Addingthefinaltouches

Althoughyourimageislookingmuchbetter,itstillmayneedadditionalretouching.Forexample,someareasofyourimagemaybetoowashedoutandothersmaystillbetoodark.However,withalittlefine-tuningyoucanremedythis.Let'sseehow.

Darkeningyourimage

Perhapsthebackgroundofyourimagewaslightenedtoomuch.Tocorrectoverlybrightenedareas:

1.ClicktheAddLayerMaskbutton ontheLayerspalettetoaddamasktoyourLightlayer.

Usingasoftroundbrush,withtheSetForegroundColorswatchsettoblack,

Page 428: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

2.paintouttheportionsofyourimagethatyouwantdarker.Formoresubtleresults,trypaintingyourmaskusinggray.Ifyouwanttodarkentheentireimage,justlowertheOpacityoftheLightlayerontheLayerspalette.

Lighteningyourimage

Ifyouwanttolightenportionsofyourimageevenmore:

1. MakeacopyofyourLightlayerintheLayerspalette.

2.

Maskoutanyareasthataretoolight.Formorefocusedretouching,saveaflattenedcopyofyourretouchedimage.Then,usingtheDodgetool withalowExposure,paintdirectlyoverareasthatneedtobelightened.

Puttingittothetest

Besidesworkingwonderfullyonpicturestakendirectlyinfrontofawindow,thistechniqueisgreatforretouchinganyimagewithalotofcontrast.Also,trymodifyingthetechniqueabitsoyoucanuseittoadjustthelightanddarkvaluesinallofyourimages.

Page 429: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Problem:SolutionRestorelosthighlightdetail

Problem:Highlightsappearwashedoutinahigh-contrastimage.

Solution:Usealuminositymask.

Page 430: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 431: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Asweallknow,itcanbechallengingtotaketheperfectpicture,especiallywhendealingwithhigh-contrastscenes,suchasthatinourProblemimage.Usuallyinthissituationhighlightsappearwashedout,anditcanbedifficulttobringbackdetailintotheseareaswithoutaffectingtheentireimage.However,withthehelpofaluminositymask,youcanselecthighlightareasseparatelytorecoverthehighlightdetail.Youcanusealuminositymasktoadjusttheshadowareasofanimageaswell.

What'saluminositymask?

Generallyspeaking,aluminositymaskisagrayscaleselectionthat'smadeupofthelightvalueswithinanimage.Whenyoupressaspecificcombinationofkeys,Photoshopautomaticallyselectsthehighlightsofthecontentswithinanactivelayer.Thewhiteareasareselected,thegrayareasarepartiallyselected,andtheblackareasareunselected,creatingaluminositymask.

Toseehowitworks:

1. OpenanRGBimageinPhotoshop.

2.Press[Ctrl][Alt][~]( [option][~]ontheMac).Upondoingso,allofyourhighlightareasareselected.

3. ChooseSelect SaveSelection.

4.ChooseNewfromtheChanneldropdownlistandnameyourchannelLuminosityMask.

5. ClickOK.

6.

Deselectyourimageatthispointbypressing[Ctrl]D( DontheMac).YourmaskwillnowbestoredintheChannelspalette.Toaccessit,allyouhavetodoisselectitintheChannelspalette.

Focusingonhighlights

Nowthatyouhaveabasicunderstandingofwhataluminositymaskis,it'stimetouseitforphotoretouching.

OpenanRGBimageinPhotoshopthathasoverlystronghighlights.

Page 432: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

1.

2.Createaluminositymaskbypressing([Ctrl][Alt][~]( [option][~]ontheMac).

3.Copytheselectedareasothatit'sonitsownlayerbypressing[Ctrl]J( JontheMac).

4.

Changetheluminositymasklayer'sblendingmodetoMultiplyintheLayerspalette.Thisenhancesthehighlightsinyourimage,makingthemappearclearer.

Workingwithshadows

Aluminositymaskisalsoperfectforselectingshadowsinanimage.Allyouhavetodoisinvertyouroriginalselection.Toseehowitworks:

1. Createaluminositymaskaswedidbefore.

2. Press[Ctrl][Shift]I( [shift]IontheMac)toselecttheinverse.

3.

Press[Ctrl]J( JontheMac)toplacetheselectedareaontoanewlayer.Then,todarkenyourshadowareas,changethelayer'sblendingmodetoOverlay,andtolightentheshadows,changetheblendingmodetoScreen.

Takingitastepfurther

We'vejusttouchedonhowaluminositymaskcanhelpkeepyourimageslookinggood.However,youcantakethisastepfurtherbyexperimentingwithallofthedifferentblendingmodesPhotoshophastoofferandbyadjustingtheOpacityofthelayerthatcontainsyourluminositymask.Also,ifnecessary,adjusttheoriginalselectionPhotoshopmakesbyswitchingtoQuickMaskModeandpaintingoutareasyoudon'twantadjusted.Becauseeveryimageisdifferent,weprovidedyouwiththecoreofthetechnique;therestisuptoyou.

Page 433: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 434: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

GlossaryAdjustmentlayer:

Layerthatbehaveslikealayer,butisreallyacustomizedfilterorlensthroughwhichyoucanviewyourimage.

Anti-aliased:

Soft-edgedratherthanjaggededges.

Aspectratio:

Theratioofanimage'sheighttowidth.

Brightness(orLightness):

Intensityvalueofanimage,whichisdescribedintermsofanyhuetoblackortowhite.

Burning:

Addinglighttospecificareasinaphotograph.InPhotoshop,theBurntoolallowsyoutolightenportionsofanimage.

Chromaticaberration:

Adigitalimageflawcausedbyaprocessingerrorinthedigitalcamerawhereoneormoreofthethreecolorchannelsdon'talignproperly.Theresultisacyan,yellow,red,blue,orgreenedge.Alsoknownasfringing.

Page 435: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Colorcast:

Unnaturalcolorveilthathidesthenaturalcolorofanimage.

Dodging:

Controllingtheexposureinphotographicprintingbyreducingtheamountoflightreachingspecificareasofthepaper.InPhotoshop,theDodgetoolallowsyoutodarkenportionsofanimage.

EPS(EncapsulatedPostScript):

Fileformatthatallowsvectorandrasterinformationtobesavedtogether.

Flat:

Adescriptionofaphotowithalow-contrastscenecontainingallthetonesoftheoriginal.Thisoccurswhentheimagecontainsnotruewhites,orhighlights,andblack,orshadows;everythingissimplyatoneofgray.

Fringing:

Adigitalimageflawcausedbyaprocessingerrorinthedigitalcamerawhereoneormoreofthethreecolorchannelsdon'talignproperly.Theresultisacyan,yellow,red,blue,orgreenedge.Alsoknownaschromaticaberration.

Gamma:

Relationshipbetweenthebrightnessofapixelandthenumericalvalueofthatpixel.Affectsthebrightnessandcolorsaturationofimages.

Page 436: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

GIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat):

Agraphicfileformatdesignedtorecordimageswithflatcolor,suchaslogos,lineart,screenshots,andcartoons,wheretherearelonghorizontalrunsofasinglecolor.

Guides:

Horizontalorverticallinesthatappearoveranimageonscreen.

High-contrast:

Conditionthatoccurswhenascenehasmanymoretonesthancanbereproducedbyfilmoranimagecard.

Histogram:

Agraphicofthepixelsinanimageorcolorchannelwhichrepresentsthetotaltonalrangeofanimage.

Hue:

Colorspectrumvalueofanimage,whichisdescribedintermsofred,orange,yellow,green,cyan,blue,violet,andmagenta.

Imagemanipulation/alteration:

Processofeditingpixelsinanimagetoreachadesiredresult.

Page 437: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Importing:

Processofbringinginafilefromanexternalsource,suchasadigitalcamera,scanner,etc.

Inputlevels:

Originalintensityvaluesofanimage,whicharegraphedalongthehorizontalaxisofahistogram.

JPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup):

Agraphicfileformatnormallyassignedtorecordandcompressfull-color,continuous-toneimages.Colorphotos,color-richillustrations,andgraphicswithsubtlegradientandshadingeffectsarethepurviewoftheJPEG.

Layermask:

Aresolution-dependentgrayscalebitmapimage,whichyoucancreatewiththepaintingandselectiontools.

Losslesscompression:

Filecompressionthatreducesfilesizewithoutchangingcolorvaluesanddegradingtheimage.

Lossycompression:

Filecompressionthatchangessomeofthecolorvaluesinanimagetosavediskspace.Thegreaterthecompression,themorevisiblethepixelcolorchangesappear;withlowamounts,theeffectofcompressionisalmost

Page 438: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

unnoticeable.

Low-contrast:

Conditionthatoccurswhenascenehasfewertonesinitthancanbereproducedbyfilmoranimagecard.

Luminositymask:

Agrayscaleselectionthat'smadeupofthelightvalueswithinanimage.

Mask:

Isolatesanareaofanimagebyprotectingitfromediting.

Noise:

Conditionthatoccurswhenpixelswithrandomlydistributedcolorlevelsareaddedtoanimage.Canbetheresultofadigitaldisturbancethatreducesthesignalreceivedbyadigitalcamera.

Normal-contrast:

Conditionthatoccurswhenascenehasthesamenumberoftonesascanbereproducedbyfilmoranimagecard.

Outputlevels:

Intensityvaluesthatareappliedwhenyou'vemadechangestoyourimage,whicharegraphedalongtheverticalaxisofahistogram.

Page 439: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Oversaturation:

Conditionthatoccurswhenadigitalcamera'simagesensormisreadsorbecomesoverlysensitivetoacolor,causingthelightinformationtoberecordedwithfewergrayvaluesandbecomemoresaturated.

Pixelation:

ResultofrasterizingafileinPhotoshopbeyondthemaximumresolutionofimages;stretchingimagedatatoofar.

PNG(PortableNetworkGraphics):

AgraphicfileformatdevelopedasanimprovedsubstitutefortheGIFformat.

Rasterization:

MethodofinformingPhotoshophowtoopenfilesbyinputtingyourdesiredsettings.

Resample:

Tosampleexistingcolorinanimageandthenaddorsubtractsimilarcolorpixelsuntilyoureachthedesiredresolution.

Saturation:

Thestrengthorpurityofacolor.

Page 440: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Sharp:

Descriptionofaphotoofahigh-contrastscenethatdoesn'tcontainallthetonesoftheoriginal.Thisoccurswhenithastoomanyhighlightsandshadows.

Sharp:

Conditionthatoccurswhenaphotoofahigh-contrastscenedoesn'tcontainallthetonesoftheoriginalimage.

TWAIN:

DriverwhichallowsthescannerandPhotoshoptospeakthesamelanguageandalsoputsthecontroloverhowthescannerperformsinyourhands.

Tonalrange:

Therangebetweenthebrightestanddarkestvaluesinascene.Whenthetonalvalueofasubjectishigherthantherangethefilmorimagesensorcanhandle,theobjectsappearwhite,eventhoughtheyreallyaren't.

Uprating:

ShootingatahigherISOspeedthanfilmisdesignedfor,whichinitiallyunderexposesthefilm,andthenpushing(overexposing)thenegativesduringtheprintingprocess.

Vectormask:

Aresolution-independentvectorpath,whichyoucancreatewiththePenand

Page 441: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Shapetools.

Page 442: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques
Page 443: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Appendix.Appendix

Page 444: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PhotoshopCSkeyboardshortcuts

Viewing

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

Fitimagetowindow [Ctrl]0

Viewimageat100%magnification [Alt][Ctrl]0

Zoominorout [Ctrl]+or[Ctrl]-

RepositionimagewithHandtool

Press[Spacebar]anddrag

Press[spacebar]anddrag

Moveviewtoupper-leftcorner [Home] [home]

Moveviewtolower-rightcorner [End] [End]

Cyclethroughopendocuments [Ctrl][Tab] [control][tab]

Coloradjustmentdialogboxes

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

DisplayAutoColor [Ctrl][Shift]B [shift]B

DisplayAutoContrast [Ctrl][Alt][Shift]L [option][shift]L

DisplayAutoLevels [Ctrl][Shift]L [shift]L

Page 445: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

DisplayLevels [Ctrl]L L

DisplayCurves [Ctrl]M M

DisplayHue/Saturation [Ctrl]U U

Filecommands

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

Createnewdocument [Ctrl]N N

DisplayFileBrowser [Ctrl][Shift]O [shift]O

Reverttosavedfile [F12] [F12]

Saveascopy [Ctrl][Alt]S [option]S

Closeallopendocuments [Ctrl][Alt]W [option]W

Selecting

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

Deleteselection [Backspace] [delete]

Deselectselection [Ctrl]D D

Invertselection [Ctrl][Shift]I [shift]I

Page 446: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Reselectselection [Ctrl][Shift]D [shift]D

Addtoselection Press[Shift]whileusinganyselectiontool

Press[shift]whileusinganyselectiontool

Deletefromselection Press[Alt]whileusinganyselectiontool

Press[option]whileusinganyselectiontool

Moveselectionusingthekeyboard Useoneofthearrowkeys Useoneofthearrow

keys

Moveselectionusingmouse

Positionpointerinselectionanddrag

Positionpointerinselectionanddrag

Constrainselectiontosquareorcircle

Holddown[Shift]whileselecting

Holddown[shift]whileselecting

Selectall [Ctrl]A A

Hideselection [Ctrl]H H

Workingwithtools

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

Cyclethroughhiddentools [Alt]-clickontoolthumbnail

[option]-clickontoolthumbnail

Displaytooloptions Right-clickinworkspace

[control]-clickinworkspace

Changecursortocrosshairs [CapsLock] [capslock]

Usingthefunctionkeys

Page 447: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

Undolastaction [F1]

ToggleBrushespalette [F5] [F5]

ToggleColorspalette [F6] [F6]

ToggleLayerspalette [F7] [F7]

ToggleInfopalette [F8] [F8]

Painting

Action Shortcut

Windows Mac

AccessEyedroppertooltoselectacolor

Holddown[Alt]whileusinganypaintingtool

Holddown[option]whileusinganypaintingtool

Fillselectionwithforegroundcolor [Alt][Backspace] [option][delete]

Fillselectionwithbackgroundcolor [Ctrl][Backspace] [delete]

Constrainpaintingtoastraightline [Shift] [shift]

DisplayFilldialogbox [Shift][Backspace] [shift][delete]

Page 448: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Page 449: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

ActualPixelscommand(Viewmenu)AddLayerMaskbutton2ndAddNoisedialogboxAddNoisefilter2nd3rd4th5thAddToSampleiconAddToSelectioniconAddVectorMaskcommand(Layermenu)AdjustmentlayersHue/Saturationcommand2ndAdjustmentscommand(Imagemenu)AdobeGammaforWindowsAirbrushoption2ndbasecoloraddition2ndBrushtoolBrushespalettehighlightcolorsmid-tonecoloradditionretouching2ndScatteringoption2ndsettingAlignedoptions,HealingBrushtoolAlteringimagesAirbrushoption2ndbasecoloraddition2ndBrushtoolBrushespalettehighlightcolorsmid-tonecoloradditionretouching2nd

Page 450: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Scatteringoption2ndsettingburningedgescolorburn2nderasing2ndpreparation2ndscorchedges2ndcombiningimagesadjustinglayersExtractcommand2nd3rd4th5thpreparation2ndfiltersaddingtexturewithgrain2nd3rd4th5thcombininglayers2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8thFilterGallery2nd3rd4thportraits2nd3rd4thGradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2ndplanningmovesplottingpathssplittingareaslightingaddingHistorypalette2ndselectingdarkareasmaskscuttingimageparts2nd3rd4th5th6thlayering2nd3rd4thselections2nd3rd4th5th6th7th

Page 451: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

vectormaskediting2nd3rd4th5th6th7threflectionscopyingandflippingimageGlassfilterincreasingimagesize2ndLiquifyfilteropacityadjustmentpositioningAmountslider,UnsharpMaskfilterAnti-aliasingreducingfilesizeselectionApplications,plug-ins2ndArchitectureretouchingclearingclutter2ndcomplexpatcheswithlayerscorrectingslantusingotherpartsofimages2ndArtisticimagemanipulationAirbrushoption2ndbasecoloraddition2ndBrushtoolBrushespalettehighlightcolorsmid-tonecoloradditionretouching2ndScatteringoption2ndsettingburningedgescolorburn2nderasing2ndpreparation2ndscorchedges2nd

Page 452: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

combiningimagesadjustinglayersExtractcommand2nd3rd4th5thpreparation2ndGradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2ndplanningmovesplottingpathssplittingareaslightingaddingHistorypalette2ndselectingdarkareasreflectionscopyingandflippingimageGlassfilterincreasingimagesize2ndLiquifyfilteropacityadjustmentpositioningAutobutton,CurvescommandAutoColorCorrectionOptionsdialogboxAutoContrastcommandAutoLevelscommandAutomaticsharpening,avoidingnoiseAutomatingtasks,FileBrowser

Page 453: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

BackgroundlayerBlackClipbox,Shadow/Highlightcommand2ndBlendingmodesColor2ndColorReplacementtoolHue2ndOverlaySoftLightBlueskies,avoidingnoiseBlurcommand(Filtermenu)BrightnessColorCorrectionslidertonalrange2ndaddingmissingdetails2nd3rd4thadjustingAutoContrastcommandBurntool2nd3rd4th5thcontrast2ndDodgetool2nd3rd4th5thhistograms2nd3rd4thShadow/Highlightcommand2nd3rd4th5th6thBrightness/ContrastdialogboxBrowsecommand(Filemenu)Brushdropdownlist,HealingBrushtoolBrushSizesliderBrushtoolBrushescommand(Windowmenu)BrushespaletteBurntool2nd3rd

Page 454: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

application2ndpreparation2nd3rdBurningimageedgescolorburn2nderasing2ndpreparation2ndscorchedges2nd

Page 455: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

CachefileexportingCacheLevelinformation,HistogrampaletteCachedDataWarningbuttonCalibratingmonitor2ndcolorcastsCameras,digitalavoidnoiseimportingimagesCancelbuttonCanvasSizecommand(Imagemenu)Cardreaders,importingimagesChanneldropdownlistChannelinformation,HistogrampaletteChannelscommand(Windowmenu)Channels,Curvesdialogbox2ndChromaticaberration,ColorReplacementtool2ndClearGuidescommand(Viewmenu)CloneStamptool2ndCloning,addingmissingdetails2ndCMYK(Cyan,Magenta,Yellow,Black),colorspacesColorBalancesection,VariationsdialogboxColorCorrectionsliderColorIntensitysliderColormode2ndColorPickerdialogboxColorRangecommand(Selectmenu)ColorReplacementtoolchangingeyecolors2ndchromaticaberration2ndfringingreplacement

Page 456: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

haircolorchangesoptionsColorscastsLevelscommand2ndMatchColorcommand2ndcorrectionadjustingtonalrangeadjustmentlayerscolorbalanceColorReplacementtool2nd3rd4th5thCurvescommand2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8thevaluation2ndHue/Saturationcommand2nd3rd4th5th6thMatchColorcommand2nd3rd4thReplaceColorcommand2nd3rd4th5thsharpenimagesspecialeffects2ndVariationscommand2nd3rd4th5thsaturationspaceCombiningimagesadjustinglayersExtractcommand2nd3rd4th5thpreparation2ndCombininglayersCutoutfilter2ndDiffuseGlowfilter2ndextralayeraddition2nd3rdleveladjustmentspreviewing2ndsavingsettings

Page 457: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Texturizerfilter2ndCommandsEditmenuFadeFillFillFreeTransformTransformFilemenuBrowseImportOpenSaveAsSaveforWebFilemenu(FileBrowser),ExportCacheFiltermenuBlurDistortExtractFilterGalleryLiquifyNoiseOtherSharpenStylizeFormatmenu,PictureImagemenuAdjustmentsCanvasSizeDuplicateImageSize2ndModeInsertmenu,Picture

Page 458: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

LayermenuAddVectorMaskDeleteVectorMaskDisableVectorMaskNewAdjustmentLayerSelectmenuColorRangeFeatherInverseModifySaveSelectionViewmenuActualPixelsClearGuidesLockGuidesMasterNewGuideNormalRulersSnapToolbarsWindowmenuBrushesChannelsHistogramInfoLayersPathsSwatchesCompression,JPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2ndCompuServe,GIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)ContractSelectiondialogboxContrast2nd

Page 459: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

adjustingtonalrangeAutoContrastcommandMidtoneContrastsliderContrastsection,VariationsdialogboxControlpoints,Curvescommand2nd3rdControlsection,Variationsdialogbox2ndControlledsharpening2ndConvertPointtoolCorrectingcolorsadjustingtonalrangeadjustmentlayerscolorbalanceColorReplacementtool2nd3rd4th5thCurvescommandchannels2ndcontrolpoints2nd3rddialogboxaccessdrawingwithPenciltoolloading2ndpurpose2ndreadingcurve2ndsaving2ndshortcuts2ndevaluation2ndHue/Saturationcommandreducingsaturation2ndselectingarea2nd3rd4th5thMatchColorcommand2nd3rd4thReplaceColorcommand2nd3rd4th5thsharpenimagesspecialeffects2ndVariationscommand2nd3rd4th5thCountinformation,HistogrampaletteCreateNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbutton

Page 460: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

CreateNewSnapshotbuttonCroppingselectionsguides2ndcreating2ndmeasuringimageCurvescommandchannels2ndcontrolpoints2nd3rddialogboxaccessdrawingwithPenciltoolloading2ndpurpose2ndreadingcurve2ndsaving2ndshortcutsAutobuttonCMYKmodeEyedroppertool2ndCurvesdialogbox2ndCutoutfilter2nd

Page 461: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

DeleteLayerbuttonDeleteVectorMaskcommand(Layermenu)DesktopView,FileBrowserDestinationoption,PatchtoolDialogboxesAddNoiseAutoColorCorrectionOptionsBrightness/ContrastColorPicker2ndContractSelectionCurves2ndDuplicateImageDuplicateLayer2ndExtractFeatherSelectionFilterGalleryFormatPictureHue/Saturation2ndImageSize2ndLayerMaskDisplayOptionsLevels2nd3rd4thMatchColorMaximumMedianModifyQualitySettingNewGuideNewLayer2nd

Page 462: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

RasterizeGenericEPSFormatReplaceColor2nd3rdSaveForWeb2nd3rdSaveOptimizedAsSavePathSaveSelectionSavedOptimizedAsShadow/HighlightshortcutsUnsharpMaskVariations2nd3rdDiffuseGlowfilter2ndDigitalcamerasavoidnoiseimportingimagescardreadersplug-ins2ndDirectSelectiontoolDisableVectorMaskcommand(Layermenu)DisplayCalibratorAssistantDisplaydropdownlistDisplays,calibratingmonitor2ndDistortcommand(Filtermenu)DocumentSizepanelDodgetool2ndapplication2ndpreparationbrushselection2ndExposureoption2ndRangeoptionDragging,creatingnewguide2ndDuplicatecommand(Imagemenu)DuplicateImagedialogboxDuplicateLayerdialogbox2nd

Page 463: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

EdgeHighlightertool2nd3rdEditInQuickMaskModebuttonEditInStandardModebuttonEditmenucommandsFadeFillFillFreeTransformTransformEnlargePreviewWindowbuttonEPS(EncapsulatedPostScript),importingfilesoptionsrasterization2ndresolutionconsiderationsErasertool2ndEvaluatingimages2ndExportCachecommand(Filemenu-FileBrowser)Exporting,cachefilesExposureoption2ndExposure,tonalrange2ndaddingmissingdetails2nd3rd4thadjustingAutoContrastcommandBurntool2nd3rd4th5thcontrast2ndDodgetool2nd3rd4th5thhistograms2nd3rd4thShadow/Highlightcommand2nd3rd4th5th6thExtractcommand(Filtermenu)Extractdialogbox

Page 464: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

EyedroppericonEyedropperPlusiconEyedroppertoolCurvescommand2ndEyes,ColorReplacementtool2nd

Page 465: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Faceeyes,ColorReplacementtool2ndlines2ndskinflaws2ndFadeFillcommand(Editmenu)FadesliderFeathercommand(Selectmenu)FeatherSelectiondialogboxFileBrowser2ndautomatingtasksexportingcachefilesFilemenucommandsBrowseImportOpenSaveAsSaveforWebFilemenucommands(FileBrowser),ExportCacheFilesFileBrowser2ndautomatingtasksexportingcachefilesformatsGIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)2ndJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)JPEG2000(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)PNG(PortableNetworkGraphics)2ndselectionbasedoncontent2nd

Page 466: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

openingdigitalcameras2ndEPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)2nd3rdscannerimporting2ndreducingsize2nd3rdFillcommand(Editmenu)FilltoolFilmGrainfilter2ndFilterGallerydisplayingfilterspreviewing2ndsettingoptionsstackingfilters2nd3rdFilterGallerycommand(Filtermenu)FilterGallerydialogboxFiltermenucommandsBlurDistortExtractFilterGalleryLiquifyNoiseOtherSharpenStylizeFiltersAddNoise2ndgrainoptionsaddingtexturewithgrain2ndAddNoisefilter2ndFilmGrainfilter2ndTextureGrainfilter2nd

Page 467: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

combininglayersCutoutfilter2ndDiffuseGlowfilter2ndextralayeraddition2nd3rdleveladjustmentspreviewing2ndsavingsettingsTexturizerfilter2ndFilterGallerydisplayingfilterspreviewing2ndsettingoptionsstackingfilters2nd3rdMaximum2ndportraitssharpensoftareas2nd3rdsoftensharpareasUnsharpMaskapplication2nd3rdhowitworks2ndFine/CoarsesliderFireWires,importingimagesFocus,Gradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2ndplanningmovesplottingpathssplittingareasForceForegroundoptionFormatmenucommands,PictureFormatPicturebuttonFormatPicturedialogbox

Page 468: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ForwardWarptoolFreeTransformcommand(Editmenu)FreeTransformfeature2nd3rdFringingFunctionkeys,keyboardshortcutsFuzzinessslider

Page 469: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Gammas2ndGaussiannoiseGaussianoptionbuttonGIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)2ndlossycompressionGlassfilter,reflectionsGradientbars,readingcurvesGradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2ndplanningmovesplottingpathssplittingareasGrainAddNoisefilteraddingtexture2ndAddNoisefilter2ndFilmGrainfilter2ndTextureGrainfilter2ndGraphicsInterchangeFormat(GIF)2ndlossycompressionGrayscalecolorspacesHue/SaturationcommandGuides2ndcreating2nd

Page 470: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Infopalettepositioning2ndresettingruleoriginpoint

Page 471: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

HealingBrushtool2nd3rd4th5thHighcontrastHighlightandFilldropdownlistsHighlightsAirbrushoptionmutingHighlightsAmountsliderHistogramcommand(Windowmenu)HistogrampaletteHistograms2nd3rd4thpalette2ndreading2ndHistoryBrushtool2nd3rdHistorypalette,lighting2ndHuemode2ndHue/Saturationcommandcombiningcolorandgrayscaleimagerypreviewingimagereducingsaturation2ndselectingarea2ndinvertarea2ndmakingselection2nd3rdsavingtoolselectionHue/Saturationdialogbox2nd

Page 472: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

ImagemenucommandsAdjustmentsCanvasSizeDuplicateImageSize2ndModeImageoptionbuttonImageSizecommand(Imagemenu)2ndImageSizedialogbox2ndImagesburningedgescolorburn2nderasing2ndpreparation2ndscorchedges2ndcolorcorrectionadjustingtonalrangeadjustmentlayerscolorbalanceColorReplacementtool2nd3rd4th5thCurvescommand2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8thevaluation2ndHue/Saturationcommand2nd3rd4th5th6thMatchColorcommand2nd3rd4thReplaceColorcommand2nd3rd4th5thsharpenimagesspecialeffects2nd

Page 473: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

combiningadjustinglayerscontrast2nd[Seealsocontrast]importingdigitalcameras2ndEPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)2nd3rdscanners2ndoptimizingforwebJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8th9th10thlogofiles2nd3rdreflectionscopyingandflippingimageGlassfilterincreasingimagesize2ndLiquifyfilteropacityadjustmentpositioningImportcommand(Filemenu)Importingfilesdigitalcameras2ndEPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)2nd3rdscanners2ndInfocommand(Windowmenu)InfopaletteInfrared,importingimagesInputlevels,readingcurvesInsertmenucommands,PictureInversecommand(Selectmenu)Invertingselections2ndISOsettings,avoidnoise

Page 474: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

JointPhotographicExpertsGroup[SeeJPEG]JointPhotographicExpertsGroup(JPEG2000)JPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)ModifyQualitySettingcommand2ndadjustqualityareas2ndcomparequalitylevelsettings2ndselectingsubjectarea2ndoptimizingforwebcompressingimage2nd3rdresizingdimensions2nd3rdsavingfileJPEG2000(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)

Page 475: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

KeyboardshortcutsdialogboxesfilecommandsfunctionkeyspaintingselectionviewingworkingwithtoolsKeywordspane,FileBrowser

Page 476: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Lab(Luminosity,Alpha,Beta),colorspacesLabmodeLassotool2ndLayerMaskDisplayOptionsdialogboxLayerMaskSelectediconLayermenucommandsAddVectorMaskDeleteVectorMaskDisableVectorMaskNewAdjustmentLayerLayerVisibilityiconLayersadjustmentHue/Saturationcommand2ndcombiningCutoutfilter2ndDiffuseGlowfilter2ndextralayeraddition2nd3rdleveladjustmentspreviewing2ndsavingsettingsTexturizerfilter2ndmaskscreating2nd3rd4thediting2ndimagesetupmodification2nd3rdversusvectormasks

Page 477: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Layerscommand(Windowmenu)LayerspaletteLevelinformation,HistogrampaletteLevelscommand2ndcolorcasts2ndunderexposurecorrection2ndLevelsdialogbox2nd3rd4thLightingaddingHistorypalette2ndselectingdarkareasLimits,ColorReplacementtoolLinkediconLiquifycommand(Filtermenu)Liquifyfilter,reflectionsLoadbutton2ndLoadPathAsASelectionbuttonLockGuidescommand(Viewmenu)Logofiles,optimizingforweb2nd3rdLossycompression,reducingfilesizeLowcontrastLuminanceslider

Page 478: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

MagicWandtoolMagnification,ZoomtoolMakeWorkPathFromSelectionbuttonManipulatingimagesAirbrushoption2ndbasecoloraddition2ndBrushtoolBrushespalettehighlightcolorsmid-tonecoloradditionretouching2ndScatteringoption2ndsettingburningedgescolorburn2nderasing2ndpreparation2ndscorchedges2ndcombiningimagesadjustinglayersExtractcommand2nd3rd4th5thpreparation2ndfiltersaddingtexturewithgrain2nd3rd4th5thcombininglayers2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8thFilterGallery2nd3rd4thportraits2nd3rd4th

Page 479: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Gradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2ndplanningmovesplottingpathssplittingareaslightingaddingHistorypalette2ndselectingdarkareasmaskscuttingimageparts2nd3rd4th5th6thlayering2nd3rd4thselections2nd3rd4th5th6th7thvectormaskediting2nd3rd4th5th6th7threflectionscopyingandflippingimageGlassfilterincreasingimagesize2ndLiquifyfilteropacityadjustmentpositioningMaskscuttingimagepartscreatinglayermask2nd3rdeditinglayermask2ndoptionchangespasting2ndsaving2ndlayerscreatingmask

Page 480: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

imagesetupmodification2nd3rdselectionsediting2ndhidingbackground2nd3rdimageselectioninvertingselectionsaving2ndtoolvectormaskeditinglayerstyleeffectPentoolShapetool2nd3rd4th5th6thMastercommand(Viewmenu)MatchColorcommandcolorcorrection2ndmatchingcolor2ndMatchColordialogboxMaximumdialogboxMaximumfilter2ndMeaninformation,HistogrampaletteMediandialogboxMedianinformation,HistogrampaletteMetadatapane,FileBrowserMicrosoftPowerPointadjustingimages2ndcreatingtemplatesimagepreparationresizingimage2ndsavingMid-tonecolors,AirbrushoptionMidtoneContrastsliderModecommand(Imagemenu)Modedropdownlist,HealingBrushtoolModifycommand(Selectmenu)

Page 481: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

ModifyQualitySettingcommand,JPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2ndadjustqualityareas2ndcomparequalitylevelsettings2ndselectingsubjectarea2ndModifyQualitySettingdialogboxMonitorscalibrating2ndcolorcasts2ndMonochromaticcheckbox,AddNoisedialogboxMovetoolMultiplecontrolpointadjustments

Page 482: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

NewAdjustmentLayercommand(Layermenu)NewEffectLayerbuttonNewFillOrAdjustmentLayerbuttonNewGuidecommand(Viewmenu)NewGuidedialogboxNewLayerdialogbox2ndNewSelectioniconNoiseAddNoisefilter2nd3rdaddingmissingdetails2nd3rdavoidinginimagesblendingmodes2ndblurring2ndchangingcolorslocatingproblemNoisecommand(Filtermenu)Normalcommand(Viewmenu)Normalcontrast

Page 483: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

OpacitysliderOpacity,reflectionsOpencommand(Filemenu)Openingfilesdigitalcameras2ndEPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)2nd3rdscannerimports2ndOptimizationfileformatsGIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)2ndJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)JPEG2000(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)PNG(PortableNetworkGraphics)2ndselectionbasedoncontent2ndMicrosoftPowerPointadjustingimages2ndcreatingtemplatesimagepreparationresizingimage2ndsavingprecisecroppingselectionsguides2nd3rd4th5thmeasuringimagereducingfilesize2nd3rdwebfilesJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8th9th10th

Page 484: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

logofiles2nd3rdOptionsbuttonOrganization,FileBrowser2ndautomatingtaskexportingcachefilesOriginpoints,guidesOthercommand(Filtermenu)Outputlevels,readingcurvesOverlaymodeOversaturation[Seesaturation]

Page 485: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

PaintBuckettoolPaintingAirbrushoption2ndbasecoloraddition2ndBrushtoolBrushespalettehighlightcolorsmid-tonecoloradditionretouching2ndScatteringoption2ndsettingkeyboardshortcutsSpongetoolPatchtool2nd3rd4th5thPathscommand(Windowmenu)PathspalettePentool,vectormaskseditingPenciltool,drawingcurvesPercentileinformation,HistogrampalettePicturecommand(Formatmenu)Picturecommand(Insertmenu)PixelationPixelsgammas2ndreducingfilesize2nd3rdPixelsinformation,HistogrampalettePlug-ins,importingimages2ndPNG(PortableNetworkGraphics)2ndPolygonalLassotool

Page 486: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

PortableNetworkGraphics(PNG)2ndPortraits,filterssharpensoftareas2nd3rdsoftensharpareasPositioningguides2ndPowerPointadjustingimages2ndcreatingtemplatesimagepreparationresizingimage2ndsavingPreviewpane,FileBrowserProblemsandsolutionsblurringincompressedwebfiles2ndcolorcasts2ndcorrectingcolorcasts2ndeliminatingsilhouettes2ndfaciallinesandwrinkles2ndobjectremovalfromphoto2ndoversaturation2ndremovingimagefrombackground2ndremovingnoise2ndresizingimages2ndrestoringhighlightdetail2ndrestoringoverexposure2ndrestoringunderexposedshadowdetail2ndsharpeningimages2ndskinflaws2ndunderexposedcolorrestoration2nd

Page 487: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

RadiussliderShadow/HighlightcommandUnsharpMaskfilterRangeoptionRasterization,EPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)2ndRasterizeGenericEPSFormatdialogboxRectangularMarqueetool2ndReflectionscopyingandflippingimageGlassfilterincreasingimagesize2ndLiquifyfilteropacityadjustmentpositioningRegularcurvemodeiconRemovablestoragemedia,importingimagesReplaceColorcommanddeterminingcolor2nd3rd4thsettingcolorReplaceColordialogbox2nd3rdResetbuttonResizingimages,JPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2nd3rdResolution,EPS(EncapsulatedPostScript)Retouchingtechniquesarchitectureclearingclutter2ndcomplexpatcheswithlayerscorrectingslant

Page 488: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

usingotherpartsofimages2ndHealingBrushtool2nd3rd4th5thPatchtool2nd3rd4th5thskinflaws2ndSpongetool2nd3rd4th5thRetouching,Airbrushoption2ndRGB(Red,Green,Blue),colorspacesRulerscommand(Viewmenu)

Page 489: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Sampling,ColorReplacementtoolSaturationcolorscorrectingoversaturation2ndreducing2ndSaveAscommand(Filemenu)SaveAsDefaultsbutton,Shadow/HighlightcommandSavebuttonSaveforWebcommand(Filemenu)SaveforWebdialogbox2nd3rdSaveOptimizedAsdialogboxSavePathdialogboxSaveSelectioncommand(Selectmenu)SaveSelectiondialogboxSavedOptimizedAsdialogboxSavingJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)selectionsScanners,importingimages2ndScatteringoption,Airbrushoption2ndScorchingimageedges2ndSelectmenucommandsColorRangeFeatherInverseModifySaveSelectionSelectionoptionbuttonSelections

Page 490: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

guides2ndcreating2ndinvertingarea2ndkeyboardshortcutsmakingselection2nd3rdmasksediting2ndhidingbackground2nd3rdimageselectioninvertingselectionsaving2ndtoolMatchColorcommand2ndmeasuringimagesavingtoolselection2ndSerialports,importingimagesSetForegroundColortoolSetGrayPointeyedroppertoolSetToEnableAirbrushCapabilitiesbuttonShadow/Highlightcommand2ndadvancedadjustments2nd3rddefaultsettingsloadingmutinghighlightsRadiusslidersavingTonalWidthslider2ndShadow/HighlightdialogboxShadowsAmountsliderShadows,avoidingnoiseShapetool,vectormasks2nd3rd4thSharpencommand(Filtermenu)Sharpeningimages

Page 491: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

UnsharpMaskfilterapplication2nd3rdhowitworks2ndShortcutsCurvescommandAutobuttonCMYKmodeEyedroppertool2nddialogboxesfilecommandsfunctionkeyspaintingselectionviewingworkingwithtoolsShowdropdownlistShowHighlightandShowFilloptionsSinglecontrolpointadjustmentsSizingfileformatsGIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)2ndJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)JPEG2000(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)PNG(PortableNetworkGraphics)2ndselectionbasedoncontent2ndreducingfilesize2nd3rdwebfilesJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8th9th10thlogofiles2nd3rdSkies,avoidingnoiseSkinflaws2ndSmartHighlightingoptionSmoothslider

Page 492: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Snapcommand(Viewmenu)SoftLightmodeSolutionstoproblemsblurringincompressedwebfiles2ndcolorcasts2ndcorrectingcolorcasts2ndeliminatingsilhouettes2ndfaciallinesandwrinkles2ndobjectremovalfromphoto2ndoversaturation2ndremovingimagefrombackground2ndremovingnoise2ndresizingimages2ndrestoringhighlightdetail2ndrestoringoverexposure2ndrestoringunderexposedshadowdetail2ndsharpeningimages2ndskinflaws2ndunderexposedcolorrestoration2ndSourceoptionsHealingBrushtoolPatchtoolSpecialeffects,colorcorrection2ndSpongetoolcolorsaturationpaintingpreviewingwithHue/Saturationcommandsettingselection2ndStdDevdata,HistogrampaletteStylizecommand(Filtermenu)SubtractFromSelectioniconSwatchescommand(Windowmenu)Swatchespalette

Page 493: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Templates,MicrosoftPowerPointTextureGrainfilter2ndTexture,addingwithgrain2ndAddNoisefilter2ndFilmGrainfilter2ndTextureGrainfilter2ndTexturizerfilter2ndThresholdlevels,UnsharpMaskfilterThumbnailspane,FileBrowser2ndTolerances,ColorReplacementtoolTonalranges2ndaddingmissingdetailscloning2ndnoise2nd3rdadjustingAutoContrastcommandBurntool2ndapplication2ndpreparation2nd3rdcontrast2ndDodgetool2ndapplication2ndpreparation2nd3rdhistogramspalette2ndreading2ndShadow/Highlightcommand2ndadvancedadjustments2nd3rd

Page 494: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

defaultsettingsloadingmutinghighlightsRadiusslidersavingTonalWidthslider2ndTonalWidthslider,Shadow/Highlightcommand2ndToolbarscommand(Viewmenu)Transformcommand(Editmenu)TrashbuttonTWAINdrivers2nd

Page 495: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

UncachedRefreshbuttonUnderexposedimages,avoidingnoiseUniformnoiseUnsharpMaskdialogboxUnsharpMaskfilterapplication2nd3rdhowitworks2ndportraitfiltering2nd3rdUSB,importingimagesUseAChannelToModifyQualitySettingbuttonUsePatternoption,PatchtoolUSMfilter[SeeUnsharpMaskfilter]

Page 496: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Variationscommanddialogaccess2nd3rdmakingadjustments2nd3rdVariationsdialogbox2nd3rdVectormaskseditinglayerstyleeffectPentoolShapetool2nd3rd4th5th6thversuslayermasksVectorpathsViewmenucommandsActualPixelsClearGuidesLockGuidesMasterNewGuideNormalRulersSnapToolbarsViewing,keyboardshortcutsVisualfocus,Gradienttooladjustmentsapplyingtolayer2ndconvertingpathtoselectionborderfindingfocus2nd

Page 497: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

planningmovesplottingpathssplittingareas

Page 498: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

WebfileformatsGIF(GraphicsInterchangeFormat)2ndJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)JPEG2000(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)PNG(PortableNetworkGraphics)2ndselectionbasedoncontent2ndoptimizingfilesJPEG(JointPhotographicExpertsGroup)2nd3rd4th5th6th7th8th9th10thlogofiles2nd3rdreducingfilesize2nd3rdWhiteClipbox,Shadow/Highlightcommand2ndWindowmenucommandsBrushesChannelsHistogramInfoLayersPathsSwatchesWorkspace,calibratingmonitor2ndWrinkles2nd

Page 499: Essential Photoshop Editing Techniques

Index

[A][B][C][D][E][F][G][H][I][J][K][L][M][N][O][P][R][S][T][U][V][W][Z]

Zoomtool2nd